Home

User`s Manual - Stanford Research Systems

Contents

1. z 15 S 10 o 8 I 5 75 o Aggressive Moderate o 5 70 5 Conservative a E 65 o 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 Minutes However the results are much different if we look at how the system responds to a thermal disturbance The next figure shows how well the system recovers when we start blowing air over the heater with a fan The setpoint is a constant 60 C In this case aggressive tuning produces the best response Ases PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 46 Heater power W Aggressive Moderate 60 59 Conservative Temperature C 58 0 1 2 3 4 b Minutes The actual behavior of your system might vary significantly from the behavior shown in these figures In any event the feedback gains determined by the automatic tuning algorithms should generally be regarded as only a starting point In critical applications the gains normally need to be manually adjusted to achieve good feedback performance Using the automatic tuner Start with a stable temperature Before the autotuner is started the temperature must be stable If the system hasn t been tuned before the easiest way to get a stable temperature is to let the system sit undisturbed for a long period of time with the heater off On the other hand if the PID gains have been set before and just need to be re optimized it may be easier to turn the feedback loop on and let the feedback stabilize the tem
2. 144 PTC320 I channel thermistor diode RTD reader sss 144 PT C321 4 channel RTD reader sacs n ecrire FEE FECERIS eh 145 PT C330 thermocouple reader sss 146 PT C420 AC output Card 6 ore titre reir eee reet riei ir a eer rire Pres 147 PTC430 50W DG output card aie ieee sternite 147 PTCA Q0W DC output card 2 nni rtt rti ilte 148 PCA AO TEG areae etu HRHPERUPERHONRREHRIEII UNO UNUS 149 PICS Ovanalog O CI m M 150 PT 520 disital ZO sated coo eter ttte eerte tese eu Det eee ALEEA TAE Diac e necu 151 Parts List 153 age reir Ems 153 PTC22 backplanes sus ssUPSRPPSRUPURPPOPUNENDNUNBRENUSERUBQRIIERUHURD EU 157 PTC23 front panel sanam enano onanema aaa dan d RUE 159 PT 240 GRIB Opto Meissner tirer ote he Peer eique quedas l6l PTC320 I channel thermistor diode and RTD reader eere 162 PTC321 4 channel RTD reader sss tenente nennen 165 PT C330 thermocouple reader sss 168 PT C420 AC output Cardin cin edic e er a ET PE CHAP Ee IE TRE RRA 172 PTC430 50W DC output card sse tnnt enne nnns 174 PTCA440 TEC driVer in teret n ra rir tare REOR e RH ESEE HERE ESAE 176 PTCSIO analog I O Cardiac eie eee te Eres A tpe eger Rs 179 PTC520 digital V O card 3 5 3 25 3 ERHOUPUSIRHARUDOOREAI ODER ai 18l Schematics 185 Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Safety and Preparation for Use v
3. 696 498 940 941 942 396 963 695 500 3 00663 3 00787 3 00787 3 00814 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 175 176 944 944 302 302 302 302 302 302 302 302 317 3 00542 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 386 941 396 398 945 945 1 00K 499 200 100 200 1 00K 100K 10 0M 10K 500K 2PPM 1 0K 100K 1 0K 100 100K 47KX4D 47KX4D 1 0KX4D 47KX4D 47X4D 47X4D 47X4D 47X4D 4 7KX4D 10X4D 470X4D 4 7KX4D 470X4D 470X4D 4 7KX4D 1 0KX4D ATMEGA64 16AC 74ABT16245CMTD MAX4644EUT T MAX339CSE LTC6082CGN PBF LT1027CCS8 5 MAX4674ESE MAX4635EUB LTC2440CGN 74HCO08 74HC595 74HC595 78M05 78M15 79M15 74HC238 74HC238 NUD3105DMT NUD3105DMT NUD3105DMT NUD3105DMT NUD3105DMT NUD3105DMT NUD3105DMT NUD3105DMT MAX6627MKA T AD587 R DG408DY MAX339CSE LT1027CCS8 5 OPA2131UJ INA121UA INA121UA Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 1 5OPPM Pot Multi Turn Top Adjust Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip Resistor Thi
4. newly acquired data points are saved for about an hour depending on the log rate in the PTC10 s internal memory and then erased In this case the Plot screen only shows at most an hours worth of data If set to none the PTC10 does not store data at all and the plots on the Plot screen are always empty If the USB device is unplugged the System Log Log To button automatically changes to RAM to indicate that data is no longer being written to USB USB This setting determines whether or not the PTC automatically logs to USB memory devices If set to Auto the default mode the PTC immediately starts writing log data to any USB storage device that s plugged into the instrument The System Log Log To button automatically switches to RAM when a USB device is unplugged and to USB when a USB device is plugged in As long as there s a USB flash key or hard drive with available memory plugged into the PTC data will be logged to it In Manual mode each time a USB device is plugged in the user must touch the Log To button and select the USB option before any data is saved to the USB device The System Log Log To button automatically switches to RAM when the USB storage device is unplugged and it stays on RAM when a USB device is plugged in If you unplug a device and plug it back in the PTC stops logging data to the device and newly acquired data is not permanently saved System screen COM column RS 232 Sets the RS 232
5. Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Fabricated Part Screw Black All Types Screw Black All Types Heat Sinks Connector Female PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Schematics 185 Schematics Page count Circuit board oO PTC211 CPU board PTC221 Backplane PTC231 Front panel PTC240 GPIB card PTC320 I channel thermistor diode RTD reader PTC321 4 channel RTD reader PT C323 2 channel thermistor diode RTD reader PT C330 4 channel thermocouple reader PTC420 600W AC output card PTC430 50W DC output card PTC431 100W DC output card PT C440 TEC driver PTC510 Analog IO card PTC520 Digital IO card 4 cU1 L C0 l2 4 OO 0 W W PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller
6. setpoint T t Yy t P E t As the actual temperature approaches the setpoint the proportional output Y decreases to zero at which point no power is supplied to the heater Normally however some power is required to keep the heater at the setpoint which is why the integral feedback algorithm is needed It multiplies the error by a constant 7 and adds the result to the previous integral output Y t 1 E t Yit 1 As the actual temperature approaches the setpoint the rate of change of the integral output Y drops to zero In effect integral feedback sets the steady state heater power Derivative feedback tries to predict what the temperature will be in the future by multiplying the rate of temperature change by a constant D Yalt 2 D T t 1 T t If the temperature is increasing and D is positive derivative feedback reduces power to the heater if the temperature is decreasing derivative feedback increases power to the heater The output of the PID feedback loop i e the heater power is the sum of the three feedback algorithms Heater power Y t Yi t Ya t The key challenge to using a PID feedback loop is determining the best feedback gains The constants P I and D are different for every apparatus and must be determined experimentally As a general rule if the gains are too low the feedback won t respond enough to temperature variations if they are too high the feedback responds too
7. SCEE isoina ra EA EAEE AA EREE ste A ade tes D tO SU 5 PIOU SCEBSE ad ne eeddasedanaiiendienaiiasadaneditgddadsedaddiiadadndedamn 5 reri Mer e e E E N 56 Ohannes e a e a Er re a eaaa rA rere i 6l EE E E T gusemaeueeeeaeetetel 74 Firmware UPdates cscccscsscescceccsscesccecescescsncessescsscsescensescssscecenseessscseacensessseasencensensees 80 Replacing the memory backup battery seeseesseesceeseeesoeesoeesoeesoeesoeesoeesoeesoeeseesoeeeseeese 8l Remote programming 83 Connecting to theJP TG 072 oer treten e e ian eterna 83 Communication assembly and run time errors essere 86 Concurrent Macross Had naoa naaa a aai 87 Macro Nane S eme PP 87 Ealan anca ESAn e RET T E EAT A EEES 88 Remote instructions 92 General InStEuctlOnis 5 erepta c EE tet tette en RE E OE PR RR PR UR UR een 92 IEEE 488 2 IristFU HOLDS eot rette ono mdi nie 96 Program SUB MICMU ges i osoccii oeste ite tes tedio etti ree eee deest den spese e Ea depo ARAE Pre ERE edens 100 SEE m 103 Se hannele SU DIS Ucasereressccacde secs ctesaeecceeasacsesencecesve geedeeucuevere c afi coe E A 107 EF OV COGS c 118 Sieigilsmrrer m 119 Sample MACHOS PA 120 Temperature Profiles 2 etre teret order erret eror ee rd oiled vore Prou v deg UE 120 Control a feedback setpoint with an analog input eee 121 PID i
8. median filter a buffer moves the indicated mark use drawMarks to see mark numbers forward 0 0 seconds multiply two buffers buffer buffer buffer2 multiply by constant buffer buffer constant normalizes a buffer i e performs linear scaling such that all y values are between 0 and PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 138 normAll plot n buffer buffer2 plotAll remove buffer removeAll removeGraph removeTrace traceColor rep rev buffer riseStats column buffer roundY Axis on off saveData buffer fileName savePlot fileName selectGraph 0 selectionWindow add remove buffer setDefaultBounds setMarks Pos Neg buffer setSize 500 350 showBuffers showMarks smooth buffer O sub buffer buffer2 subx buffer 0 0 suba buffer subi buffer undo buffer wave buffer 1 buffer2 1 0 xLabel state yLabel text normalizes all buffers add the current contents of n buffers to the plot clear plot then plot all currently existing buffers delete a buffer delete all buffers remove the currently selected graph remove a trace from the plot by plot color black red blue orange green or cyan replot the currently plotted buffers reflecting all changes made since the last plot revert to last saved version display rise statistics for a buffer column option defines columns if set to on automatically scaled y axes wi
9. 16V X7R 1UF 16V X7R IUF 16V X7R 1UF 16V X7R 1UF 16V X7R 1UF 16V X7R 1UF 16V X7R IUF 16V X7R 1UF 16V X7R 1UF 16V X7R IUF 16V X7R IUF 16V X7R 1UF 16V X7R 1UF 16V X7R 1UF 16V X7R Parts List Battery holder Battery Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Cer
10. 2 PIN HEADER 3 PIN WHITE 3 PIN SI 22UH SMT PTC F P IRF510 300 47K 47K 10 60 4K 10 0K 20K 20K 330 301K 1 0M 75K 2 0 10M 100K 1 0K 10K 4 7K 10K 0 39K 7 5K 10K 1 00 470 470 1 0KX4D 82X4D 82X4D 82X4D 47KX4D 330X8D 47KX4D 12MM TACT SWITC BLK CAP 12MM TACT SWITC BLK CAP 12MM TACT SWITC BLK CAP 12MM TACT SWITC BLK CAP 12MM TACT SWITC BLK CAP 12MM TACT SWITC BLK CAP 12MM TACT SWITC BLK CAP 12MM TACT SWITC RED CAP ATMEGA162 16AI 74ABT16245CMTD MAX1234EGI 74HC04 HEF4794BTD Connector Misc Connector Male Connector Male Connector Male Connector Male Header Amp MTA 100 Connector Male Inductor Fixed SMT Printed Circuit Board Voltage Reg TO 220 TAB Package Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200ppm 0603 Chip Res Thick Film 5 200ppm 0603 Chip Res Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chi
11. 238 1 00234 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 o W O9 O9 O9 OU O9 O9 O9 wwww wo UO O00 0000000000000 3 6 00174 6 00684 6 00174 6 00684 6 00174 6 00684 7 0 705 3 00601 4 0 466 4 02253 4 02253 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 948 948 519 431 431 431 431 4 02480 4 02481 4 0 740 4 02482 4 00678 4 0 742 4 02483 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 743 184 146 117 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 1000P RED BAT54S MMBD1503A MMBD1503A MMBD1503A MMBD1503A MMBZ5230 HCPL 2630 HCPL 2630 HCPL 2630 10 PIN DI 6 PIN 96 PIN RT ANGLE G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 6611 TYPE 43 10UH 6611 TYPE 43 10UH 6611 TYPE 43 10UH PTC RTD THERM MMBT3904LT1 300 10 0K 10 0K 2 0M 2 0M 47K 10 10 10 10 60 OHM 200 OHM 600 OHM 2000 OHM 6 040K PTF56 20K0 BT16 60K PTF56 200K BT16 4 99K 2 00K 1 00K Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 LED T1 Package 3mm diameter Dual schottky diode series connection 4 7V ZENER 5 Header DIM 3 Row Right Angle Mount Ferite Bead Thru hole Type 43 Inductor SMD Type R 23MHz 240mA 10 1210 Ferite Bead Thru hole Type 43 Inductor
12. 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF MPM Series Resistive Divider Thin Film 10 0K x 2 0 1W 1 Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny LM34 Precision Temperature Sensor Fahrenheit 16 bit Rail Rail DAC PTCIO Programmable Temperat
13. DI 2 D2 4 D3 8 D4 l6 D5 32 D6 64 D7 128 The DIO value shown on the PTC10 s display is the sum of the values of all set bits For example if only bits D1 and D3 are set a DIO value of 2 t 8 10 is displayed Using the remote interface macros can be defined that associate the digital I O lines with most functions of the PTC10 The remote interface provides bitwise operators to set and query the relays and digital I O lines The DIO lines can be used to pass a single 8 bit value into or out of the PTC The PTC treats the DIO like any other channel for example its value can be plotted or used in a PID feedback loop Virtual channels The digital I O card has three virtual channels with the default names V1 V2 and V3 These channels are not connected to any physical inputs or outputs Instead macros or remote commands can assign arbitrary values to these channels or the channels can automatically follow the value of another channel Like real channels the values of virtual channels can be plotted on the Plot screen displayed on the Numeric screen and logged to RAM and USB Each virtual channel can either an input or an output see the Channel IO Type button If it s an input a virtual channel can follow the value of another channel see the Channel Follow button and its value can be modified by applying a lowpass filter subtracting a difference channel taking its derivative with respect to time or applying offs
14. IP columns The USB interface requires no setup on the PTC10 but does require installing a driver on the PC Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 26 SRS The RS 232 port requires RTS CTS flow control which some PC serial ports do not support If the PTC10 sometimes drops characters from the RS 232 messages that it receives try using the USB interface instead The USB port uses the Linux gadget serial driver which is a common driver that is already installed on some PCs If the PC asks for a driver follow these instructions Install the USB driver for Windows PCs 1 Download the driver from the SRS website at www thinksrs com click Downloads gt Software Unzip the downloaded file 2 Using a standard USB A B cable plug the PTC10 into the PC 3 The New Hardware Found wizard appears on the PC Tell the wizard not to search the web for the driver select the option to select the driver from a list or specific location If asked to specify the hardware type select Ports Click Have disk browse to the file that you downloaded and select gserial Windows7 inf for Windows 7 or gserial inf for older versions of Windows You may get a message saying that the driver has not passed Windows logo testing 4 Once the installation is complete the PTC10 should appear as a COM port on your computer and the USB connection can be used just like an RS 232 connection Read data from the PT
15. Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Screw Black All Types Connector Misc Fabricated Part Fabricated Part SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Capacitor Misc SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Capacitor Misc SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 169 C 307 C 308 C 310 C311 C 320 C 330 C 340 C 360 C 361 C 362 C 364 C 400 C40
16. Safety and preparation for use SRS Line voltage The PTC10 operates from an 88 to 264 VAC power source having a line frequency between 47 and 63 Hz Power entry module A power entry module labeled AC POWER on the back panel of the PTC10 provides connection to the power source and to a protective ground Power cord The PTC10 package includes a detachable three wire power cord for connection to the power source and protective ground The exposed metal parts of the box are connected to the power ground to protect against electrical shock Always use an outlet which has a properly connected protective ground Consult with an electrician if necessary Grounding A chassis grounding lug is available on the back panel of the PTC10 Connect a heavy duty ground wire 12AWG or larger from the chassis ground lug directly to a facility earth ground to provide additional protection against electrical shock Line fuse Use a 10 A 250 V 3AB Slo Blo fuse Operate only with covers in place To avoid personal injury do not remove the product covers or panels Do not operate the product without all covers and panels in place Serviceable parts The PTC10 does not include any user serviceable parts inside Refer service to a qualified technician PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Safety and Preparation for Use vi Symbols found on SRS products EUM Alternating current A Caution risk of electric shock Frame o
17. instruction for an output channel results in an assembly time unrecognized instruction error lt channel gt alarm lag int seconds The alarm lag adds glitch tolerance by preventing the alarm from triggering until the signal has continuously exceeded the alarm limits for the preset number of seconds PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 113 lt channel gt alarm latch No Yes A latching alarm once triggered continues to sound until the status or mode is set to off lt channel gt alarm min lt float gt lt channel gt alarm max lt float gt These instructions set the alarm limits The alarm is triggered whenever the signal exceeds these limits The limits are specified in the same units in which the channel value is displayed If the channel s units are changed the limits are not automatically updated lt channel gt alarm mask Returns a 32 bit integer with one bit set indicating which bit in the Alarm Status Register this alarm sets whenever the alarm is tripped The Alarm Status Register is part of the GPIB status reporting system see the IEEE488 commands section for more information Errors attempting to change the value of the mask produces a run time locked parameter error lt channel gt alarm mode Off Level Rate s Enables the alarm The alarm can be programmed to trigger when the level of the signal exceeds the preset limits or when the rate of change pe
18. s settings before it begins to provide power to the heaters To turn on the outputs press the Output Enable key twice A red light next to the Output Enable key turns on to indicate that the outputs are active and any PID feedback loops that were previously running begin to provide power to the heaters If the outputs are enabled pressing the Output Enable key once disables all outputs setting them to zero Inputs continue to function normally In an emergency situation the Output Enable PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 50 Select screen SRS key is the quickest way to turn off the PTC s outputs Re enabling the outputs immediately returns all outputs to their previous values In certain cases it may be desirable to have the PTC power up with the outputs enabled to ensure that feedback loops automatically resume after a power failure This can be accomplished with a startup macro see the Startup macros section The Output Enable key is not intended to prevent electric shocks When handling exposed heater wires always disconnect the wires from the PTC10 or unplug the PTC10 from the wall Press and hold the Output Enable key for 3 seconds to put the PTC10 into standby mode In standby mode the outputs are turned off data acquisition and macros are paused the front panel display and system fan are shut off and the system does not respond to remote commands RTD excitation currents ar
19. 4 01544 461 4 01544 461 4 01551 461 4 01496 461 4 01551 461 4 01496 461 4 01538 461 4 01538 461 4 00434 408 4 00218 408 4 00434 408 4 00218 408 4 01242 462 4 01242 462 4 01495 461 4 01495 461 4 01707 463 4 0091 1 463 4 01707 463 4 0091 1 463 4 00912 463 4 00912 463 4 00912 463 4 01707 463 4 01784 435 3 01740 360 3 01498 360 3 01257 360 3 01257 360 3 01257 360 3 01741 360 3 0074 1 360 0 00306 026 0 00428 000 0 00541 052 0 00636 032 0 01174 007 0 01175 002 0 01244 052 10U T16 iu 01U RED RED BAV99 BAV99 BAV99 BAV99 BAV199 BAV199 BAV170LT1 10 PIN DIL 7690 4 POS IN 96 PIN RT ANGLE DIN 24VDC DPDT 390UH FR47 AQ5A2ZP3 28VDC PTC AC OUTPUT MMBT3904LT1 300 300 0 1 OHM 5W 510K 510K 1 0M 5 1K 1 0M 5 1K 300K 300K 4 990K 10 00K 4 990K 10 00K 20 0K 20 0K 4 7K 4 7K 47KX4D 4 7KX4D 47KX4D 4 7KX4D 10KX4D 10KX4D 10KX4D 47KX4D V250LA10 ATMEGA16 16AC 74ABT16245CMTD LMC6484AIM LMC6484AIM LMC6484AIM MAX660M 74HC04 4 40X3 16PP SLEEVE H22GRN YEL 39 00 0047 AQ HS 5A 49 2BK 8 1 2 BROWN Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R LED T1 Package LED T1 Package Diode Diode Diode Diode Diode SMT Diode SMT Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Connector Male Connector Misc Connector Male Connector Male Relay Inductor Vertical Mount Ferrite bead SMT Relay P
20. D 306 D 307 D 308 D 441 D 603 D 645 D 646 J 101 J201 J202 J431 J440 J470 J630 J 640 JD301 L441 L442 L631 L 641 L 642 L 643 L 644 PCI R 102 R 103 R 104 R 105 R 106 R 107 R 201 R 202 R 301 R 302 R 44 R4 R4 R4 R4 R4 R4 R4 R 45 R 54 R 603 R 631 R 633 R 634 R 642 KR BR BS RK RK Qc OC oo0o0 1O0 FWNYe SRS 5 00371 552 5 00371 552 5 00031 520 5 00299 568 5 00031 520 5 00299 568 5 00371 552 5 00371 552 5 00371 552 5 00371 552 3 00575 311 3 00575 311 3 00575 311 3 00575 311 3 00575 311 3 00575 311 3 00575 311 3 00575 311 3 00575 311 3 00010 303 3 01342 313 3 01342 313 1 01178 132 1 00006 130 1 01179 100 1 00485 165 1 01075 100 1 00251 130 1 00350 150 1 01180 143 1 00236 109 6 00236 631 6 00236 631 6 00236 631 6 00236 631 6 00236 631 6 00236 631 6 00236 631 7 01711 701 4 01722 400 4 01724 461 4 01439 461 4 01725 461 4 01439 461 4 01431 461 4 01725 461 4 01725 461 4 01725 461 4 01722 400 4 01725 461 4 01242 462 4 01155 462 4 01251 462 4 01725 461 4 01726 454 4 01726 454 4 01726 454 4 01726 454 4 01725 461 4 01467 461 4 01551 461 4 01551 461 4 01406 461 4 01406 461 47P 47P 220U AU 220U iu 47P 47P 47P 47P GREEN MINI GREEN MINI GREEN MINI GREEN MINI GREEN MINI GREEN MINI GREEN MINI GREEN MINI GREEN MINI GREEN STZ5 6NT146 STZ5 6NT146 26 PIN 2 PIN DI 0536271275 9 PIN VERTICAL J1012F21C 10 PIN DIL 4 PIN USB U
21. Looking at channel 0 spark gaps GAP201 2 the T filter and diodes D201 2 protect the inputs against electrostatic discharge and overvoltage U210 produces the ADC s 1V reference voltage and through resistor R201 sets the voltage of the positive thermocouple input to 1 V Capacitor C203 filters the input to reduce high frequency noise R202 pulls the negative input to ground if no thermocouple is connected so that disconnected inputs can be detected The thermocouple cannot be directly connected to the ADC U220 because the ADC produces a small amount of current between its input pins If allowed to propagate through the thermocouple this current creates an error proportional to the thermocouple s resistance Therefore the ADC inputs are buffered with op amps U200A B Capacitors C206 7 eliminate ADC glitches by absorbing the current transients produced by the ADC s internal switches while RN205 and C205 allow the op amp to drive the large capacitance of C206 7 without oscillating Optoisolators ISO230A B and ISO240 connect the ADC to the Atmel microcontroller s SPI bus The output voltage of the isolated power supply measured at TP262 relative to the channel s floating ground is proportional to the ratio of resistors R611 and R613 but R613 must be about 3k The desired output is about 8 V which linear regulator U260 reduces to 5V Since the thermocouple ground is floating and is the output of a switching power supply when inspected with an
22. R 241 4 01479 461 1 0K Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 251 4 01479 461 1 0K Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor RN111 4 01727 463 22X4 Resistor network SMT Leadless RN112 4 01727 463 22X4 Resistor network SMT Leadless RN131 4 01727 463 22X4 Resistor network SMT Leadless RN132 4 01727 463 22X4 Resistor network SMT Leadless RN141 4 00905 463 82X4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN142 4 00905 463 82X4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN143 4 00905 463 82X4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN144 4 00905 463 82X4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN145 4 00905 463 82X4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN146 4 00905 463 82X4D Resistor network SMT Leadless T 211 6 00774 610 PTC220 Transformer U 110 3 01345 360 74ABT541 CSC Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 120 3 01346 360 74HC4040M Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 130 3 00795 360 74AC138 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 140 3 01498 360 74ABT16245CMTD Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Ass PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 159 u 150 3 01239 360 u 160 3 00281 340 u 201 3 00742 360 u 202 3 00782 360 u 210 3 00919 360 u 240 3 01347 360 u 250 3 01348 360 Y 110 6 00692 621 Z0 0 00128 053 Z0 0 00267 052 Z0 0 00268 052 Z0 0 00390 024 Z0 0 00391 010 Z0 0 01093 007 Z0 1 00087 131 PTC231 front panel C 101 5 00601 578 C 102 5 00601 578 C 103 5 00601 578 C 105 5 00601 578 C 106 5 00601 578 C 107 5 00601 578 C 108
23. Rad C 652 5 00519 569 33U T35 Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C 653 5 005 13 569 1U 16V A CASE Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C 66 5 00035 521 47U Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20 Rad C 662 5 00519 569 33U T35 Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C 663 5 00513 569 1U 16V A CASE Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C67 5 00035 521 47U Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20 Rad C 672 5 00519 569 33U T35 Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C 673 5 00513 569 1U 16V A CASE Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C 68 5 00299 568 AU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 682 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C72 5 00299 568 AU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C722 5 00391 552 2200P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO D11 3 0001 1 303 RED LED T1 Package D 20 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 202 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 203 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 204 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 301 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 302 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 303 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 304 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 401 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 402 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 403 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A
24. Rad SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Capacitor Misc SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes LED T1 Package Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg LED T1 Package Diode SMT Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg LED T1 Package Diode SMT Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg LED T1 Package Diode SMT Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg LED T1 Package Diode SMT Diode Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Connector Male Connector Male Connector Male Connector Male Connector Male DIN Connector Male Ferrite Beads Inductor Fixed SMT Ferrite Beads Inductor Fixed SMT Printed Circuit Board Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor
25. SMD Type R 23MHz 240mA 10 1210 Ferite Bead Thru hole Type 43 Inductor SMD Type R 23MHz 240mA 10 1210 Printed circuit board MMBT3904LT1 3904 NPN Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 0 1 5ppm Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 164 292 310 312 330 332 345 670 U110 u120 U210 U230 U260 U270 U280 Uu281 u290 U300 U340 U345 U350 U360 U370 U410 U420 U430 U432 U434 U436 U438 Uu440 U442 DIDDII III W u520 U610 U620 U630 U640 U650 U660 U670 SRS 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 117 088 050 021 050 117 309 4 00139 4 00011 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 02061 4 0 4 0 4 0 655 869 917 869 917 707 707 4 00910 4 0 4 00916 4 00916 4 00916 4 00916 4 00911 707 4 01764 4 00909 4 00911 4 00909 4 00909 4 00911 4 00910 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0
26. The next macro makes the setpoint of channel Out1 follow the value of analog input 5A The macro converts the 10V 10V analog voltage to a temperature between 0 and 100 degrees another way to scale the analog voltage would be to use channel 5A s offset and gain controls The contents of the macro are placed in an infinite repeat block square brackets followed by a negative number The waitforSample instruction ensures that the block doesn t run any more often than necessary i e once per ADC sample waitforSample if Outl PID Mode on x 45A x 10 x 5 note spaces are not allowed before the Outl PID setpoint 4x 1 The setpoint is only updated when the feedback is turned on Although not necessary this precaution keeps the macro from generating run time errors when the setpoint is locked PID input scheduling This macro selects the input sensor for a PID feedback loop based on a measured temperature If channel 3A reads less than 50 degrees channel 3A is selected as the PID input otherwise channel 3B is the PID input pause 1 s if 3A 50 amp amp Outl PID input 3B Outl PID input 3A if 3A gt 50 amp amp Outl PID input 3A Outl PID input 3B jer Ass PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 122 In the first conditional statement the dollar sign before the term 3B prevents the PTC from converting it to the numeric value of channel 3B S
27. Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 171 R 502 R 561 R562 R 600 R 611 R 612 R 613 R 614 R 701 R 702 R 781 R 782 R 783 11 113 12 20 205 206 23 232 30 305 306 33 332 40 405 406 43 50 505 506 53 532 700 73 732 772 HGHOARP RFF S Rr Rr S c N e u 210 U 220 u 250 U 260 u 270 u 300 U 310 U 320 U 360 u 400 u 410 u 420 u 450 Uu 460 u 500 U 510 u 520 U 560 u610 u 621 SRS 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 575 461 466 461 455 461 406 461 270 462 210 462 163 462 009 462 744 400 4 02061 466 4 02195 466 4 02224 466 4 02224 466 4 00911 463 4 00910 463 4 01707 463 4 00916 463 4 0091 1 463 4 01764 463 4 00909 463 4 00909 463 4 00916 463 4 0091 1 463 4 01764 463 4 00909 463 4 00909 463 4 00916 463 4 0091 1 463 4 01764 463 4 00909 463 4 00916 463 4 0091 1 463 4 01764 463 4 00909 463 4 00909 463 4 01765 463 4 00909 463 4 00909 463 4 0091 1 463 4 01764 463 6 00683 610 3 01696 360 3 01498 360 3 01697 360 3 01698 360 3 0150
28. This value may be different than the most recently logged point which is the value that appears on the plot and in general corresponds to an average of several ADC readings If a channel is an input attempting to set its value generates a locked parameter error channel Vmax float Ymon channel of PTC440 TEC driver only Sets the maximum voltage that the PTC440 TEC driver can output This setting is intended to protect thermoelectric coolers from damaging voltages If the TEC voltage increases above Vmax for more than one second current to the TEC is automatically shut off The first time this occurs after the system is turned on a hardware fault window also pops up on the front panel display To turn the current back on again set the channel s output to zero by touching the Off button on the Channel menu or by disabling and re enabling all outputs with the Output Enable button If the output current suddenly increases and the slew rate setting is too high it is still possible to damage the TEC even if Vmax is set to an appropriate value To prevent such damage the output voltage should also be limited by setting the output range to the lowest possible value e g 3V 5A 6V 5A or 9V 5A and by setting the Lo Imt and Hi Imt controls to values that do not produce excessive voltages lt channel gt alarm submenu lt channel gt alarm instructions can only be applied to input channels Issuing a lt channel gt alarm
29. U233 is equal to the output of the current control DAC U240 FET Q233 is needed so that the gate of Q251 can be driven with a high voltage up to t 50V FET Q251 can dissipate up to 10 W of power If it is not kept sufficiently cool it may fail in the on position Therefore a temperature sensor U140 measures the temperature of the heatsink The sensor outputs a voltage of 1 mV F which is read by one of the microcontroller s ADC inputs The microcontroller requests increasing cooling from the system fan as the heatsink temperature rises above 35 C If the heatsink temperature exceeds 60 C the microcontroller causes an error message to appear on the PTC s front panel and disables the output A pair of automatically resetting fuses F221 F222 cuts off the output current if it exceeds 2 A The current passes through a noise filter and then through the user s heater which is connected to banana plug sockets J201 and J202 A second sense resistor R208 is used to measure the return current If the return current differs from the output current by more than 0 25A the microcontroller requests that a ground fault error window be displayed on the PTC s front panel Voltage and current monitor a multiplexed 16 bit ADC U280 monitors the heater current the voltage across the heater and the return current The ADC has a range of 04V The heater current is monitored by measuring the voltage across the sense resistor which is 0 2V when
30. all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Monolithic Ceramic 50V 2096 Z5U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Capacitor Electrolytic 35V 20 Rad Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes SMT Capacitor Electrolytic 80V 20 SMT Capacitor Electrolytic 80V 20 SMT Capacitor Electrolytic 80V 20 Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Diode Diode Diode Diode Diode Diode Diode Diode Diode Diode LED Rectangular LED Rectangular LED Rect
31. cal B lt channel gt cal C lt channel gt cal RO float These instructions set custom calibration coefficients for RTD thermistor or diode inputs with a custom calibration type See the description of the A B C and RO buttons on page 69 for more information Errors Attempting to set cal A cal B or cal C if cal Type is not set to Custom produces a run time locked parameter error Attempting to use any of these instructions on a channel that is not an RTD thermistor or diode input produces an assembly time unrecognized instruction error lt channel gt cal Gain lt float gt lt channel gt cal Offset lt float gt Sets an offset and gain for the channel The offset and gain are applied after the sensor signal is converted to temperature These instructions provide an easy way to make adjustments to a sensor s calibration Errors Attempting to set cal Offset or cal Gain on a channel that is not an input produces an assembly time unrecognized instruction error lt channel gt cal Type IEC751 US Custom RTD sensor type lt channel gt cal Type 100 300 1000 2252 3000 5000 6000 10000B 10000H 30k 100k 300k IM Custom Thermistor sensor type lt channel gt cal Type DT 470 DT 670 Si410 Si430 Si440 S700 S800 S900 Custom Diode sensor type lt channel gt cal Type RX 102A RX 103A RX 202A RO600 R400 R500 ROX sensor type lt channel gt cal Type B E J K
32. kill instruction to stop other concurrently running macros customCal lt channel gt lt calibration table gt Loads a custom calibration table The calibration table must be formatted as described in the Custom calibration table section page 32 except the table must be on a single line it must be enclosed in quotes and the maximum table length is 256 characters If the channel name contains a space the space must be included For example customCal In 1 units C 0 100 00 10 103 90 20 107 79 30 111 67 The next time the PTC10 is powered down or rebooted the custom calibration table will be forgotten and the channel will revert back to its most recently used built in calibration description Writes a string similar to the following to the I O port PTC10 Programmable Temperature Controller version 0 135 S N 92001 PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 94 SRS It s not necessary to use a question mark with this instruction getLog xy reset v channel lt time gt Gets a data point from the log The first argument is the name of a channel The lt time gt argument is one of the following The desired time of the data point in milliseconds since 1970 If the time is not available in the log the point at the closest available time is returned The word first to get the oldest point in the log The word last to get the most recent point in th
33. not cleared when the alarm turns off Use the lt channel gt alarm mask instruction to determine which bit a particular channel is associated with CLS Clear Status Sets all status registers to zero disabling all standard events PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 97 DMC macro name gt macro content Define Macro Command Identical to the define instruction Defines a macro saving the text in the PTC10 s local memory EMC 0 1 EMC Enable Macro Commands Sending the command EMC 0 disables macro expansion but does not affect macros that are already running EMC queries whether macros ar s enabled and returns either 0 macros disabled or 1 macros enabled Since the state of the EMC control does not persist when the PTC10 is rebooted macros are always enabled when the PTC10 is turned on ESE lt integer gt ESE Sets or gets the value of the Standard Event Status Enable ESE register If a bit in the ESR register is set and the corresponding bit in the ESE register is also set bit 5 of the Status Byte register is set ESR Returns the value of the Event Status Register ESR and then clears the register The eight bits of the Event Status Register are assigned as follows Bit Value Description 7 128 Power On set when the instrument is turned on 6 64 User Request set when the user touches the front panel or presses a menu key 5 32 Command Error set when
34. outputEnable on or disables outputEnable off all heater outputs and 10V analog outputs Issuing this instruction is the same as pressing the Output Enable button but no pop up window appears and the user doesn t have to confirm that the outputs should be enabled selectNone Deselects all channels in all selection groups PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 96 systemtime text systemtime dmy lt day gt lt month gt lt year gt systemtime hms lt hours gt lt minutes gt lt seconds gt systemtime mdy lt month gt lt day gt lt year gt systemtime ms lt integer gt systemtime smh lt seconds gt lt minutes gt lt hours gt lt day of month gt lt month gt lt year gt The systemtime instruction is similar to the System Other Time and System Other Date instructions but 1 allows both time and date to be set or queried with a single instruction 2 provides the time to the second instead of the minute and 3 supports several different formats Systemtime sets or reports the time and date in the same format as System Other Time and System Other Date i e Apr 7 2008 11 48 am Systemtime dmy sets the date in the format day month year or day month year Systemtime hms sets the time in the format hours minutes seconds where hours is a value between 1 and 23 Systemtime mdy sets the date in the format month day year or month day year Systemtime ms reports
35. 33 C 340 C35 C 352 C 353 C 36 C 362 C 363 C37 C372 C 373 D 10 D 20 D 202 D 203 D 204 D 246 D 301 D 302 D 303 D 304 D 341 D 342 D 343 D 344 F 301 F 302 F 303 F 304 15310 18311 15330 J 101 J 301 J 302 J 303 J 304 JD101 L351 L 352 L 361 L 362 L371 L 372 PCI R 101 R 201 R 202 R 203 R 204 R 205 R 206 R 207 R 208 R 209 SRS 5 00601 578 5 00601 578 5 00381 552 5 00299 568 5 00471 569 5 00601 578 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 00601 578 5 00035 521 5 00519 569 5 00513 569 5 00035 521 5 00519 569 5 00513 569 5 00035 521 5 00519 569 5 00513 569 3 00011 303 3 00544 360 3 00544 360 3 00544 360 3 00544 360 3 01384 301 3 01880 313 3 01880 313 3 01880 313 3 01880 313 3 00011 303 3 00011 303 3 00011 303 3 00011 303 6 00773 611 6 00773 611 6 00773 611 6 00773 611 3 01320 340 3 01320 340 3 01320 340 1 00251 130 1 00233 120 1 00233 120 1 00233 120 1 00233 120 1 00234 109 6 00174 630 6 00684 609 6 00174 630 6 00684 609 6 00174 630 6 00684 609 709 701 466 461 230 462 7 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 2 2 3 462 3 462 155 462 2 3 462 155 462 2 3 462 155 462 2 3 462 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 330P JU 10U T16 0 1UF 16V X7R 1U 1U U JU 0 1UF 16V X7R 47U 33U T35 1U 16V A CASE 47U 33U T35 1U 16V A CASE 47U 33U T35 1U 16V A CASE RED BAV70LT1 ROHS BAV70LT1 ROHS
36. 4 01171 4 01129 4 01117 4 01058 4 01163 4 01213 4 01213 4 01117 4 01021 4 00930 4 01703 4 01146 4 012 4 01670 4 01703 4 012 4 01146 4 01050 4 012 4 012 4 01707 4 01707 4 009 0 4 01707 4 00909 4 00909 4 00909 4 00909 3 01696 3 01498 3 00413 3 00675 IRF4905 300 4 32K 0 10 0K 10 0K 10 0K 2 00K 2 00K 4 32K 2 00K 10 0K 10 0K 10 0K 10 0K 2 00K 10 0K 10 0K 2 00K 10 0K 100 200 200 1 00K 0 05 10 0K 10 0K 10 0K 10 0K 8 25K 6 04K 3 65K 1 33K 1 00K 243 3 01K 10 0K 10 0K 1 00K 100 11 3 2 490K 2 00K 10 0K 20K 1 2 490K 10 0K 2 00K 200 10 0K 10 0K 47KX4D 47KX4D 1 0KX4D 47KX4D 470X4D 470X4D 470X4D 470X4D ATMEGA64 16AC 74ABT16245CMTD LM34DZ LTC1655 P channel Power MOSFET ultra low Ron Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 5 300 ppm SMT Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1
37. 47U C212 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C213 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C214 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C215 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C216 5 00627 578 0 1U X4 C217 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SRS AD822JR Dual JFET Single supply rail to rail op amp AQW225N Dual PhotoMOS Low Noise 2 048 2 500 V reference 5V Reference 74HC04 Hex Inverter 2 5 OHM CMOS QUAD SWT 16 WIDE SO 78M05 Low Noise 2 048 2 500 V reference DG211BDY Quad Analog Switch OPA277A Precision Op Amp 20 V typ 1 MHz typ 5O 8 74HC08 Quad 2 Input AND Gate 74HC595 8 Bit Serial Input Parallel Output Shift Register SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller C 225 C 226 C227 C232 C 233 C 302 C 310 C31 C 330 C
38. 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 352 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 360 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 370 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 371 5 00526 569 22U T16 Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C 390 5 00513 569 1U 16V A CASE Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C 391 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 392 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 393 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 394 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 395 5 00654 500 O1UF X 4 Capacitor Misc C 401 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 402 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 403 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 404 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 405 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 406 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 451 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C452 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 460 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 470 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C471 5 00526 569 22U T16 Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C 490 5 00513 569 1U 16V A CASE Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C 491 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Ass PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 166 C492 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 493
39. 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 494 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 495 5 00654 500 01UF X 4 Capacitor Misc C 501 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 502 5 00399 568 01U 596 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 503 5 00399 568 01U 596 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 504 5 00399 568 01U 596 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 505 5 00399 568 01U 596 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 506 5 00399 568 01U 596 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 551 5 00299 568 AU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 552 5 00299 568 AU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 560 5 00299 568 AU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 570 5 00299 568 AU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C571 5 00526 569 22U T16 Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C 590 5 00513 569 1U 16V A CASE Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C 591 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 592 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 593 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 594 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 595 5 00654 500 01UF X 4 Capacitor Misc C 600 5 00299 568 AU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 60 5 00299 568 AU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 610 5 00299 568 AU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 61 5 00299 568 AU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 630 5 00299 568 AU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 640 5 00299 568 AU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C65 5 00035 521 47U Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20
40. 5 00601 578 C 201 5 00601 578 C202 5 00601 578 C 203 5 00601 578 C 205 5 00601 578 C211 5 00604 578 C212 5 00604 578 C213 5 00604 578 C214 5 00604 578 C 301 5 00519 569 C 302 5 005 13 569 C 303 5 005 13 569 C 305 5 00318 569 C 306 5 00601 578 C 307 5 00518 569 C 308 5 00299 568 C 309 5 00375 552 C 310 5 00601 578 C31 5 00318 569 C312 5 00318 569 C 32 5 00601 578 C 33 5 00407 568 C 332 5 00395 568 C 34 5 00525 578 C 343 5 00601 578 C 350 5 00299 568 D 10 3 00576 311 D 20 3 00010 303 D 202 3 00010 303 D 203 3 00010 303 D 204 3 00010 303 D 205 3 00010 303 D 206 3 00010 303 D 301 3 00926 360 D 302 3 00926 360 D 341 3 00626 301 15350 3 00446 340 J101 1 00251 130 J106 1 00166 130 SRS MAX3233ECWP LM111 74HC74 74HC02 3525A LM26708 3 3 LM2670S 5 16MHZ SMT 4 24 6 1 2 22 RED 6 1 2 22 BL 1 72X1 4 1 72X5 32X3 64 563002B00000 2 PIN JUMPER IUF 16V X7R IUF 16V X7R IUF 16V X7R IUF 16V X7R IUF 16V X7R IUF 16V X7R IUF 16V X7R IUF 16V X7R IUF 16V X7R IUF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 33U T35 1U 16V A CASE 1U 16V A CASE 2 2U T35 0 1UF 16V X7R 15U T35 JU 100P 0 1UF 16V X7R 2 2U T35 2 2U T35 0 1UF 16V X7R 047U 4700P 5 1U 0 1UF 16V X7R JU RED MINI GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEN MBR0540T1 MBR0540T1 MUR1100E 6N137 10 PIN DIL 60 PIN DIL cOooooococococcocococo Integrated Circ
41. 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 163 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes J 100 1 01140 100 52837 1279 Connector Misc J 140 1 00160 162 IEEE488 STAND Connector IEEE488 Standard R A Female J 160 1 00251 130 10 PIN DIL Connector Male PCI 7 01892 701 PTC240 GPIB Printed Circuit Board R 131 4 01406 461 0 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor u110 3 01236 360 74LCX16245MTD Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 120 3 01236 360 74LCX16245MTD Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 130 3 01019 360 TNT4882 BQ Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 140 3 01742 360 TAVCX245WM Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg u 150 3 00741 360 74H C04 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg u 160 3 01743 360 ISPGAL22V10AV Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Y 101 6 00756 621 40 MHZ Crystal Oscillator Z0 0 00500 000 554043 1 Hardware Misc Z1 7 01736 720 PTC BRKT Fabricated Part Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 162 PTC320 I channel thermistor diode and RTD reader C111 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C112 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C113 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C121 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C122 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C123 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C124 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C200 5 00752 10000P Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 0603 C201 5 00752 10000P Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 0603 C202 5 00752 10000P Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 0603 C203 5 0
42. Although the heater cooler will just be called a heater in this discussion the following principles apply whether it is a resistive heater a thermoelectric device that can both heat and cool or a cooling only device such as a fan The PTC10 supplies a varying current voltage or power to the heater and assumes that the measured temperature will increase or decrease in a roughly linear fashion with this output signal It is also assumed that the measured temperature depends not only on the PTC10 s output but also on external factors that vary unpredictably such as for example the ambient room temperature Therefore to maintain a consistent temperature the heater power has to be determined by an algorithm that can monitor the temperature T and continually adjust its heater output Y with the goal of keeping the temperature at a predetermined setpoint even as outside factors change the amount of heater output required to maintain that temperature In the PTC10 as in most other temperature controllers the algorithm used is PID feedback which is actually a combination of three algorithms The proportional feedback algorithm determines the error i e the difference between the desired temperature the setpoint and the actual temperature T The output Y of the proportional feedback algorithm is just the error multiplied by a constant P PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 40 Manual tuning SRS E t
43. An ADC measures the ratio between the sensor and reference voltages Diodes are measured with a similar technique except a standard 5V reference is used instead of the reference resistor Variable current source generates the excitation current A 10V reference U610 resistor ladder and 8 1 multiplexer U620 produce one of eight voltages 0 mV 100 mV 200 mV 500 mV 1 V 2V 5V or 10V Op amp U650A provides the excitation current keeping the voltage across a sense resistor equal to the selected voltage Multiplexer U630 selects one of three sense resistors 1 kO 100kO or 10MQ The voltage across the sense resistor is measured by a unity gain instrumentation amplifier U660 U670 U680 Fixed 10 pA current source generates a high accuracy excitation current for diode sensors Voltage reference LT1027 maintains a 5V potential across R642 thereby producing the 10 uA current Op amp U650B provides a virtual ground for the reference the virtual ground voltage is the same as the voltage at the bottom of R642 Zener diode D641 prevents this voltage from exceeding 5V which is the maximum value that can be read by the ADCs Reference resistors Mechanical relays are used to select one of eight reference resistors Mechanical relays are needed because the input protection diodes of semiconductor switches would leak current between the signal and reference resistors producing unacceptable errors When reading diode sensors the excitation curre
44. Assuming the contents of a buffer are expressed in C converts the data to Kelvins Celsius to Fahrenheit Assuming the contents of a buffer are expressed in C converts the data to F Fahrenheit to Celsius Assuming the contents of a buffer are expressed in F converts the data to C Align start time Shifts one buffer in time so that its earliest time matches the earliest time of another buffer Useful for comparing results from two different experiments Average plotted buffers Replaces the contents of whichever buffer is plotted in black with the average of all plotted buffers Copy Creates a new buffer that contains a copy of all data from an existing buffer PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 134 Special menu SRS Crop Creates a new buffer that contains a copy of data from an existing buffer Only points that falls within the graph s X range are copied Derivative Replaces each data point with the difference between it and the succeeding point Downsample Reduces the number of points in a buffer by averaging two or more neighboring points together and storing the result in a single point You re asked to provide a downsampling constant which is the number of neighboring points to average together A downsampling constant of 3 for example reduces the number of points in the buffer to one third of its previous value Lowpass Removes noise by replacing each data point with a w
45. Current 4 channel RTD reader and I channel thermistor diode RTD reader only Controls the direction of the sensor excitation current Reverse the current to detect offsets due to parasitic thermocouple EMFs or 60 Hz noise In AC mode these offsets are automatically removed by reversing the current at each ADC reading each reported temperature is based on the average of the last two ADC readings cutting measurement bandwidth in half The PTC320 thermistor diode RTD reader s excitation current can be turned off entirely with this control Current TEC driver card only Controls the amount of excitation current 1 mA 100 uA 10 uA or auto provided to the temperature sensor The sensor excitation current on the TEC driver card cannot be reversed The table below shows the excitation current produced by the auto current setting on the PTC440 TEC driver when a resistive sensor is in use The sensor resistance is continuously monitored and the excitation current is adjusted whenever the sensor resistance rises above or drops below the levels shown in the table The auto current setting always produces 1 mA when an LM335 or AD590 sensor is in use Sensor Excitation resistance current 2 kQ mA l 20 kQ 100 uA 2 0 kQ 10 pA Excitation current produced by the auto current setting on the PTC440 TEC driver for resistive sensors only The overlap of the resistance ranges keeps the PTC440 from rapidly switching back and forth bet
46. Description 146 Since the excitation current can pass through the reference resistor in either direction switch U252 is needed to ensure that the ADC always receives a positive reference voltage If R292 is removed the ADC can be powered by a 5V reference located at U270 potentially reducing noise and drift However under most circumstances the reference does not make a noticeable difference so R292 is normally installed connecting the ADC to the analog 5V supply and U270 is omitted A circuit to drive an on board heater is provided but not used The heater was intended to keep the card at a constant temperature and thereby minimize thermal drift Temperature sensor U730 is part of the on board heater system and is also not used Currently the speed of the system fan is modulated to accomplish this goal The card can usually detect disconnected inputs because they produce out of range ADC measurements However no pull up or pull down resistors are connected to the sensor inputs to ensure that this occurs since such resistors would decrease the accuracy of the PTC321 Therefore spurious readings may appear when no sensor is connected PTC330 thermocouple reader SRS Unlike the other input cards the PTC330 does not use the PTC s analog power supplies Instead each channel has its own 8V isolated power supply This allows the PTC330 s four thermocouple inputs to float independently The PTC330 s four channels are identical
47. I O card relay channel only Sets the polarity of the relays If both the polarity and the relay value are zero the normally closed NC pins on the back panel are connected to the neighboring COM pins and the normally open NO pins are disconnected If the polarity is 1 the reverse is true lt channel gt Range PTC320 PTC323 PTC430 and PTC440 I O cards only This instruction sets the input or output range for a particular channel It is only available if more than one range is available The list of possible options depends on the I O card Errors If the hardware only offers a single range attempting to change the range generates a not a valid instruction error lt channel gt SD If statistics collection is enabled for this channel using the lt channel gt Stats instruction this instruction prints the standard deviation over the most recent lt points gt A D samples lt channel gt Selected On Off Controls whether or not a channel is selected Selected channels are added to the current selection group and appear on the Numeric Plot and Channel screens Examples 2A selected on adds channel 2A to the current selection group if it hasn t already been added 2A selected off removes channel 2A from the current selection group lt channel gt Sensor RTD Thermistor Diode ROX E J K N T Selects the sensor type for this channel This instruction is only available for input channels that supp
48. Mono 50V 5 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 SMD Tantalum C Case Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 SMD Tantalum C Case Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 177 C262 C263 C280 C282 C283 C284 C290 C291 C292 C293 C300 C302 C310 C311 C312 C320 C321 C330 C331 C340 C341 C342 C360 C400 C401 C402 C410 C411 C420 C421 C430 C431 C440 C451 C452 C500 C510 C511 C530 C540 C572 C573 D111 D234 D300 D312 D341 D400 D402 D451 ISO510 ISO511 150530 J230 JDR121 L231 L232 L312 PCB Q202 Q211 Q212 Q221 SRS 5 00299 5 00526 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00470 5 00470 5 00525 5 00299 5 00299 5 00164 5 00399 5 001 9 5 00299 5 00299 5 005 5 005 5 005 5 003 5 003 9 3 9 9 9 5 00299 5 00520 5 00520 5 00525 5 00299 5 00525 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00525 5 00299 5 00525 5 00525 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00519 5 00513 3 00576 3 00945 3 01400 3 01936 3 01400 3 00198 3 01430 3 0
49. O channels 2 this statement while 2 lt 50 pause 1 s pauses the macro until the value of channel 2 not the number 2 is greater than or equal to 50 PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 92 Remote instructions General instructions lt variable gt value Defines a variable and assigns it a floating point value The value can then be queried with lt variable gt and can also be used as an argument for any instruction that takes a numeric argument The lt variable gt instruction consists of a pound sign 7 immediately followed by a variable name The variable name can be any string up to 32 characters long but spaces are not allowed within the variable name or between the pound sign and the variable name Variable names are not case sensitive For example x 10 2 4x defines a variable x and sets its value to 10 2 then queries the value of x Variables are can only be used within the macro in which they are defined i e their parent macro and in macros called by that macro Macros cannot access variables defined by other concurrently running macros In addition once a macro finishes all variables defined by the macro are deleted The value of an undefined variable is zero When macros are sent over a serial port as opposed to being loaded from a text file on a USB storage device the macro can have at most one line and therefore all variables must be defined and used o
50. P y lt channel gt d dt On Off Derivative If this control is set to On the value of the channel is replaced with its derivative with respect to time Since the derivative is normally somewhat noisy the lowpass filter should be enabled when the derivative filter is used lt channel A gt Diff lt channel B gt Enables or disables the difference filter When a valid Channel B is selected the value of channel A is replaced with the difference between channel A and channel B e g A B If channel B does not exist the difference feature is disabled and channel A s output reverts to its normal value Channel A must be an input Examples 2A diff 2B Replaces the output of channel 2A with the value 2A 2B Channel 2B is unaffected 2A diff Removes the differencing function from channel 2A Channels with a difference filter can be used as the input for PID feedback loops in which case the feedback maintains a constant temperature differential between two locations rather than a constant absolute temperature Errors if channel A is not an input a not a valid instruction error is produced at assembly time lt channel gt Dither On Off This instruction is only available on the PTC430 DC output card The PTC430 uses a 16 bit DAC to generate its output If dither is set to On the card dithers its least significant bit to obtain greater resolution Errors Attempting to set the dither value for any chan
51. R441 entering the resistor at a voltage of OV and exiting at a negative voltage The negative voltage is inverted by U430 and becomes the current measurement PTC510 analog I O card SRS The PTC510 has four channels that can be used as DAC outputs or ADC inputs On card regulators produce 5 15 and 15V analog supply voltages A 4 channel DAC U202 produces four 0 5V outputs which are converted to 10V by U203A D Switches U204A D can disconnect any of the DAC outputs from the card s BNC connectors changing the affected channels from DAC outputs to ADC inputs The outputs of the four switches are connected to the card s four BNC connectors A self resetting fuse F301 4 temporarily shuts off the current if it exceeds 200 mA The normal resistance of the fuse is about 1 5 ohms D301 protects the card from electrostatic discharge and excessive voltages U206 multiplexes the four channels into a 24 bit ADC Since the ADC has a 0 5V range while the inputs are specified for a 10V range the input voltage is divided by 4 and offset by 2 5V The microcontroller communicates with the analog section through an optoisolated SPI bus A two bit address SPI_ADDO SPI_ADD1 provided to an address decoder U302 selects one of three chips on the bus an SPI to parallel adapter U340 the ADC or the DAC The SPI to parallel adapter controls the ADC s multiplexer and the direction input or output of each channel The ADC s BUSY signal whi
52. SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 445 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 446 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 447 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 448 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 449 5 00471 569 10U T16 Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C450 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C451 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C452 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 453 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 454 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C455 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 456 5 00471 569 10U T16 Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C457 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 458 5 00471 569 10U T16 Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C459 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 460 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 461 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 462 5 00369 552 33P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C 463 5 00369 552 33P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C 464 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 465 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 466 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C471 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C472 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all s
53. The pause instruction is not necessary but it helps to reduce the load on the CPU PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 91 SRS Conditional statements must be followed by curly brackets otherwise the statement has no effect There is no else if statement Parentheses cannot be used within a conditional statement to affect the order in which parts of the statement are evaluated The condition must contain one or more terms in the example above the first term is 4A and the second is 39 When the name of a channel is used as a conditional term it is sometimes unclear whether it should be treated as a query of the channel s value or as a character string In these cases the channel name can be preceded by a dollar or pound sign The dollar sign ensures that a conditional term is treated as a string For example if Out1 PID Input 3A Outl PID Input 3B In this example the dollar sign ensures that the name of the PID input channel Out1 PID Input is compared with the string 3A not the numeric value of channel 3A Dollar signs can only be used in this way within if or while conditions Conversely a channel name or any other conditional term can be preceded with a pound sign to force the PTC10 to treat it as a query The pound sign is required if you ve changed a channel name to a numeric value that don t contain any letters For example if you ve renamed one of the I
54. a macro is defined under and defined macros are not automatically assigned their file name as their runtime name Errors If the runtime name is more than 32 characters long it is truncated to 32 characters pause time ms s min hr Pauses the program for the indicated amount of time For example print hello pause 2 s print world prints the word hello on the program screen and also transmits hello to the serial port that the command was received from After two seconds the macro prints and sends the world The PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 102 SRS pause instruction only affects the macro that it s a part of All other macros continue to run normally There is no pause query popup lt string gt popup close Produces a popup window on the PTC10 s screen with the supplied message The message can be any alphanumeric string up to 128 characters long If a help window or another popup is already showing it is closed and replaced with the new popup The user has to press a menu button or the popup window s ok button to dismiss the window The popup close instruction closes any popup or help window currently visible regardless of how the window was created If a popup window is visible on screen the popup query returns the content of the popup window If no popup window is present the popup query returns the following text No popup window is p
55. a macro meaning that it can contain one or more instructions as well as conditional statements and repeated blocks The macro starts running immediately and if it takes long enough to complete its progress can be monitored on the Program screen While the macro is running more macros can be sent to the PTC Up to 10 macros can run at the same time although only the first four are shown on the Program screen Macros that are sent to one of the I O ports have to be written on a single line otherwise they will be interpreted as several macros to be run concurrently Each macro can have a maximum of 1024 characters while individual instructions or instruction arguments can have a maximum of 256 characters Instructions and arguments are case insensitive and can be separated by one or more whitespace characters as well as by special characters such as parentheses brackets equals signs etc Macros can be saved under a name and a macro can call other saved macros by name macros must not however call themselves recursively If a macro is saved under a name that is the same as an instruction the saved macro takes precedence if the command is issued with a capital first letter the instruction takes precedence if the command has a lower case first letter Macros can also be stored as text files on a USB memory device When the USB device is plugged into the PTC10 the macro can be run from the Program window or called from other macros just like a
56. an assembly error occurs in a GPIB macro 4 l6 Execution Error set when a runtime error occurs in a GPIB macro 3 8 Device Dependent Error always 0 2 4 Query Error always 0 2 Request Control not used always 0 0 Operation Complete set by the OPC command GMC lt macro name gt Get Macro Command Prints out to the serial port the text of a macro IDN Returns the following identification string Stanford Research Systems PTC10 serial number version where lt serial number is the instrument s serial number and lt version gt is the firmware version number LMC Learn Macro Command Returns a comma separated list containing the names of all available macros NOP No Operation Does nothing PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 98 SRS OPC Operation Complete Pauses the parent macro until all ongoing PTC operations have finished then sets the Operation Complete bit in the Event Status register The OPC instruction is intended to indicate that all previous instructions in the macro have been completed Most PTC10 instructions are non overlapping that is each instruction is fully processed before the next instruction in the macro is begun The exceptions are PID autotuning i e lt channel gt PID tune mode and ramp to setpoint the lt channel gt setpoint if channel ramp is nonzero It s also possible to overlap instructions by sending a macro before
57. and the current source is disabled When the control voltage is low pin 3 is connected to the output of U233 and the current source is enabled The switch is somewhat sensitive to damage from static discharge PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 148 While the current source is enabled op amp U250A drives FET Q251 such that the output of U233 is equal to the output of the current control DAC U240 FET Q233 is needed so that the gate of Q251 can be driven with a high voltage up to t 50V FET Q251 is attached to the large heatsink and dissipates up to 50 W of power If it is not kept sufficiently cool it may fail in the on position Therefore a temperature sensor U140 measures the temperature of the large heatsink The sensor outputs a voltage of 1 mV F which is read by one of the microcontroller s ADC inputs The microcontroller requests increasing cooling from the system fan as the heatsink temperature rises above 35 C If the heatsink temperature exceeds 60 C the microcontroller causes a pop up window to appear on the PTC s front panel and disables the output An automatically resetting fuse F221 cuts off the output current if it exceeds 2 A The current passes through a low pass filter and then through the user s heater which is connected to banana plug sockets J201 and J202 A second sense resistor R208 is used to measure the return current If the return current differs from the output current b
58. baud rate The RS 232 interface always has 8 bits 1 stop bit and no parity GPIB Sets the primary GPIB address The address must be a value between 0 and 31 inclusive but in most GPIB systems 0 is reserved for the controller in charge and should not be used PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 76 Verbose Determines how the PTC10 responds to RS 232 GPIB and USB messages In low mode the PTC10 only sends messages in response to queries This mode should be selected for IEEE488 2 compatibility In medium mode the PTC10 also sends an error message if an instruction could not be processed error messages always begin with Error In high mode the PTC10 also sends a message in response to each instruction that sets or gets a parameter and the message includes the parameter name Example responses are shown in the table below Verbose Response to instruction level 2A Xyz 2A 37 47 Low 37 4722 no response no response Medium 37 4722 Error xyz is not a valid instruction no response High 2A Value 37 4722 Error xyz is not a valid instruction 2A Value 37 47 History This button brings up a window that that shows the contents of the last twelve messages sent or received over the COM ports The window is helpful for debugging communications issues Errors This button produces a window that shows the last six errors caused by COM port communications System scre
59. be shut off if the solid state relay fails solid state relays usually fail in the closed position and also protects the user from electric shocks if the hot and neutral lines are swapped within the PTC or within the user s laboratory The remainder of the analog circuitry monitors the current and voltage across the heater After passing through the heater AC current passes through the current sense resistor R200 The voltage at each end of this resistor is passed to op amps U220A and B A high value resistor R211 R212 and a diode D211 D212 protect the op amps from excessive voltage if the neutral line becomes hot A peak detector circuit produces a DC voltage equal to the amplitude of the AC voltage across this resistor The DC voltage is measured by a 10 bit ADC on board the Atmel ATmega microcontroller To provide higher resolution measurements of small currents op amp U240B amplifies the DC voltage by a factor of 5 and provides the result to a second ADC input The heater voltage monitor is similar to the current monitor but measures the voltage across the user s heater If the voltage on the AC neutral line exceeds 4V op amps U220 A D become saturated and the voltage and current measurement circuits do not work properly PTC430 50W DC output card SRS The PTC430 outputs 1 A of current with a compliance voltage of up to 50V 50V power is generated on card by a switching boost regulator U210 The PTC430 has four current source
60. be used to turn off latching alarms but it doesn t have any effect on non latching alarms Mode Set to on to enable the alarm Latch Set to no A latching alarm once triggered must be turned off manually Sound 1 beep Output select the heater output channel Whatever channel you select will be forced to zero whenever the alarm is beeping preventing runaway feedback from damaging your system if the sensor is disconnected or incorrect feedback parameters are entered Relay For the best possible security the output should be routed through one of the four relays A B C or D and the Relay button should be set to A B C or D accordingly The relay will physically disconnect the heater whenever the alarm is beeping PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 30 SRS Min If the PTC10 is controlling a thermoelectric cooler set the min to the lower temperature limit of your system Otherwise this value should be set well below the lowest temperature that could normally be produced so that the min setting can only be exceeded if something is wrong with the sensor Max Set to the upper temperature limit of your system Lag Set to 1 s This will prevent small glitches such as those caused by autoranging from triggering the alarm Configure the PID feedback loop The next step is to tell the instrument which temperature sensor to control and the desired temperature of that sensor Ma
61. between 400 uA and 5 mA is passed through the sensor the voltage drop across the sensor is 10 mV K The three models have different temperature ranges with the LM135 having the largest range and the LM335 the smallest For the best possible accuracy the sensors can be connected in a 4 wire configuration just like an RTD However it is more common to connect the device in a 2 wire configuration leavings pins 14 and 15 of the PTC440 unconnected The first row of the table below lists the four sensor input pins on the PTC440 s output connector the second and third rows show which leads of the LM135 235 335 should connect to those pins Pin 14 Pin 15 Pin7 Pin8 optional optional 8 pin SOIC Pin8 Pin4 Pin 8 Pin 4 Other packages AD590 AD592 The AD590 and AD592 are an integrated circuit temperature sensors When a voltage between 4 and 30V is applied to the device s two terminals a current of 1 uA K flows through the device The two models have different packages and temperature ranges with the AD590 having a range of 55 150 C and the AD592 a range of 25 125 C The AD590 592 can be connected in a 2 or 4 wire configuration as shown in the table below For the 2 wire configuration leave PTC440 pins 14 and 15 disconnected Pin 14 Pin 15 Fin T Fins optional optional 8 pin SOIC Pin2 Pin3 Pin 2 Pin 3 Other packages Sensor excitation current The excitation current provided to resistive
62. but produce a more reliable connection On each connector the top two pins receive the resistance signal the middle pin is a ground that can be connected to a shield or left unconnected and the lower two pins provide the excitation current Commercial 4 wire RTDs usually have two wires of the one color connected to one end of the resistive sensor and two of a different color connected to the other end There is normally no shield In this case the RTD plug should be wired in one of the following ways assuming black and white wires Pint Pin2 Pin 3 Pin4 Pin 5 Option White Black Unconnected White Black Option 2 Black White Unconnected Black White If the plug is wired any other way no reading appears when the sensor is plugged into the RTD reader RTDs with two wires must be modified by soldering two additional wires to the existing wires one on each side of the sensing element and as close to the sensing element as possible The diagram below shows how to connect the wires to the PTC321 Connect the two wires that came with the sensor thin lines to the Signal inputs Signal RTD Signal sensing Ground element Excitation Excitation Solder two additional wires thick lines to the sensor and connect them to the Excitation inputs Connecting a 2 wire RTD to the PTC321 RTD reader Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 7 PTC323 2 channel thermistor diode RTD card
63. cards in a single chassis cannot exceed 10 A If it does the PTC10 s main fuse will blow PTC430 50 W DC output card SRS The PTC430 DC output card can deliver up to 50 W of power and is intended for precise control of small heaters The card offers two voltage ranges 50 V and 20 V and three current ranges 1A 0 5A and 0 1A An auto range feature continuously adjusts the current and voltage ranges to the smallest values needed to achieve the power specified with the channel s Hi Lmt setting The PTC430 s maximum power output depends on the resistance of the heater see the table below PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 13 SRS Optimum Heater resistance output Maximum R Q power W range gt 500 50 V0 I A 2500 R 500 50 V0 I A 5 100 500 50V0 5A 2500 R 100 50V0 5A 25 50 100 50VIA 2500 R 50 50VIA 50 20 50 50VIA R 20 20V2A 20 10 20 20V2A 400 R 10 20V2A 40 lt 10 20V2A 4R Maximum output power and optimum output range as a function of heater resistance If the heatsink temperature of a DC output card exceeds 60 C the card s internal protection circuitry shuts down the output This is likely to occur if one of the 50V output ranges is used when the heater resistance is under 200 if the ambient temperature outside the chassis is above 30 C if the PTC s vents are blocked and or if the system fan is turned off or not working If the heater resistance is less than 200 selec
64. change per degree 68 uV C resulting in excellent signal to noise ratio However its long term stability is not very good Type E thermocouples are resistant to oxidation but corrode if used in a vacuum or other reduced oxygen environment Type J thermocouples have one iron and one constantan wire Above 500 C oxidation of the iron results in poor stability This thermocouple is mainly used in legacy applications Type K thermocouples have one chromel and one alumel 95 nickel 2 manganese 2 aluminum 1 silicon wire With a wide temperature range and good stability it s the most popular type of thermocouple Type K thermocouples are resistant to oxidation but corrode if used in a vacuum or other reduced oxygen environment PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction E SRS Type N thermocouples have one Nicrosil nickel with 1496 chromium and 1 silicon and one Nisil nickel with 4 4 silicon and 0 1 magnesium wire They are designed for high stability especially at temperatures above 500 C However their sensitivity is low Type T thermocouples have one copper and one constantan wire They are very accurate and can be used in reducing atmospheres but their temperature range is limited The following table summarizes some properties of thermocouples Two temperature ranges are given the range that the thermocouple itself can withstand without losing its calibration and the range supported by
65. checked the value entered here determines the upper limit of the graph Suppress X axis label if checked the graph s X axis is not labeled This option is intended for use when two or more graphs with the same X range are stacked on top of each other Number of X divisions controls the number of vertical gridlines The value entered is approximate the program may draw slightly more or fewer gridlines in order to put the gridlines on round time values Number of Y divisions controls the number of horizontal gridlines The value entered is approximate the program may draw slightly more or fewer gridlines in order to put the gridlines on round Y values Y axis label The text entered here is displayed to the left of the graph Annotation The text entered here is displayed inside the plot area Enter the string names to display a list of the plotted files each shown in the color in which it is plotted Annotation position Controls where on the plot the annotation appears The following options appear when the More options button is clicked Subtract baseline if checked baseline data is subtracted from every plot in the graph To set the baseline data display a graph and select Set as baseline from the Edit menu Subtract average if checked each trace is offset such that its average value is 0 Y offset between traces can be used to separate traces that are on top of each other One times this constant is added
66. default logging rate of 1 point per second this corresponds to about one hour of data Data older than one hour disappears from the graph To create a permanent record of data or to plot more than an hour of data the PTC10 can store data on removable USB memory devices such as USB hard drives or flash memory keys The back panel of the PTC has two plugs for such devices the PTC logs data to the last USB device to be plugged in When a USB device is plugged in it takes the PTC10 several seconds normally about 5 seconds but sometimes up to 30 if the device contains a lot of files to recognize the device and for the USB logging feature to become available A small white triangle appears in the upper right corner of the screen whenever data is being logged to USB If a USB stick is present but isn t being used the triangle is grayed out If no USB stick is present the triangle disappears completely To log data to a USB device plug the device into the PTC touch the grayed out triangle and wait a few seconds until it turns white Touch the white triangle to stop logging Data is still stored in RAM while logging to USB Therefore if the USB device is unplugged the last hour of data can still be displayed on the Plot screen Do not unplug a USB device or switch the PTC10 off while the PTC10 is logging to the device Either of these actions causes loss of data and corruption of the device s file system To turn logging off touch the USB logging
67. drives The data can be transferred to a computer by simply plugging the USB device into a PC and copying the log files Windows applications are included to graph PTC10 log files and to convert them to various ASCII text formats Up to 6 feedback loops The PTC10 can control up to six different temperatures one for each heater output by continually adjusting the amount of power supplied to heaters Each feedback loop can run as fast as 50 or 60 Hz depending on the frequency of your AC power Runs user programs A macro programming language makes it possible to customize the functionality of the instrument Conditional statements variables and subroutine calls are supported Up to 10 user programs can run concurrently Computer communications The PTC10 can receive text commands and send responses over USB RS 232 Ethernet and an optional GPIB interface All aspects of PTC10 operation can be controlled over these interfaces Eight digital I O lines are also provided these can interact with user programs to control most aspects of the instrument s operation PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 2 I O cards The PTC10 s input and output signals are provided on removable circuit boards The chassis has four wide and two narrow slots for these I O cards The wide slots which are labeled 1 4 on the back panel can be occupied by optional temperature input and or heater driver cards The narrow slots slots 5 an
68. four analog I O channels the digital I O channel the relay channel and virtual channels If the I O card only supports a single calibration curve the calibration type is grayed out and cannot be changed unless a custom calibration is loaded If the selected channel uses a custom calibration table its calibration type reads Custom To stop using the custom calibration touch the Type button and select Standard The Type button then reverts to the normal list of calibration types supported by the I O card The available calibration types depend on the sensor type RTDs Choose ITS 90 for RTDs with an alpha of 0 00385 US for RTDs with an alpha of 0 00392 or Custom to enter your own Callendar van Dusen calibration coefficients Thermocouples Indicates the thermocouple type E J K N or T Cannot be changed since the thermocouple type is determined by the back panel connector Thermistors The available calibration types are named according to the resistance of the thermistor at 25 C Thermistors from Omega Measurement Specialties Inc formerly YSI and others that conform to the same calibration curve are supported Note that unlike RTDs and thermocouples there are no international standards for thermistors Therefore thermistors from PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 69 SRS different companies may not be compatible with each other or with the PTC10 s built in calibrations even
69. heater driver Out 1 to 5 watts The equals sign and the whitespace before and after the equals sign is optional Everything is case insensitive Since the channel name Out 1 has a space the entire instruction has to be enclosed in quotes to simplify instructions like this the channel could be assigned a new name that doesn t include a space like Out1 Note that the argument is outside the quotes The command Out l value 1 increases the value of Out 1 by 1 watt Whitespace before and after both the and signs is optional Likewise this command Out 1l value 1 decreases the value of Out 1 by 1 watt while the query Out l value is a request for the value of Out 1 2A lopass 1 Since the lowpass filter setting must be chosen from a list of possible values 1 s 3 s 10s etc this instruction sets the filter to the next setting on the list rather than incrementing the lowpass time constant by one second For example if the filter setting was 3 s it is now 10 s Spaces are optional in all instructions that include a space Omitting the spaces eliminates the need for quotation marks around instructions However spaces are required in arguments For example Out 1 10 type meas out is equivalent to PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 89 SRS Outl IOtype meas out However the argument meas out cannot be sh
70. independent current output heater driver circuits one for each current range The circuits are identical except for the sense resistor The microcontroller selects a current range by pulling one of the three lines 2000MA_ONOFF 200MA_ONOFF or 20MA_ONOFF low A 16 bit DAC U240 sets the desired output current The DAC outputs a value between 0 V no output current and 4 0 V highest possible current for the selected range Considering the 2 0A circuit current from the 50V supply flows through sense resistor R251 then through FET Q251 which throttles back the current to the desired level then to the user s heater This high side configuration is safer than the more common low side current source but requires a special high side sense IC U290A The output of this chip is a voltage proportional to the voltage across sense resistor R251 multiplied by 20 1 When the maximum current is flowing 2A in this case the output is 4 0 V Switch U290A enables or disables the 2A current source When the control voltage at pin 1 is high the switch output pin 3 is connected to 5V and the current source is disabled When the PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 149 control voltage is low pin 3 is connected to the output of U233 and the current source is enabled The switch is somewhat sensitive to damage from static discharge While the current source is enabled op amp U250A drives FET Q251 such that the output of
71. loop into a variable duty cycle square wave that can be output on the PTC10 s digital IO lines and used to drive a solid state relay The macro works well as long as a period of about 10 seconds or longer and a resolution of 0 1 seconds is acceptable If a much shorter period or greater resolution is needed it would be better to fabricate an external analog to PWM circuit and drive it with an analog I O channel First make channel V1 the feedback output and make it produce a value between 0 and 100 To do this select channel V1 and set the following parameters Low Imt 0 Hi Imt 100 O type Meas out PID input select the temperature channel that you d like to control PID mode set this to off for now PID setpoint set this to the desired temperature Next select channel DIO and set the following parameters O type set out PID input should be blank or the PID mode should be off Now run the following macro by sending it over a serial port in which case it all has to be on one line or by copying it onto a USB stick save it as a txt file in a directory named macros waitForSample d 0 if 4V1 54t d 1 DIO d t 1 if t gt 100 t 0 1 To test the macro set V1 s value to 50 and plot channel DIO You should see a square wave with a duty cycle of 50 and a period of 10 seconds high for 5 seconds low for 5 seconds high for 5 seconds etc Reduce V1 to 25 and the dut
72. much and overshoots the setpoint and both heater power and temperature may begin to oscillate The faster the temperature changes in response to the heater the larger the gains can be In this section we will use step response curves to illustrate some basic aspects of how the three feedback parameters P J and D affect feedback performance Proportional the figure below illustrates the effect of changing the proportional gain P The top graph shows the power being delivered to a heater by a PID feedback loop during four separate tests while the bottom graph shows the temperature of the heater during the same tests Each test is identical except for the value of P At 1 minute the setpoint is increased from 60 to 70 C When P 1 W C second curve from top the feedback loop exhibits a perfect response that is the temperature rapidly increases to 70 C with a slight overshoot that serves to minimize the settling time If P is increased to 2 W C the temperature responds more quickly but then overshoots the setpoint by an excessive amount causing the system to oscillate PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 4l SRS z 20 E as o a amp 10 oO o I 5 75 9 g 70 E o P 2W C 65 P 1W PC e P 0 5 W C P 0 25 W C 0 1 2 3 4 5 Minutes Interestingly decreasing the proportional gain to 0 5 or 0 25 W C also results in more overshoot and can even cause oscillations
73. no current is flowing and 4 0V when the maximum current for the selected range is flowing PTC440 TEC driver SRS Step down regulator a variable voltage power supply for the current source switching regulator U320 steps the PTC10 s 24V supply from 24V down to 3 6 9 or 12V Current monitor the 0 05 ohm current sense resistor R240 is used to monitor the current passing through the TEC Precision amplifier U240 multiplies the voltage across this resistor by a factor of 10 and adds 2 5 V to the result the output of this amplifier is 2 5 V if the TEC is receiving no current 5 V at 5A of current and OV at 5A Current source Op amp U210A drives FETs Q211 and Q212 providing current to the positive output terminal The op amp tries to keep the average of the current monitor voltage and the current control DAC output at 2 5V Resistor R205 limits the range of the current control DAC Therefore when the DAC output is 0 V the current monitor voltage should be 4 773 V when the DAC output is 5V the current monitor voltage should be 0 227 V Op amp U210B drives FETs Q221 and Q222 providing current to the negative output terminal This op amp tries to keep the average of the positive and negative terminal voltages at 7 5 V a value determined by R225 and R226 Thus as the current becomes more positive the positive terminal rises above 7 5V and the negative terminal drops below 7 5 V Since the PTC440 s high current supply is unipolar at no
74. on the output It s typically used to prevent the PID feedback loop from delivering excessive power to a heater If the high limit is less than the low limit the low limit takes precedence Range If the I O card has more than one range pressing this button displays a menu of available ranges If the card only has a single range this button is grayed out IO type Each output channel has an ADC that can measure the actual output The IO type button determines whether the output that you see on the screen is the value measured by the ADC Meas out or the value requested by the user or the PID feedback loop Set out The PTC s general purpose analog and digital I O channels are bidirectional i e they can be used to monitor external signals or to produce signals In these cases the IO type button has three settings Set out means that the channel outputs a voltage and the value you see on screen is the value you asked for Meas out means that the channel outputs a voltage and the value you see on screen is the value measured by the ADC Input means that you can drive the channel with an external voltage and the channel will measure that voltage Plot Indicates which plot the channel will appear in when the Plot screen is showing the plot type is Custom see the Plot Screen section above and the channel is selected on the Select screen Choose one of eight plots for the channel to appear in where plot 1 is th
75. oscilloscope it appears as a 285 kHz square wave relative to system ground The square wave on ground can be eliminated by installing a zero ohm resistor at R263 which connects the thermocouple ground to system ground and sets the thermocouple s potential to 1 V In this case the thermocouple can no longer be put into electrical contact with any objects that are not floating The card includes an ambient temperature sensor U630 The system can adjust the speed of the front panel fan to keep U630 at a constant temperature thereby reducing thermal drift of the card However unlike the PTC321 the PTC330 is not calibrated at multiple temperatures and cannot compensate for changing temperatures by adjusting its on board calibration data Cold junction temperature measurement is accomplished with an RTD and a circuit similar to the PTC321 except the direction of the excitation current cannot be reversed PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 147 PTC420 AC output card The PTC420 uses a solid state relay LS200 to switch AC line voltage to the user s heater connected to J200 on and off The solid state relay only switches the hot line Components RV200 and L200 are provided to prevent damage to the solid state relay when inductive or capacitive loads are driven A mechanical relay K260 disconnects both the hot and neutral lines when the PTC s Output Enable is off The mechanical relay ensures that power can
76. range 200 uA 10 kO range 100 uA 30 kO range 50 uA 100 kO range 10 uA 300 kO range 5 uA 2 5 MO range 1 uA Initial accuracy 30 Q range 0 004 Q 100 Q range 0 008 Q 300 Q range 0 02 Q 50 mK for Pt100 RTD at 25 C 1 kO range 0 04 0 3 kQ range 0 1 0 10 kO range 0 2 0 30 kO range 10 100 kO range 42 50 300 kO range 160 2 5 MO range 30 kQ Drift due to temperature 30 Q range 0 0006 Q C 100 Q range 0 001 0 C 300 Q range 0 0015 Q C 4 5 mK C for Pt100 RTD at 25 C 1 kQ range 0 005 Q C 3 kQ range 0 01 Q C 10 kO range 0 03 Q C viii PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller SRS 30 kO range 100 kO range 300 kO range 2 5 MO range RMS noise 300 range 100 0 range 300 Q range 1 kQ range 3 kQ range 10 kO range 30 kO range 100 kO range 300 kO range 2 5 MO range PTC321 Pt RTD reader Inputs Connector Range IEC751 Pt100 RTDs Excitation current Initial accuracy Drift due to temperature Drift due to time Noise Signal detection Specifications ix 0 06 0 C 0 2 0 C t3 Q C 2000 0 C 0 00012 Q 0 0003 Q 0 0006 Q 1 4 mK for Pt100 RTD at 25 C 0 0013 Q 0 003 Q 0 006 Q 0 012 0 0 07 Q 0 250 250 Four 4 wire inputs for 1000 Pt RTDs 5 pin 3 5mm header 0 400 Q 215 C to 850 C 1 mA 30 mK 1 4 mK C 15 mK year at 25 C ambient temperature 2 mK RMS at 25 C sensor temperature and 10 samples s Card detects open and short circuit c
77. ruthenium oxide sensor while E J K N and T refer to thermocouple types Since the PTC330 thermocouple reader s hardware determines which type of thermocouple can be read the thermocouple type cannot be changed on this card Some resistive cryogenic temperature sensors such as Rhodium Iron Germanium and Carbon Glass are not included in the list of available sensor types because they do not have standard calibration curves To use these sensors set the Sensor type to thermistor RTD or ROX and load a custom calibration table See Custom Calibration Tables in the Introduction section of this manual for more information on custom calibration tables Polarity relays channel of digital I O card only This setting only applies to the Relays channel on the digital I O card Changing the polarity reverses the state of all four relays The Polarity setting ensures that the relays are in an acceptable state when the PTC10 is switched off When the Polarity is 0 the relays revert to the alarm off state when the PTC10 is switched off When the Polarity is 1 they revert to the alarm on state The Relays value shown on the front panel is the sum of four individual relay values relay A can have a value of 0 or 1 relay B can have a value of 0 or 2 relay C can have a value of 0 or 4 and relay D can have a value of 0 or 8 When the polarity is changed the value of each relay stays the same but its meaning changes as shown in the table be
78. saved macro It s easier to edit long macros when they are saved as text files since they can then include multiple lines and comments Most macro instructions correspond directly to buttons on the Channel and System screens The instruction names are usually the same as the button names For example the instruction to change the RS 232 baud rate is System COM RS 232 the corresponding button is found in the System screen in the COM column and is named RS 232 Connecting to the PTCIO RS 232 The PTC10 s RS 232 connector is a 9 pin female D sub connector The PTC10 is a DCE device and should be connected to a PC with a straight through DB9 male to DB9 female RS 232 cable sometimes called a modem cable as opposed to a null modem cable Depending on the SRS PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 84 SRS capacitance of the cable the maximum cable length is about 50 feet at 9600 baud and 4 feet at 115200 baud The pin assignments are Pin Description Not connected PTCIO data out PTCIO data in Not connected Signal ground Not connected RTS Request to Send PTC flow control in CTS Clear to Send PTC flow control out Not connected OMAN O9 Ui amp C0 F2 The RS 232 outputs pins 2 and 8 are not active unless a voltage greater than 2 7 V or less than 2 7 V is present at the receive pin pin 3 The outputs are 5V instead of the more standard 1
79. sensors can be set to 10 uA 100 uA 1 mA or auto In auto current mode the sensor resistance is continuously monitored and the excitation current is adjusted whenever the sensor resistance rises above or drops below the levels shown in the table below The auto setting always produces a 10 uA excitation when a diode sensor is in use or 1 mA when an LM335 or AD590 sensor is in use Sensor Excitation resistance current 2 kQ mA I 20 kQ 100 uA gt 10 kQ 10 pA Excitation current produced by the auto current setting on the PTC440 TEC driver for resistive sensors only Note that the resistance ranges overlap if the sensor resistance is between 1 and 2 kQ for example the TEC driver can use either 1 mA or 100 uA excitation If possible the excitation current is kept at its previous value PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 18 A slight temperature glitch may occur when the PTC440 switches from one range to the next If these glitches could disrupt your experiment set the excitation current manually AID rate Some TECs are capable of very fast response rates If the temperature of your TEC changes very quickly on the order of 1 second when a current is passed through it it s recommended to reduce the system A D rate set with the System Other A D rate command from its default 100 ms to 50 ms Operating the PID feedback loop at a faster rate allows it to more precisely control the system
80. set and cannot be changed manually system IP Gateway lt string gt Sets the address of the Ethernet gateway This value does not need to be set to carry out Telnet communications and is only included to support Internet features that may be added to future versions of the PTC10 firmware Errors The gateway cannot be changed if system IP DHCP is set to on system IP MAC lt string gt Sets or queries the media access control address This value is set at the factory and should not generally be changed unless the PTC10 s nonvolatile memory has been erased The address should be specified in six groups of two hexadecimal digits separated by colons i e 00 19 b3 06 00 00 The default MAC address is 00 19 b3 06 ab cd where abcd is the hexadecimal representation of the last four digits of the instrument s serial number PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 105 SRS system IP Subnet string Sets the subnet mask The subnet mask should be in dotted decimal notation i e 255 255 0 0 Errors If part of the specified subnet mask is not in the correct format i e contains a non numeric character or a value that is not between 0 and 255 that portion of the mask is set to zero The subnet cannot be changed if system IP DHCP is set to on system IP Telnet integer Sets the telnet port for Ethernet communications Remote commands can be sent to the PTC through a telnet connection on the select
81. setpoint 80 program waitForRamp program pause 1 min channel Outl PID ramp 0 disable ramping channel Outl PID setpoint 0 The advantage of this macro is that it s easy to enter from the front panel However the waitForRamp instruction actually waits for all setpoint ramps to end whether or not they were started by the macro Therefore this macro may produce unintended delays if two or more PID feedback loops are ramping at the same time A more elaborate version of the macro eliminates this issue by comparing the current value of the ramp Out1 PID actual with the endpoint of the ramp Out1 PID setpoint This macro is shown without the optional channel and program prefixes PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 121 Outl PID ramp 1 Outl PID setpoint 100 while Outl PID actual Outl PID setpoint pause 1 s pause 1 min while Outl PID actual Outl PID setpoint pause 1 s pause 1 min Outl PID ramp 0 Outl PID setpoint 0 A third option is to wait for the measured temperature to reach the ramp endpoint Outl PID ramp 1 Outl PID setpoint 100 while 2A 99 5 2A gt 100 5 pause 1 s pause 1 min Outl PID setpoint 80 while 2A gt 80 pause 1 s pause 1 min Outl PID ramp 0 Outl PID setpoint 0 The pause 1 s instructions aren t strictly necessary but reduce the load on the CPU Control a feedback setpoint with an analog input
82. slew rate lt channel gt Stats on off Using the remote interface the average and standard deviation of the most recent n ADC readings can be continuously calculated where n is defined using the channel Points instruction The values can be displayed on the graph screen using the System Display Stats instruction or queried with the lt channel gt Average and lt channel gt SD instructions lt channel gt Stats Turns sliding window statistics collection on or off for a channel When statistics collection is turned on the average and standard deviation over the most recent n ADC readings are calculated at each ADC conversion and can be displayed on the single or multiple plot screens or queried via the Average and SD instructions n is the smaller of 1 the number of ADC readings acquired since statistics collection was enabled 2 the number defined with the lt channel gt Points instruction or 3 the number of ADC readings acquired since the Points instruction was last issued This command is only available through the remote interface lt channel gt Units W PTC420 AC heater driver only lt channel gt Units W A V PTC430 DC heater driver only By default the outputs of the AC and DC heater driver cards are measured in watts Using the Units instruction the output units of the AC output card can be changed to 9 i e percentage of the maximum output and the output units of the DC output card can be ch
83. status of currently running macros Sending programs over RS 232 USB GPIB or Telnet Programs can be entered from a remote interface such as RS 232 USB Telnet or the optional GPIB port Each line of text sent to the PTC10 is run as a separate program the entire program must be on a single line If two or more lines are sent to the PTC10 in quick succession the programs may run concurrently that is the PTC10 does not finish running the first program before beginning the second However the first program sent will always begin running before the second program If it s preferable to run programs sequentially begin each line with the PHO instruction See the remote interface section of this manual for more details Preparing programs as files on USB memory devices The PTC10 can also read programs that are stored as text files in a USB memory device This is the best way to enter longer programs Create a Programs folder in the root directory of the memory device Type the program in a word processing or text editor program and save it as a txt file in the Programs folder Plug the memory device into the PTC10 On the Program menu touch the Load button and the name of the program should appear along with any programs that have been saved in the PTC10 s internal memory The program can be run just as if it were saved in the PTC10 s memory however after the USB device is unplugged the program is no longer availa
84. that the first data point in the record was acquired expressed in milliseconds since January 1 1970 8 byte unsigned integer Bytes 12 19 number of milliseconds between data points 8 byte unsigned integer Bytes 20 23 checksum The sum of all data points in the record if the raw data values are read as if they were 4 byte integers instead of floating point values The checksum is not valid if the number of data points is 1 4 byte signed integer This is the end of the record header The data values begin immediately after Bytes 24 27 data point 0 4 byte IEEE floating point value Bytes 28 31 data point 1 4 byte IEEE floating point value etc The size of a log file cannot exceed 2 GB or about 500 million data points per channel At the default 1 second log rate this limit is reached in about 15 years Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 38 Using the system fan The PTC10 s fan regulates the temperature of the I O cards Automatic fan control At every A D conversion each I O card reads internal temperature sensors and determines how fast it needs the system fan to run The main system processor reads the desired fan speed from each I O card and if the System Other Fan control is set to auto sets the fan to the fastest requested speed For the PTC430 DC output card and PTC440 TEC driver the requested fan speed depends on the temperature of the card s heatsink the amount of current
85. the PID mode is Off PID feedback is inactive and the output can be set manually with the Value control If the mode is On PID feedback actively controls the heater output ideally maintaining the input channel at the setpoint If the mode is Follow the output is continuously set equal to the input with a gain and offset applied There is no PID feedback in follow mode Setpoint The temperature at which the PID feedback loop tries to keep the input Zero pt Follow mode only In Follow mode this value is subtracted from the input Thus when the input is equal to this value the output is zero In follow mode the output is determined by the equation Output Input Zero pt Gain PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 71 SRS Ramp This button is used to set the ramp rate in degrees per second controlling how quickly the PTC10 heats or cools your system Whenever the feedback setpoint is changed the PTC10 gradually adjusts the ramp temperature see the description of the Ramp T control below increasing or decreasing it at the ramp rate until it reaches the new setpoint The PID feedback loop in turn attempts to control the sensor temperature such that it tracks the ramp temperature Assuming the feedback is properly tuned and that your heater can respond quickly enough the sensor temperature should rise or fall at the ramp rate until it reaches the new setpoint If Ra
86. the PTC10 s built in calibration tables assuming that the cold junction temperature is 25 C If the thermocouple temperature is outside the PTC10 s range no reading appears on the display and any feedback loops for which the thermocouple is an input do not function The standard calibration accuracy is the IEC 584 2 standard for thermocouple to thermocouple material variation Not all commercial thermocouples may follow this standard for example Omega specifies an accuracy of 2 2 C for its type J and K thermocouples Greater accuracy is possible if your thermocouple is custom calibrated The accuracy values in this table only apply to the thermocouple itself and don t take into account the electronic accuracy of the PTC330 Temperature range C Accuracy PTCIO cold Sensei e Euston d o s calibration calibration junction at 25 C uV C at 25 C C at 0 C C lt 300 C Type Thermocouple 200 to 870 245 to 1025 60 9 1 7 J 0 to 760 185 to 1225 51 7 1 5 0 1 K 200 to 260 245 to 1395 40 6 5 0 1 N 270 to 1300 245 to 1325 26 5 1 5 T 200 to 350 245 to 425 40 6 0 5 0 1 Connecting thermocouples to the PTC330 The PTC330 thermocouple reader is factory configured to read one of the above thermocouple types The thermocouple must be equipped with a miniature jack such as Omega part number SMPW J M for type J SMPW K M for type K etc The jacks on the PTC330 are color cod
87. the USB device touch the USB logging indicator again and wait for it to turn grey This step is very important to prevent damage to the USB device If this step is skipped the USB device should be re formatted in a PC before using it again View saved data on a Windows PC Once data has been logged to the USB memory stick the stick will contain one or more log files for each channel Each file has the same name as a PTC10 channel plus the extension ptc If the ptc file gets too big a new log file with a numeric extension such as 000 001 etc is opened By default the log files are located in the root directory of the USB device A software package available at no charge from the SRS website www thinksrs com click Downloads gt Software includes a FileGrapher program that displays graphs of PTC10 log files and a PTCFileConverter program that converts log files to ASCII text files readable by most other programs To use FileGrapher either double click its icon or drag a log file onto the icon To use PTCFileConverter double click the icon to modify the conversion options and or select files to convert or just drag one or more log files onto the icon to convert them with the current options Interface with a computer The System setup menu which can be displayed by pressing the System button on the PTC10 s front panel has controls for setting up the PTC10 s RS 232 GPIB and Ethernet interfaces under the COM and
88. the names of up to six currently defined macros appear in this menu Pressing one of these macro buttons runs the corresponding macro and the button remains selected i e highlighted or in the down position as long as the macro continues to run A macro button appears to be selected whenever a macro with the name shown on the button is running Touching a selected macro button stops all currently running macros with that name See the Macro Names topic in the Remote Programming section for more information on macro names PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 75 SRS System screen Log column Interval Sets the default time between log points Each channel also has its own log interval setting that can override this default If the interval is set for example to 1 s the PTC saves a data point once per second and each point represents the average reading over one second period Clear Press this button and select yes to erase all data from the current log folder on the USB device The PTC10 s RAM is also cleared Folder Sets the USB device folder into which the PTC10 writes log files If the folder does not exist it is created If the folder does exist and contains PTC10 log files the PTC10 appends data to the existing log files Only data from the current folder can appear on the plot screen Log to If set to USB the PTC10 logs data from its I O channels to the USB device If set to RAM
89. the outputs SRS Custom channels are assigned to plots with the Plot button on the channel setup screen described on page 62 Touch anywhere within the right half of the plot to zoom in To zoom out touch the left half of the plot but not left of the Y axis Drag left and right to pan touch the words X lock that appear in the bottom left corner of the screen to return to viewing real time data Before trying to run a PID feedback loop for the first time it s helpful to verify that your heater is working by setting its current or power to a low value and seeing if any current flows To do this plug your heater into the PTC10 s back panel and set the output as follows 1 Enable the outputs by pressing the Output Enable key twice The red Output Enable light should turn on 2 Select the output channel on the Select screen then press the Channel key to display the channel setup screen 3 Touch the Value button and enter a small value for the current or power one that won t damage your system 4 The Value button should display the value that you entered If it s blank or displays zero the PTC is not detecting the heater 5 Verify that your heater is warming up 6 To turn the current off touch the Off button on the channel setup screen If Value button is blank or the heater doesn t start warming up try the following Verify that the heater leads are not shorted to ground or to each other If the heater is
90. the same time The first file listed in the selection window always appears as a black trace the second file is always red the third blue the fourth orange To zoom in on a graph draw a rectangle around the area that you d like to zoom in on To zoom out to the previous zoom area double click on the graph Triple click on the graph to show all data When FileGrapher opens a file it reads the entire file into a buffer in RAM Very large files may not fit in the program s memory or may take a long time to load and display If this occurs use PTC File Converter to downsample the file before opening it with FileGrapher Open Opens a directory for plotting All PTC files in the directory are shown in the selection window and the selected file is plotted All unsaved changes to data in the old directory are lost Close Closes the selected directory All unsaved changes to data are lost and the selection window closes Save GIF Saves the graph as a GIF file Save data Saves a trace as a text file or a binary ptc file See the PTC File Converter documentation for more information on data saving options Exit Quits the program Items in the Edit menu may affect how data buffers are graphed but do not affect the contents of the buffers Plot options Opens a window that controls the appearance of the graph Click Apply to update the graph with the new settings OK to update the graph and close the window Cancel
91. the time as the number of milliseconds since midnight on January 1 1970 UTC Systemtime smh provides the time as six integers indicating the seconds minutes and hours since midnight the day of the month the number of the month and the year IEEE 488 2 Instructions The following instructions are intended for use with the GPIB interface but can be issued through any of the PTC s I O ports These instructions ignore the Verbose setting a query instruction always returns the value only while a set instruction always returns nothing They also do not take the list or help suffixes Integer arguments can be supplied as hexadecimal values with the prefix 0x the number zero followed by a lower case letter x for example ASE 0x10 sets the Alarm Status Register to hex 10 decimal 16 Queries always return values in decimal format ASE integer ASE Sets or gets the value of the Alarm Status Enable ASE register If a bit of the ASR is set and the same bit of the ASE is also set bit 0 of the Status Byte register is set ASR Returns the current value of the Alarm Status Register ASR and then clears the register The ASR is a 32 bit integer that indicates which alarms were triggered since the last time the ASR command was issued Each of the PTC s input channels is assigned a bit in the Alarm Status Register When an alarm is tripped the channel s bit in the Alarm Status Register is set The bit is
92. this flange mounted the card can be plugged into either slot 5 normally occupied by the analog I O card or slot 6 normally occupied by the digital I O card Since all six slots of the PTC are identical except for their width the I O cards can be arranged in any order as long as they fit into the slots To order the narrow flange from SRS contact sales and ask for part number 7 01920 720 PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 6 Connecting the RTDs RTDs are connected to the PTC321 with removable 5 pin 3 5 mm terminal plugs e g Weidmuller part number 169045 The supplied plugs use a tension clamp to hold the RTD wires To install the RTD wires 1 One side of the plug has two rows of five holes Hold the plug with these holes facing you with the row of five small holes on the right and the five larger holes on the left 2 Each pair of holes is blocked by a metal clip Place a small screwdriver into one of the small holes and firmly push it into the narrow gap to the right of the clip The screwdriver should go in about half an inch and push the clip to the left 3 The larger hole should open up Place a stripped wire into the hole and remove the screwdriver Plugs with screw clamps e g Weidmuller 161409 can also be used It s easier to connect the RTD wires to these plugs but the wires often come loose resulting in noisy temperature measurements The tension clamps are a little more difficult to install
93. though they have the correct resistance at 25 C Diodes Choose from the list of commercial cryogenic diodes See the description of the PTC320 I O card on page 2 for more information on standard diode calibrations A RTD thermistor and diode calibrations only B RTD thermistor and diode calibrations only C RTD thermistor and diode calibrations only RO RTD calibrations only Custom calibration coefficients These settings let you define custom calibration curves for some sensor types without making a custom calibration table The values can only be changed if the calibration type is set to Custom and a custom calibration table is not in use RTDs If the sensor is an RTD A B C and RO are the constants for the Callendar van Dusen equation R Ro 1 At Bt t 100 Ct below 0 C R Ro 1 At Bt above 0 C where R is the measured resistance of the RTD in ohms Ro is the resistance of the RTD at 0 C also in ohms and t is the temperature in C Ifa standard RTD calibration is selected i e IEC751 or US preset values of A B and C are used The value of RO however is not preset and can be modified The Callendar van Dusen equation is not an exact representation of an RTD s characteristics but is accurate to about 50 mK in the range 200 400 C In contrast class A commercial RTDs that have not been individually calibrated are accurate to 150 mK at 0 C and 950 mK at 400 C If you re calibr
94. triangle in the upper right corner of the screen and wait for it to become grayed out If a USB device is unplugged while data is being logged to it repair the device by inserting it into a PC and running chkdsk Periodic defragmentation is also recommended since the process of continuously appending data to multiple log files can result in highly fragmented drives ADC sampling and logged data SRS The PTC10 has two different sampling rate settings one controls how often data is acquired and another controls how often it s stored AID rate The A D analog to digital conversion rate controls how often a data point is acquired from each channel All channels are read at the same A D rate which by default is 100 ms or 10 samples per second The A D rate mainly affects the performance of feedback loops the faster the A D rate is the more quickly the PID loops can respond to changing temperatures the slower the A D rate the less noise there is in the PID output By default the A D conversion process is synchronized with the AC line voltage and the A D rate can only be set to multiples of the AC line period For example if the A D rate is set to 100 ms A D conversions occur every six cycles of the AC voltage if the PTC10 is plugged into a 60 Hz AC wall socket or every five cycles for 50 Hz AC This prevents 60 Hz noise from aliasing into temperature readings which would cause a slow sinusoidal variation in the readings 60 Hz noise sti
95. type set with the Channel Cal Type button is changed to standard The following actions have no effect on custom calibration tables Unplugging the USB device with the calibration tables while the PT C10 is turned on Plugging in a USB device that does not contain a calibration file for the channel It can take several seconds for the PTC10 to recognize a USB device Therefore when an instrument is turned on with a USB device plugged in the default calibration may remain in effect for several seconds before the custom calibration is loaded A calibration table is an ASCII text file containing a units declaration followed by pairs of numeric values representing the displayed and measured values For example here s a calibration table for a 1000 platinum RTD The first line indicates that at 0 C the sensor has a resistance of 100 ohms units C 0 100 00 103 90 107 79 111 67 115 54 119 40 123 24 127 08 130 90 134 71 138 51 OOOO OVO OGO O MON ON GM OM ON GM GM OM GM oM CO 000 100 0 PN P nd Units declaration The first line indicates which units this channel will be displayed in once the calibration table is loaded This line is optional if it s omitted the units are assumed to be Kelvins The units can be any string of 4 or fewer characters but must not contain any spaces to type the degree sign on Windows computers hold down the alt key and type 0176 on the number pad Anything on this line af
96. value tells the tuner to enable derivative feedback which makes the feedback more responsive If D is set to zero the tuner uses a different tuning algorithm that leaves derivative feedback disabled This is sometimes necessary to avoid excessive noise in the feedback output Start the feedback autotuner If the system has never been tuned start with the heater output turned off and the temperature of your process or experimental apparatus stabilized at the ambient temperature If the system has been tuned before it s better to enable the feedback and wait for the temperature to stabilize at the setpoint In either case the key to successful autotuning is to start with a stable temperature If the outputs are disabled turn them on by pressing the Output Enable key twice The red Output Enable LED turns on and the PTC10 beeps if pressed again the Output Enable key immediately turns all the PTC10 s outputs off inputs are not affected In the PID menu touch Mode and select auto to start the autotuner A status window appears and is updated every few seconds The tuner begins by freezing the heater output for one third of the Lag time and measuring how much the temperature changes during this time This establishes a baseline figure for temperature drift and noise The tuner then changes the heater output by amount set with the Step Y control and waits for the Lag time to pass If the temperature does not change by at least ten times the b
97. when setting Vmax In some cases the output may exceed Vmax every time the PID feedback is enabled To avoid this temporarily set the ramp rate to a low value i e 1 C s when enabling the feedback Temperature input section The PTC440 has a sensor input that can read thermistors RTDs AD590 and LM135 LM235 LM335 temperature sensors The PTC440 s temperature input should only be used when temperature stability of 0 1 C is acceptable For more demanding applications the sensor should be read with a dedicated input card such as the PTC320 for thermistors RTDs and diodes PTC321 for 100 O RTDs only or PTC330 thermocouples These cards provide lower noise and greater accuracy than the PTC440 Connecting the temperature sensor RTDs 4 wire RTDs should be used to ensure accuracy Two of the wires are normally white and are connected to one end of the resistive sensor while the other two are black red or yellow and are connected to the other end There is normally no shield In this case the RTD should be wired in one of the following ways assuming black and white wires PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 17 SRS Pin7 Pin8 Pin 14 Pin 15 Option White Black White Black Option 2 Black White Black White Thermistors Two wire thermistors should be connected to pins 7 and 8 LM135 LM235 LM335 The LM135 LM235 and LM335 are integrated circuit temperature sensors If an excitation current
98. where the first line in the Progress window is now a left square bracket New program T Clear Progress Load Save Delete Input Messages Touch the Progress window again anywhere beneath the first line The list of possible instructions appears Select program from the list Touching this button brings up a list of Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 59 instructions that affect the program For example cls clears the Messages window name assigns a name to the program and kill ends a named program Command clearAlarms kill run clearErrors name standby cls pause waitForRamp define popup waitForSample delete print waitForTune getError redraw Select print An alphanumeric input screen appears where you can enter an argument for the program print instruction Type hello prog P yp Argument 0 Old value Shift Del Clear Esc OK Touch the OK button You are returned to the Program screen and the instruction program print hello appears in the second line of the Progress window prog P PP gr SRS PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 60 New program Ld lI Clear program print hello Load Save Delete Input program print hello Now enter the instruction program pause 1 s The pause instruction has two arguments that must be entered separately First you ll be shown a nu
99. window on the PTC10 s screen Measured heater current differs from desired value The PTC431 s output is on and the current at the positive terminal differs from the desired current by more than 0 25A PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 15 This error can occur if the card is out of calibration It can also mean that the card has been damaged and is no longer capable of correctly regulating its output current or of producing its rated output current e Current at and heater terminals is different The PTC431 s output is on and the current at the positive terminal differs from the current at the negative terminal by more than 0 25A This error can occur if one of the leads is shorted to an external ground Output is off but heater current was detected current is flowing into the negative terminal even though the positive terminal isn t producing any current This error may indicate that the heater is shorted to a power source other than the PTC10 It can also indicate a failure of the card s current output circuitry Output card overheated Either the resistance of the heater is less than 10 ohms the positive and negative terminals are shorted to each other the ambient temperature is too high or the PTC10 s chassis fan is not working Try reducing the maximum output voltage or current and make sure the front panel fan is running PTC440 TEC driver The PTC440 includes a current source to drive a
100. 0 3 01232 360 3 01837 360 3 01233 360 3 01235 360 3 01236 360 3 01236 360 3 01237 360 3 01205 360 3 01239 360 3 01240 360 3 01743 360 3 01241 360 3 01241 360 3 01241 360 3 01835 360 3 00663 360 3 01836 360 6 00662 621 6 00762 626 6 00664 620 6 00772 620 0 00306 026 7 01773 720 0 4 7KX4D 4 7KX4D 22X4 22X4 22X4 4 7KX4D 4 7KX4D 4 7KX4D 4 7KX4D 1 0KX4D 1 0KX4D 4 7KX4D 4 7KX4D 1 0KX4D 10KX4D 10KX4D 22X4 22X4 B3F 1052 MAX6365LKA31 MCF5307FT90B MT48LC4M32B2TG7 SST39VF3201 70 CY62146EV30LL DS1672S 33 74LCX04M 74LCX16245MTD 74LCX16245MTD S 1D13706F00A100 TALVC4245ADW MAX3233bECWP AX88796L ISPGAL22V10AV TAVCX16245MTD TAVCX16245MTD TAVCX16245MTD ISP1161A1BM 74HCO08 TPS2042BD 45MHZ SMT 32 768KHZ 6PF 25MHZ 6MHZ 4 40X3 16PP BRACKET PTC10 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor networ Resistor networ Resistor networ k SMT Leadless k SMT Leadless k SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Switch Momentary P
101. 0 5 00790 578 5 00790 578 5 00790 578 5 00790 578 5 00601 578 3 00011 303 3 01319 360 3 01319 360 3 00010 303 3 01303 313 3 01319 360 3 01319 360 3 00010 303 3 01303 313 3 01319 360 3 01319 360 3 00010 303 3 01303 313 3 01319 360 3 01319 360 3 00010 303 3 01303 313 3 00380 301 3 00926 360 3 01320 340 3 00446 340 3 01320 340 3 00446 340 3 01320 340 3 00446 340 3 01320 340 3 00446 340 3 01320 340 3 00446 340 1 00251 130 1 00006 130 1 00006 130 1 00006 130 1 00006 130 1 00234 109 6 00174 630 6 00684 609 6 00174 630 6 00684 609 7 0 3 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 707 701 073 360 466 461 431 461 575 461 466 461 455 461 431 461 575 461 466 461 455 461 431 461 575 461 466 461 455 461 431 461 33U T35 47U 0 1UF 16V X7R O1UF X 4 1UF 0603 1UF 0603 1UF 0603 1UF 0603 0 1UF 16V X7R RED MMBD1503A MMBD1503A GREEN B340LA 13 F MMBD1503A MMBD1503A GREEN B340LA 13 F MMBD1503A MMBD1503A GREEN B340LA 13 F MMBD1503A MMBD1503A GREEN B340LA 13 F 1N5248 MBROS40T 1 HCPL 2630 6N137 HCPL 2630 6N137 HCPL 2630 6N137 HCPL 2630 6N137 HCPL 2630 6N137 10 PIN DIL 2 PIN DI 2 PIN DI 2 PIN DI 2 PIN DI 96 PIN RT ANGLE 6611 TYPE 43 10UH 6611 TYPE 43 10UH PTC THRMCPL RD MMBTA64LT1 300 10 10M 300 100 10 10M 300 100 10 10M 300 100 10 Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20
102. 0 LakeShore RX 103A 2 40 Ruthenium RX 202A 0 050 40 oxide Scientific Instruments RO600 1 0 300 R400 2 0273 Cryo Con R500 0 050 20 IEC751 DIN43760 48 15 1173 15 RTD All US 48 15 1173 15 100 Q 193 15 373 15 300 Q 193 15 373 15 1000 Q 193 15 373 15 2252 2 193 15 523 15 Measurement 3000 Q 193 15 523 15 specialties 5000 Q 193 15 523 15 Thermistor Er YS 6000 Q 193 15 523 15 Omega 10000 Q type B 193 15 523 15 10000 Q type H 193 15 523 15 30 kQ 233 15 523 15 100 kQ 233 15 423 15 300 kQ 298 15 423 15 MQ 298 15 423 15 Other resistive and diode sensors can be used with the PTC320 but require custom calibration curves For example rhodium iron germanium and carbon glass sensors have too much sensor to sensor variability to use a standard curve and therefore must be custom calibrated Connecting the sensor The PTC320 has a 6 pin DIN socket that mates with standard 6 pin push pull DIN plugs i e Digi Key CP 1060 ND This is the pinout of the socket as it appears when looking at the back panel SRS PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 4 Sense Excitation Ground Not connected Sense Excitation The outer shell of the plug is connected to the PTC10 s chassis The PTC320 passes an excitation current through the attached RTD thermistor or diode and senses the induced voltage For the most accurate results all sensors should be read with a four wire configuration usi
103. 0 360 3 00663 360 3 00814 360 3 00741 360 3 0 3 0 3 0 697 360 698 360 500 360 3 00814 360 3 0 3 0 3 0 697 360 698 360 500 360 3 00663 360 3 00814 360 3 0 3 0 3 0 697 360 698 360 500 360 3 00814 360 3 0 322 360 3 00114 329 10M 300 100 0 39 2K 9 31K 3 01K 75 0 102K 300RO00 1 100 2 49K 4 99K 4 99K 4 7KX4D 1 0KX4D 47KX4D 47X4D 4 7KX4D 10X4D 470X4D 470X4D 47X4D 4 7KX4D 10X4D 470X4D 470X4D 47X4D 4 7KX4D 10X4D 470X4D 47X4D 4 7KX4D 10X4D 470X4D 470X4D OKX4D 470X4D 470X4D 4 7KX4D 10X4D VP1 0190 ATMEGA64 16AC 74ABT16245CMTD LTC2051CS8 PBF LM4140ACM 1 0 LTC2440CGN 74HCO08 78M05 74HC04 LTC2051CS8 PBF LM4140ACM 1 0 LTC2440CGN 78M05 LTC2051CS8 PBF LM4140ACM 1 0 LTC2440CGN 74HCO08 78M05 LTC2051CS8 PBF LM4140ACM 1 0 LTC2440CGN 78M05 LT1425CS 7815 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Resistor Misc Thin Film 1 50ppm 0603 Chip Resistor Thin Film 1 50ppm 0603 Chip Resistor Thin Film 1 50ppm 0603 Chip Resistor Thin Film 1 50ppm 0603 Chip Resistor Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Lea
104. 0 50 Thermocouple Wire Z0 0 01211 049 TFCP 010 50 Thermocouple Wire Z0 1 01105 100 MPJ K F Connector Misc Z0 1 01122 000 MPJ E F Hardware Misc Z0 1 01193 000 MPJ J F Hardware Misc Z0 1 01194 000 MPJ T F Hardware Misc Z0 6 00735 600 8245PD12 Misc Components Z0 7 01699 721 PTC BLOCK TP CV Machined Part Zo 7 01700 721 PTC BLOCK STRIP Machined Part Z0 7 01701 721 PTC BLOCK BT CV Machined Part Zo 7 01735 720 PTC BRKT Fabricated Part Z0 7 01992 720 PTC SIL PAD Fabricated Part PTC420 AC output card C111 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C112 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 113 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 114 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C121 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C122 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 123 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 124 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C211 5 00393 552 3300P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C212 5 00393 552 3300P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C 213 5 00389 552 1500P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C214 5 00389 552 1500P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C 220 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C221 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 230 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C231 5 00601 578 0
105. 06 SRS 5 00601 578 5 00601 578 5 00601 578 5 00601 578 5 00601 578 5 00601 578 5 00601 578 5 00299 568 5 00389 552 5 00389 552 5 00528 568 5 00654 500 5 00525 578 5 00525 578 5 00525 578 5 00299 568 5 005 13 569 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 005 13 569 5 00519 569 5 00628 569 5 0038 1 552 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 00389 552 5 00389 552 5 00528 568 5 00654 500 5 00525 578 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R U 1500P 1500P 2 2U 01UF X 4 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 16V A CASE JU 1U JU JU 1U 16V A CASE 33U T35 22U 35V 330P 1U JU 1500P 1500P 2 2U 01UF X 4 1U Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg
106. 0752 10000P Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 0603 C204 5 00752 10000P Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 0603 C205 5 00752 10000P Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 0603 C206 5 00752 10000P Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 0603 C210 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C230 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C231 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C260 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C270 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C271 5 00526 22U T16 SMD Tantalum C Case C280 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C281 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C290 5 00513 1U 16V A CASE SMT Tantalum 16V A case 1206 but NEEDS POLARITY mark C291 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C292 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C293 5 00525 1U CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C294 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C295 5 00654 01UF X 4 C300 5 00299 au Capacitor Mono 50V 1096 X7R 1206 C310 5 00299 1U Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C31 5 00299 1U Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C330 5 00299 au Capacitor Mono 50V 1096 X7R 1206 C340 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C345 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C351 5 00035 47U Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20 Rad C352 5 00519 33U T35 SMD Tantalum Y Case C353 5 00513 1U 16V A CASE SMT Tantalum 16V A case 1206 but NEEDS POLARITY mark C361 5 00035 47U Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20 Rad C362 5 00519 33U T35 SMD Tantalum Y Case C363 5 00513 1U 16V A CASE SMT Tantalum 16V A case 1206 but NEEDS POLARITY mark C371 5 0003
107. 0945 3 01320 3 01320 3 01320 1 00370 1 00234 6 00512 6 00512 6 00815 7 02093 3 00944 3 01678 3 00944 3 01678 Iu 22U T16 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2 2U T16 2 2U T16 1U 1U 1U 4 7UF 1812 01U 5 22UF Iu 1U 33U T35 1U 16V A CASE 33U T35 10U T35 10U T35 1U 4 7U T35 4 7U T35 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 33U T35 1U 16V A CASE RED MINI BAT54S BAV199 PDS560 13 BAV199 1N5231B BAS40 05 BAT54S HCPL 2630 HCPL 2630 HCPL 2630 15 PIND 96 PIN RT ANGLE 2744045447 2744045447 10UH PTC440 PELTIER IRF4905 IRF1010EZ IRF4905 IRF1010EZ Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 SMD Tantalum C Case Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 SMD Tantalum Y Case SMD Tantalum Y Case CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Ceramic 50V 10 SL Rad Capacitor Mono 50V 5 X7R 1206 Capacitor Silver Mica 500V 5 DM15 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 SMD Tantalum Y Case SMT Tantalum 16V A case 1206 but NEEDS POLARITY mark SMD Tantalum Y Case SMD Tantalum D Case SMD Tantalum D Case Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 SMD Tantalum C Case SMD Tantalum C Case CAP 1UF 25V CERAM
108. 0V and may therefore not work with some older computers However the PTC10 can still receive 10V signals The RS 232 interface does not echo characters back as they are received The RS 232 interface uses an RTS CTS hardware flow control protocol in which the PTC10 pulls pin 8 high to indicate that the PC can send data and low to indicate that the PC should not send data Similarly the PTC10 stops sending data whenever the PC pulls pin 7 low Of the PC serial ports tested by SRS only about half actually supported RTS CTS flow control If your serial port doesn t support RTS CTS the computer may never transmit data to the PTC10 it may stop after several characters or it may never stop transmitting in which case the PTC10 will drop characters from some received RS 232 messages The Aten Technology UC232A USB to Serial converter cable has been tested and is compatible with the PTC10 USB to serial converters based on the Prolific PL 2303 chip are also compatible If the RS 232 interface does not respond at all make sure the baud rate is set correctly and also make sure that each line of text sent to the PTC10 ends with a linefeed character decimal 10 hex Ox0a n The System COM History window can sometimes help to debug communication issues USB device port The PTC10 has a single USB 1 1 Device interface that can be connected to a PC with a standard USB A to B cable The PTC10 appears on the PC as a COM port Any application s
109. 1 C 402 C 403 C405 C 406 C 407 C 408 C410 C411 C 420 C 430 C 440 C 450 C 460 C 461 C 462 C 464 C 500 C501 C 502 C 503 C 505 C 506 C 507 C 508 C 510 C511 C 520 C 530 C 540 C 560 C 561 C562 C 564 C 610 C611 C612 C613 C614 C616 C621 C 630 C 701 C 702 C710 C711 C 720 C 720 C 730 C 740 C 750 C 760 SRS 5 00525 578 5 00525 578 5 00299 568 5 005 13 569 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 005 13 569 5 00519 569 5 00628 569 5 00381 552 5 00299 568 5 00389 552 5 00389 552 5 00528 568 5 00654 500 5 00525 578 5 00525 578 5 00525 578 5 00299 568 5 005 13 569 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 005 13 569 5 00519 569 5 00628 569 5 00381 552 5 00299 568 5 00389 552 5 00389 552 5 00528 568 5 00654 500 5 00525 578 5 00525 578 5 00525 578 5 00299 568 5 005 13 569 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 005 13 569 5 00519 569 5 00628 569 5 00381 552 5 00299 568 5 00319 569 5 00387 552 5 00299 568 5 0038 1 552 5 00519 569 5 00329 526 5 00299 568 5 00790 578 5 00790 578 5 00470 569 5 00790 578 5 00299 568 5 00601 578 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 00513 569 1U 1U 1U 1U 16V A CASE 1U U 1U 1U 16V A CASE 33U T35 22U 35V 330P 1U 1500P 1500P 2 2U O1UF X 4 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 16V A CASE JU JU 1U JU 1U 16V A CASE 33U T35 22U 35V 330P 1U 1500P 1500P 2 2U O1UF X 4 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 16V A CASE
110. 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C234 5 00542 572 1 0U SMT Film Capacitors 50V 5 All Sizes C 235 5 00542 572 1 0U SMT Film Capacitors 50V 5 All Sizes C 240 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 241 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C250 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C251 5 00522 569 47U TIO Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C252 5 00522 569 47U TIO Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C 260 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 290 5 00471 569 10U T16 Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C291 5 00299 568 AU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R SRS PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 173 C 292 C 293 C 294 D 111 D 112 D 211 D 212 D 213 D 214 D 231 D 232 D 262 jill J201 J 202 JD121 K 260 L 200 L 290 LS200 PCI Q 260 R 112 R 113 R 200 R 211 R 212 R 213 R214 R215 R 216 R 231 R 232 R 233 R 234 R 235 R 236 R 242 R 243 R 261 R 262 111 113 121 231 232 233 241 242 V200 11 DIDDII cea U 220 U 230 U 240 u 250 U 260 Z0 Z0 Z0 Z0 Z0 Z0 Z0 SRS 5 00471 569 5 00299 568 5 00298 568 3 00011 303 3 00011 303 3 00896 301 3 00896 301 3 00896 301 3 00896 301 3 01400 313 3 01400 313 3 00806 360 1 00251 130 1 01185 100 1 01052 130 1 00234 109 3 01056 335 6 00757 604 6 00236 631 3 01739 335 7 01708 701 3 00601 360 4 01466 461 4 01466 461 4 01783 400
111. 21 4 01439 461 22 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 161 4 00082 401 470K Resistor Carbon Film 1 4W 596 R 162 4 00138 407 10 0K Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 1 5OPPM R 163 4 00138 407 10 0K Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 1 5OPPM R 164 4 00130 407 1 00K Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 1 5OPPM R 165 4 00170 407 249K Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 1 5OPPM R 201 4 01439 461 22 Thick Film 5 6 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 202 4 01406 461 0 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 203 4 01406 461 0 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 204 4 01406 461 0 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 205 4 01406 461 0 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R211 4 01479 461 1 0K Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 212 4 01158 462 2 67K Thin Film 196 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 213 4 01455 461 100 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R214 4 01455 461 100 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 215 4 01021 462 100 Thin Film 196 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 216 4 01021 462 100 Thin Film 196 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 217 4 01001 462 61 9 Thin Film 196 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 218 4 00436 409 al Resistor Wire Wound R 231 4 01458 461 130 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 232 4 01466 461 300 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 233 4 01472 461 510 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 234 4 00029 401 1 8K Resistor Carbon Film 1 4W 5 R 235 4 00029 401 1 8K Resistor Carbon Film 1 4W 5 R 236 4 00048 401 2 2K Resistor Carbon Film 1 4W 5
112. 3 2 channel thermistor diode RTD card eese 7 PTC330 thermocouple reader sse tenens 10 PT C420 AC output cardi inn dadkuadniadkeauduanadauahaaunacdiaaduanakaakaas 12 PT C430 50 W DC output card sse nennen enne nnne nnn nnns 12 PTC431 100W DC output card nennen nnne nennen 14 PU C440 TEC Aver e 15 PT CSI O analog VO card rona ancien ddan ti o rta Ea e SEEMS 18 PT 520 digital aid 3 42 1 2 2 00 ttai aeaaeai aeaaea etate died ita AREA 18 Operation 21 Quick start tutorial eee eee eee eese eene tense tns etna etna tense etna sets setas etes s senos 22 Ticnothe In SERUEDIeTIE OTI 51er etus retenta rper Pee eren rte rere eerte fats 22 lees Im 22 Configure the sensor inputs xis 2 1 ee eh dU e EI e FRE er REI eH ERS eR ERREUR 22 If the sensor reading does not appear essent entente entente 23 PLO eae 23 Tresttheo tbt o oot a a a e a ta tr tbedu t t 24 Set the data logging rate nennt tenente nennen nete tetn eene nennen 25 Save data to and retrieve data from a USB memory device oo eee eeeteeeeeeeneeeeetaeneeeees 25 Interface with a computer sssssssessseseseeeeeeenntn tnnt entente nnne nnne nnns 25 Control a temperature EE EERER VNB UNI UT REEERE ARRERA 27 Acquiring and logging data 4 eee eese eee eines een e et nne tnn sets neto
113. 31 C32 20V An analog supply used to generate 15V A29 A30 B29 B30 C29 C30 AGND Ground for the analog supplies May be floating relative to digital ground A27 A28 3 3V Powers the ColdFire CPU and other components on the CPU card B27 B28 B12 B22 A3 A12 A14 A18 B3 C3 C19 DGND Ground for the 3 3V and 5V supplies C27 C28 5V Powers the Atmel microcontrollers and all other digital components on the I O cards A25 A26 B25 B26 C25 C26 24V Connects directly to the PTC10 s 24V brick power supply Used for all high current outputs A23 A24 B23 B24 C23 C24 24VR Ground return for the 24V supply A1 A2 B1 B2 C1 C2 24VGND Ground for 24V Parallel bus This proprietary 8 bit data bus is used for communication between the CPU card and I O cards A4 A11 ADD 0 7 The address lines ADDO ADD3 are used to select a specific card ADD4 ADD7 are not used A13 CLK Clock A 16 MHz clock signal used for the Atmel microcontrollers A15 RESET When pulled low the Atmel microcontrollers on all I O cards are reset regardless of whether or not CS is active Used to upload firmware onto the microcontrollers B4 B11 C4 C11 D 0 15 The data lines Only D0 D7 are currently used C13 CS Card Select Each I O card has its own active low select line An address decoder on the backplane decodes a 4 bit address provided by the CPU and pulls the appropriate select line low Add
114. 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 466 461 740 400 184 462 519 461 431 461 740 400 184 462 519 461 431 461 740 400 184 462 519 461 431 461 740 400 184 462 519 461 431 461 184 462 184 462 707 463 707 463 4 00910 463 4 0 707 463 4 00916 463 4 00916 463 4 00916 463 4 00911 463 4 01764 463 4 00916 463 4 00916 463 4 00916 463 4 0091 1 463 4 01764 463 4 00916 463 4 00916 463 4 00916 463 4 00911 463 4 01764 463 4 00916 463 4 00916 463 4 00916 463 4 00911 463 4 01764 463 4 00909 463 4 00909 463 4 00909 463 4 00909 463 3 01696 360 3 01498 360 3 01364 360 161417 96 PIN RT ANGLE 6611 TYPE 43 10UH 6611 TYPE 43 10UH 6611 TYPE 43 10UH PTC RTD READER MMBTA64LT1 MMBTA64LT1 MMBTA64LT1 MMBTA64LT1 MMBT3904LT1 300 600 OHM 1 4 99K 47K 10 600 OHM 1 4 99K 47K 10 600 OHM 196 4 99K 47K 10 600 OHM 1 4 99K 47K 10 4 99K 4 99K 47KX4D 47KX4D 1 0KX4D 47KX4D 47X4D 47X4D 47X4D 4 7KX4D 10X4D 47X4D 47X4D 47X4D 4 7KX4D 10X4D 47X4D 47X4D 47X4D 4 7KX4D 10X4D 47X4D 47X4D 47X4D 4 7KX4D 10X4D 470X4D 470X4D 470X4D 470X4D ATMEGA64 16AC 74ABT16245CMTD OPA4277UA Connector Misc DIN Connector Male Ferrite Beads Inductor Fixed SMT Ferrite Beads Inductor Fixed SMT Ferrite Beads Inductor Fixed SMT Printed Circuit Board Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Cir
115. 5 Minutes Derivative derivative feedback reduces the heater output whenever the temperature is rising rapidly In the example below when the derivative gain D is increased from 3 to 6 W s C the amount of overshoot and oscillation decreases The temperature rise is also a little slower but because there is less oscillation the system stabilizes at 70 C sooner However if the derivative gain is too large it too can produce oscillations because when the temperature is rising rapidly derivative feedback reduces the heater output which causes the temperature to rise more slowly which makes the derivative feedback increase the heater output and so on Heater power W Temperature C 0 1 2 3 4 5 Minutes srs PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 43 With the right amount of derivative feedback we can increase P and to levels that would otherwise cause oscillations and thereby obtain faster more responsive feedback control Automatic tuning algorithms During automatic tuning the PTC10 changes the heater power measures how much and how quickly the temperature changes in response and then estimates the optimum values of the gain factors P I and D Two tuning algorithms are available on the PTC10 the relay tuner and the step response tuner Relay tuner 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min Heater power top and sensor temperature bottom during relay autotuning Step Y is W L
116. 5 47U Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20 Rad C372 5 00519 33U T35 SMD Tantalum Y Case C373 5 00513 1U 16V A CASE SMT Tantalum 16V A case 1206 but NEEDS POLARITY mark C411 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C421 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C521 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C522 5 00391 2200P Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 C531 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C611 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C612 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C620 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C621 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C622 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C630 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C631 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C641 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C650 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C651 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C652 5 00752 10000P Capacitor Mono S0V 10 X7R 0603 C660 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C661 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R Ases PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 163 C670 C671 C672 C680 C681 C682 D111 D200 D201 D202 D203 D204 D641 150310 IS0311 150330 j200 J260 JDR121 K430 K431 K432 K433 K434 K435 K436 K437 K438 K439 K440 K441 K442 K443 K444 K445 L351 L352 L361 L362 L371 L372 PCB Q521 R112 R260 R261 R281 R282 R291 R391 R392 R393 R394 R430 R432 R434 R436 R438 R440 R442 R444 R611 R612 R613 SRS 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00740 3 00011 3 00945 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 319 319 319 319 357 320 320 320 1 00281 1 0
117. 5 6NT146 STZ5 6NT146 1N5248 MBR0540T1 GREEN B340LA 13 F BAV170LT1 BAV170LT1 RED RED RED RED HCPL 2630 6N137 HCPL 2630 6N137 10 PIN DIL 25 PIN D RS232 1615490000 96 PIN RT ANGLE 24VDC DPDT 24VDC DPDT 24VDC DPDT 24VDC DPDT PTC MMBT3904LT1 MMBT3904LT1 MMBT3904LT1 MMBT3904LT1 300 39 2K 9 31K 3 01K 75 0 300 100 0 47KX4D 4 7KX4D 1 0KX4D 47KX4D 47X4D 47X4D 4 7KX4D 470X4D 470X4D 470X4D 470X4D 47KX4D 47KX4D 4 7KX4D 270X4D VP1 0190 Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R LED Subminiature Diode SMT Diode SMT Diode SMT Diode SMT Diode Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg LED T1 Package Diode SMT Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg LED T1 Package LED T1 Package LED T1 Package LED T1 Package Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Connector Male Connector D Sub Right Angle PC Female Header Amp MTA 100 Rt Angle DIN Connector Male Relay Relay Relay Relay Printed Circuit Board Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integ
118. 601 578 5 00601 578 5 00601 578 5 00601 578 5 00601 578 5 00601 578 5 00601 578 5 00334 569 5 00023 529 5 00601 578 5 00601 578 5 00375 552 5 00472 569 5 00395 568 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 5 00329 526 5 00384 552 5 00318 569 5 00318 569 5 00318 569 5 00318 569 5 00318 569 5 00318 569 5 00318 569 5 00610 553 5 00610 553 5 00610 553 5 00375 552 5 00628 569 5 00399 568 5 00640 569 5 00640 569 5 00375 552 5 00628 569 5 00628 569 5 00399 568 5 00640 569 5 00640 569 3 00204 301 3 00380 301 3 00479 301 3 00479 301 3 00479 301 3 00479 301 3 00479 301 3 00479 301 3 00479 301 3 00479 301 3 00012 306 3 00012 306 3 00012 306 3 00012 306 3 00012 306 3 00012 306 3 01859 360 3 01859 360 1 01181 132 1 01184 132 1 01184 132 1 01184 132 1 01184 132 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R IU T35 JU 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 100P 4 7U T35 4700P 5 JU 1U 120U 560P 2 2U T35 2 2U T35 2 2U T35 2 2U T35 2 2U T35 2 2U T35 2 2U T35 220U 100V 220U 100V 220U 100V 100P 22U 35V 01U 5 100U 10V 100U 10V 100P 22U 35V 22U 35V 01U 5 100U 10V 100U 10V 1N5230 1N5248 MUR410 MUR410 MUR410 MUR410 MUR410 MUR410 MUR410 MUR410 GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEN B540C 13 F B540C 13 F 431602103 4 PIN 4 PIN 4 PIN 4 PIN SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap
119. 601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C20 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 202 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 203 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 204 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 205 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 206 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C23 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C232 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C25 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C252 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 260 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 270 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C27 5 00526 569 22U T16 Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C 290 5 005 13 569 1U 16V A CASE Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C29 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 292 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 293 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 294 5 00525 578 1U SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 295 5 00654 500 01UF X 4 Capacitor Misc C 301 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 302 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 303 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 304 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 305 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 306 5 00399 568 01U 5 Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 351
120. 6V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 1U 330U 4 7U T35 1U 1U 01U 5 1200P 22U T16 1200P 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 22U T16 1U Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Screw Panhead Phillips Washer nylon Screw Black All Types Heat Sinks Heat Sinks Pins amp Clips Insulators Fabricated Part SMT Tantalum 16V A case 1206 but NEEDS POLARITY mark Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Electrolytic High Ripple High Temp 55 105 DEG C SMD Tantalum C Case Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor
121. A and 20 V 2 A ranges 1 5 pA 0 5 A range 0 2 pA 0 1 A range PTC431 100W DC output card Output Connector Range Output resolution Accuracy Noise rms 25 Q load DC 10 Hz PTC440 TEC driver Output Input Connector TEC driver Output current Maximum power Compliance voltage Output resolution Accuracy Current noise One unipolar DC current source 6 screw terminals Accepts 12 22 AWG wire or 6 spade terminals up to 0 31 wide Max torque 9 in Ib 50 V 2A 50V 0 6A 50V 0 2A 20V 2A 20V 0 6A 20V 0 2A 16 bits 1 mA 2 A range 0 5 mA 0 6 A range 0 2 mA 0 2 A range 5 uA 2 A range 1 5 uA 0 6 A range 0 5 pA 0 2 A range One linear bipolar DC current source One 2 or 4 wire thermistor RTD IC temperature sensor input One 15 pin DB15 F 5A 5A 50W 12 V at 0 A current 0 15 mA E5 mA 0 02 mA at 0 5A current 22 ohm resistive load 0 01 10 Hz bandwidth Temperature sensor input Compatible sensors Thermistors RTDs 2 or 4 wire NTC thermistors 4 wire platinum RTDs 100 10000 at 0 C PTC 10 Programmable Temperature Controller IC sensors Excitation current Input range Resistance Voltage Current LM335 AD590 or equivalent 10 nA 100 pA or 1 mA 10 250 kQ 0 2 5V 0 1mA RMS electronic noise sensor at 25 C 10 pA excitation 1 kQ thermistor 2252 Q thermistor 10 kO thermistor 100 uA excitation 1 kO thermistor 2252 kO thermistor 10 kO the
122. B device with text files contained in a Macros folder Select a program from the list and its component instructions are displayed in the Progress window replacing whatever was previously in the window PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 57 SRS The Program Load button can be used to edit a previously saved program load the program then edit it in the Progress window and finally re save the program with the Save button To call a previously saved program as a subroutine from a program that you re composing don t use the Program Load button since it would erase the rest of the program Instead touch the Progress window and select the saved program from the list of commands The Program Load button cannot be pressed while a program is running in the current tab Save Saves the current program as shown in the Input window to memory You ll be asked to supply a name for the program Up to 15 programs can be saved If 15 programs are already saved the Save button will have no effect Saved programs can be run using the Load button or called as subroutines by touching a line in the Progress window Saved programs can also be called by sending their name like any other instruction over one of the remote interfaces Delete Touch this button to display a list of programs stored in memory Select a program from the list and it will be deleted from memory The Program Delete button does not affect the
123. BAV70LT1 ROHS BAV70LT1 ROHS MMBZ5232BLT1 SMBJ12CA SMBJ12CA SMBJ12CA SMBJ12CA RED RED RED RED 1206L020 1206L020 1206L020 1206L020 HCPL 2630 HCPL 2630 HCPL 2630 10 PIN DIL RT ANGLE RT ANGLE RT ANGLE RT ANGLE 96 PIN RT ANGLE 6611 TYPE 43 10UH 6611 TYPE 43 10UH 6611 TYPE 43 10UH PTC 300 15 0K 10 0K 10 0K 2 49K 10 0K 2 49K 10 0K 2 49K 10 0K SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20 Rad Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20 Rad Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20 Rad Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes LED T1 Package Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Diode Diode SMT Diode SMT Diode SMT Diode SMT LED T1 Package LED T1 Package LED T1 Package LED T1 Package Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrat
124. C U290 is a multiplexed ADC that can read eight single ended inputs four differential inputs or any combination of the two The current monitor voltage monitor and AD590 sensors are read as single ended inputs resistive temperature sensors are read as differential inputs The ADC s multiplexer is not connected directly to the ADC but is buffered by chopper stabilized op amps U280A and B An RC network RN281 RN282 and C251 makes it possible for the op amps to drive the large capacitors C282 C283 necessary for optimum ADC performance Even though the OPA3333s are unipolar they are design such that when equipped with pull down resistors R281 and R282 their output swing can extend below OV Voltage monitor measures the voltage across the voltage sense terminals The voltage measurement is used to determine whether or not a TEC device is connected and also for auto ranging Sensor excitation provides 10 100 or 1000 uA of current for reading RTDs or thermistors Op amp U420A provides a virtual ground for 2 5V reference U400 The voltage across the 2 5 kQ sense resistor R415 is set to 25 mV 250 mV or 2 5V by the resistor ladder R411 R414 Sensor input The sensor input circuit can read both the voltage and the current across the sensor to measure resistance the card s firmware divides the voltage by the current The voltage across the sensor is directly read by the ADC assembly The excitation current flows through reference resistor
125. C conversions byte write 2 byte read D107 Start End Cs Xx transaction transaction 73 J R W N Write Read 2nd byte has been read Byte is MRDY X ready w___ Ist byte has a been read Byte has 2nd byte SR x been read TL Ist byte K is ready is ready Parallel bus timing diagram For simplicity only a byte write and 2 byte read are shown but reads and writes generally transfer at least 3 bytes each SPI bus The SPI bus is used to reprogram the Atmel microcontrollers on the I O cards The card s Card Select CS line must be pulled low for its SPI bus to be active C20 SCK SPI Clock C21 MOSI Master out slave in C22 MISO Master in slave out UART Connected to the PTC10 s back panel RS 232 port The I O cards do not use and are not connected to the backplane UART A19 CTS Clear to Send A20 RTS Request to Send A21 RXD Receive Data A22 TXD Transmit Data Ases PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 143 PTC231 front panel The front panel connects to the same backplane bus as the I O cards An Atmel ATmegal 62 microcontroller on the front panel PCB detects touchscreen touches and button presses controls the system fan generates sounds and manages the LCD power supplies All sounds are generated by the Atmel microcontroller and output as an 8 bit 60 kHz PWM signal The speaker driver amplifies this signal providing 250 mW of power to drive the speak
126. C may have been damaged by excessive current or voltage Maximum TEC voltage The TEC driver has four voltage ranges 3 6 9 and 12V In general the lowest possible voltage range should be used besides potentially damaging the TEC the larger voltage ranges create excess heat inside the PTC chassis and cause the PTC s fan to run at high speed However when selecting a voltage range it s important to account for the resistance of the wires you ve used to connect the TEC This resistance can significantly reduce the voltage available to the TEC For example if the wires have a resistance of 0 5 ohms and a 5A current is flowing through them the wires will reduce the available voltage by 2 5V Therefore if the 3V range is selected the maximum voltage across the TEC will only be 0 5V If the TEC sense leads have been connected this is the maximum voltage that will appear in the Vout display To minimize such voltage losses heavy gauge wires should be used to connect the TEC Standard DB 15 cables in particular should not be used because their thin wires absorb most of the PT C440 s output power The Vmon channel has a voltage limit Vmax If the voltage at the TEC exceeds Vmax the PTC440 s output is shut off The output will remain disabled until it is set to zero using either the Output Enable key or the off button on the Channel Setup screen If the sense leads have been connected the lead resistance does not have to be taken into account
127. C320 input card and used as a low cost temperature sensor In this case a custom calibration must be used If the voltage PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 70 SRS across the diode is measured at two known temperatures the calibration coefficients can be calculated as follows B Ti T Vi V2 A Ti Vi B 273 15 C 0 where V is the voltage expressed in volts at temperature T expressed in C and V is the voltage at temperature T The resulting calibration is a linear approximation For greater accuracy a custom calibration table should be used instead of the A B C coefficients see page 32 Offset Gain The offset gain filter modifies the value of an input channel as follows output input gain offset where input is the input to the offset gain filter and output is the output of the filter This filter can be used as a simple way to adjust sensor calibrations The offset gain filter is applied after the sensor calibration and after the follow filter but before the other input filters difference lowpass and derivative Channel screen PID column This menu is only available for output channels In addition if no Input channel is selected all of the other PID buttons are grayed out Input The temperature sensor whose temperature the PID feedback loop regulates It s possible to use one temperature sensor as the input for more than one PID loop Mode If
128. CIO All RS 232 GPIB USB and Ethernet messages sent to the PTC10 must end with a linefeed decimal 10 hex 0x0a n The PTC10 will not process the message until the linefeed is received Instructions are not case sensitive The most recent value i e the value read at the most recent ADC conversion of a single channel can be queried by sending the name of the channel followed by a question mark 3A 29 9313 Omit any spaces from the channel s name for example to query the value of channel Out 1 send the command Out1 0 00000 The most recent value of all channels can be retrieved with a single getOutput instruction the question mark is optional in this case getOutput 0 000000 0 000000 29 98424 25 86019 27 49236 NaN 27 45483 NaN 268 9367 NaN NaN 0 000000 10 04576 10 04574 10 04572 NaN NaN NaN O0 O0 Sensors that are disconnected or out of range report a value of NaN not a number To determine the order of the channels in the getOutput response send the getOutputNames query getOutputNames Out 1 Out 2 3A 3B 3C 3D Cold J 3 4A 4B 4C 4D 5A 5B 5C 5D V1 V2 V3 DIO Relays PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 27 This order does not change unless I O cards are added removed or rearranged A third option for reading data is the getLog instruction which returns the latest data point written to the log By default a logged value is the average
129. Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 182 C314 C 316 C 360 C 361 C 362 C 364 C 410 C 420 D 111 D 200 D 202 D 204 D 206 D 314 D 315 D 361 D 362 D 401 D 403 D 421 D 422 D 423 D 424 15230 15240 18250 15260 jill J 200 J 400 JD121 K 401 K 402 K 403 K 404 PCI Q 411 Q 412 Q 413 Q 414 R112 R 311 R 312 R 313 R 314 R 361 R 362 12 11 112 113 12 200 20 202 23 232 25 252 410 41 412 42 300 x P e rA SRS 5 00381 552 5 00519 569 5 00513 569 5 00519 569 5 00628 569 5 00381 552 5 00299 568 5 00299 568 3 00576 311 3 01342 313 3 01342 313 3 01342 313 3 01342 313 3 00380 301 3 00926 360 3 00010 303 3 01303 313 3 00806 360 3 00806 360 3 0001 1 303 3 0001 1 303 3 0001 1 303 3 0001 1 303 3 01320 340 3 00446 340 3 01320 340 3 00446 340 1 00251 130 1 00371 160 1 01090 115 1 00234 109 3 01056 335 3 01056 335 3 01056 335 3 01056 335 7 01710 701 3 00601 360 3 00601 360 3 00601 360 3 00601 360 4 01466 461 4 01270 462 4 01210 462 4 01163 462 4 01009 462 4 01466 461 4 01455 461 4 01406 461 4 01707 463 4 0091 1 463 4 00910 463 4 01707 463 4 00916 463 4 00916 463 4 0091 1 463 4 00909 463 4 00909 463 4 00909 463 4 00909 463 4 01707 463 4 01707 463 4 00911 463 4 00908 463 6 00683 610 330P 33U T35 1U 16V A CASE 33U T35 22U 35V 330P 1U 1U RED MINI STZ5 6NT146 STZ5 6NT146 STZ
130. IC Y5V 1206 80 20 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 SMD Tantalum Y Case SMT Tantalum 16V A case 1206 but NEEDS POLARITY mark LED Subminiature 1 8mm T 3 4 Dual schottky diode series connection dual series switching diode low leakage dual series switching diode low leakage 1N5231B 5 1V 500mW DO 35 ZENER DIODE Dual Schottky Common Cathode Dual schottky diode series connection DB Female Right Angle 318 3 Row Right Angle Mount Ferrite Bead Common Mode SMD Type 44 3312 Ferrite Bead Common Mode SMD Type 44 3312 P channel Power MOSFET ultra low Ron P channel Power MOSFET ultra low Ron PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 178 SRS 3 00944 4 01466 4 01178 4 01406 4 01213 4 01213 4 01213 4 01146 4 01146 4 01178 4 01146 4 012 4 012 4 012 4 012 4 01146 4 012 4 01021 4 01050 4 01050 4 01117 4 01762 4 01213 4 01213 4 01213 4 01213 4 01205 4 01192
131. Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 404 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 501 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 502 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 503 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg D 504 3 01319 360 MMBD1503A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg IS610 3 01320 340 HCPL 2630 Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg ISe11 3 01320 340 HCPL 2630 Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg IS630 3 01320 340 HCPL 2630 Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg J111 1 00251 130 10 PIN DIL Connector Male j 200 1 01099 100 161417 Connector Misc j 300 1 01099 100 161417 Connector Misc j 400 1 01099 100 161417 Connector Misc Ass PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 167 J 500 JD121 L 651 L 652 L 661 L 662 L671 L672 PCI Q231 Q331 Q 431 Q 531 Q721 R112 R 200 R 230 R 291 R 292 R 300 R 330 R 391 R 392 R 400 R 430 R 491 R 492 R 500 R 530 R 591 R 592 R 681 R 682 11 112 113 12 20 202 203 29 292 30 302 303 39 392 40 402 403 49 492 50 502 503 59 592 610 612 630 632 10 20 230 COCOCU NDVI DI DIDINI W SRS 1 01099 100 1 00234 109 6 00174 630 6 00684 609 6 00174 630 6 00684 609 6 00174 630 6 00684 609 7 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 811 701 073 360 073 360 073 360 073 360 3 00601 360 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0
132. JU U JU 1U 16V A CASE 33U T35 22U 35V 330P JU 10U T35 1000P 1U 330P 33U T35 120U JU 1UF 0603 1UF 0603 2 2U T16 1UF 0603 1U 0 1UF 16V X7R 1U JU 1U 1U 16V A CASE SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Capacitor Misc SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Capacitor Misc SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Cerami
133. N R S T Thermocouple sensor type lt channel gt cal Type Custom Standard Channels with custom calibration tables Determines which calibration curve is used for a particular channel The available arguments depend on the value of the lt channel gt Sensor setting See the description of the Type button on page 68 for more information lt channel gt PID submenu All lt channel gt PID instructions only exist for output channels Attempting to apply a PID instruction to an input channel results in a not a valid instruction error By default each PID loop has no assigned input channel In this state the only PID instruction that can be issued is the PID input instruction If a macro attempts to change the setpoint the feedback gains etc a locked setting error is generated and the macro continues to run An error message is only printed if Verbose is set to High lt channel gt PID D derivative channel PID l integral lt channel gt PID P proportional These instructions set the PID gain factors The PID equation is Output Pe O 5IT eo ei e1 e ec t ea ea e D T e ea where P I and D are the derivative gains e is the error the difference between the setpoint and the PID input signal at time t and T is the ADC sampling time Thus larger values of P I or D PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 115 produce a faster fee
134. O card C111 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C112 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 113 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 121 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C122 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 123 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 124 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 200 5 00378 552 180P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C 201 5 00378 552 180P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C202 5 00378 552 180P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C 203 5 00378 552 180P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C 204 5 00378 552 180P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C 205 5 00378 552 180P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C 206 5 00378 552 180P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C 207 5 00378 552 180P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C210 5 00299 568 JdU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 220 5 00299 568 JdU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 230 5 00299 568 JU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 240 5 00299 568 JU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 250 5 00299 568 1U Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 260 5 00299 568 JU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C 310 5 00299 568 JdU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R C311 5 00319 569 10U T35 Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C312 5 00387 552 1000P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C 313 5 00299 568 JU
135. O cards include an Atmel ATmega microcontroller U110 The microcontroller has onboard flash and SRAM and is configured to use an external 16 MHz oscillator located on the PTC s backplane The microcontroller controls the ADCs or DACs on each I O card Each card has a status LED that mirrors the state of the backplane CONV signal toggling each time an ADC conversion occurs If the status LED does not blink while the PTC is running or does not blink at the same rate as the status LEDs on other I O cards the card has a hardware or software problem Each card is calibrated at the factory and the microcontroller s built in EEPROM holds the card s calibration data Input cards produce calibrated readings in the native units of the sensor for example the RTD card provides calibrated resistance readings while the thermocouple provides calibrated voltage readings The CPU card converts these readings to temperatures using calibration data for the particular sensor Output cards provide calibrated outputs in watts The microcontroller is interfaced to the backplane bus with a transceiver U120 An RS 232 port is available but is only used for debugging The backplane bus uses a proprietary synchronous communication protocol PTC320 I channel thermistor diode RTD reader SRS The card measures the resistance of thermistors and RTDs by passing an excitation current through both the sensor and a reference resistor in series with the sensor
136. Output Input Zero pt X Gain Therefore when the input is equal to the zero point the output is zero Errors Issuing zero point or gain instruction when the PID mode is set to On or Off produces an assembly time Unrecognized instruction error channel PID Input channel name gt Sets the PID input channel which is the temperature that the PID feedback loop controls If the channel name does not exist any previously selected input is deselected leaving no PID input selected and the PID feedback is disabled lt channel gt PID Zone I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Auto Sets the PID temperature zone A set of PID gains and a minimum temperature can be assigned to each of the eight locations If the zone is set to Auto the PID gains are automatically recalled based on the PID setpoint and the lt channel gt PID T min setting of each zone This feature known as zoned feedback is useful if the responsiveness of your system varies with the temperature In this case feedback stability can be improved by using different PID gains depending on the temperature All eight PID zones can be viewed as a table on the front panel see the description of the Zone button on page 72 If you don t already know the feedback parameters to be loaded into the table it s usually easier to use the front panel rather than remote commands to determine the correct parameters and load them into the table However if the feedback parameters are alr
137. PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 12 To further improve measurement stability the PTC330 can control the main enclosure fan to keep the card at a constant temperature see the manual entry for the Channel PCB control PTC420 AC output card The PTC420 AC output card has a solid state relay that delivers mains current to the heater It is intended for control of large heaters including heating mantles heating tape and heating blankets The relay is either on or off when on the full AC mains voltage appears on the output To vary the output power the PTC420 switches the relay on and then off once every 10 seconds by default with a variable duty cycle The card can deliver at most 5 A of current If the resistance of the heater is too small the card delivers more than its rated current and may be shut down by its internal protection circuitry In some cases the card may be damaged The minimum permissible heater resistance depends on the AC line voltage as shown in the table below The table also shows the maximum power that the card can deliver Line Min heater Max power at Max power Example voltage locations resistance min heater at heater v ohms resistance W resistance R W 100 Japan 20 500 10000 R 120 Canada US 24 600 14400 R 220 Russia 44 1100 48400 R 230 Europe 46 1150 52900 R 240 China Australia 48 1200 57600 R The total AC current delivered at any one time by the all the PTC420
138. Q range 1 kQ range 3 kQ range 10 kQ range 30 kO range 100 kO range 300 kO range 2 5 MO range Drift due to temperature 300 range 100 0 range 300 Q range 1 kQ range One input for 2 wire or 4 wire thermistor diode or RTD 6 pin 240 push pull DIN socket 0 30 100 3000 1 3 10 30 100 300 kQ 2 5 MQ 200 uA 100 pA 50 uA 30 pA 20 pA 10 pA 5 uA 3uA 2 uA 1 uA 0 025 Q 0 06 Q 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 6 0 1 30 40 100 2500 30 kQ 0 002 Q C 0 006 0 C 0 006 0 C 0 01 0 C PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller SRS Specifications 3 kQ range 0 03 Q C 10 kO range t0 1 Q C 30 kO range 0 15 Q C 100 kO range 0 5 Q C 300 kO range 3 Q C 2 5 MO range 2000 Q C RMS noise 30 Q range 0 003 Q 100 Q range 0 006 Q 300 Q range 0 0120 1 kQ range 0 02 Q 2 mK for 3000 thermistor at 25 C 3 kQ range 0 03Q 0 8 mK for 1 kQ thermistor at 25 C 10 kO range 0 060 0 6 mK for 22520 thermistor at 25 C 30 kO range 0 10 0 3 mK for 10 kO thermistor at 25 C 100 kO range 0 3 Q 0 2 mK for 30 kQ thermistor at 25 C 300 kO range 30 2 5 MQ range 250 Diodes Excitation current output 10 uA Initial accuracy t 100 ppm Drift 5 ppm C Voltage input 0 2 5 V Initial accuracy 10 pV 0 01 of reading Drift 5 ppm C RMS noise 1 5 uV RTDs Range 0 30 100 3000 1 3 10 30 100 250 kQ 2 5 MQ Excitation 30 Q range 5mA 100 Q range 2mA 300 Q range mA 1 kQ range 500 uA 3 kQ
139. RA 1002 120 PIN RT ANGL DIN FR47 FR47 FR47 FR47 FR47 FR47 FR47 PTC CPU 47K 0603 10K SMT 0603 22 4 7K SMT 0603 22 10 4 7K SMT 0603 4 7K SMT 0603 4 7K SMT 0603 47K 0603 4 7K SMT 0603 20 0K 2 49K 24 9K 4 7K SMT 0603 49 9 SMT 0603 49 9 SMT 0603 49 9 SMT 0603 49 9 SMT 0603 4 7K SMT 0603 330 1 0M 1 0M 0 0 Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Capacitor Electrolytic 16V 20 Rad Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Capacitor Electrolytic 16V 20 Rad Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO LED Subminiature LED Subminiature LED Subminiature LED Subminiature LED Subminiature LED Subminiature LED Subminiature LED Subminiature LED Subminiature LED T1 Package Diode SMT Diode SMT Header DIP Connector Male Connector Misc Connector D Sub Female Connector Misc Connector Male Socket THRU HOLE Connector USB Connector Male Ferrite bead SMT Ferrite bead SMT Ferrite bead SMT Ferrite bead SMT Ferrite bead SMT Ferrite bead SMT Ferrite bead SMT Printed Circuit Board SMT Resistor Misc Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Fi
140. Running macros Saved macros Front panel ports Port settings User settings All Resets one of the PTC10 s subsystems The options have the following effects Running macros stops all running macros Has no effect on saved macros Saved macros deletes all saved macros from local memory Does not delete macros from USB memory devices Has no effect on running macros Display Resets all System Display settings to their factory defaults Returns the front panel to the Select menu de selects all channels in all groups and erases locally stored log data data on USB drives is not affected Returns all plots to autoscaled X and Y with a 1 minute X range and changes the plot location of all channels to 1 If a TRG remote command was previously received re enables automatic A D conversions Hides the internal temperature display T PCB Ports Closes all I O ports and re opens them USB and Telnet connections will be lost The port settings baud rate IP address etc remain unchanged Port settings Resets all I O port settings to their factory defaults PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 107 Channels Resets the settings on the Channel menu for all channels to their factory defaults Also sets the A D rate to 100 ms Log Resets the default log rate to 1 second sets the log rate for each channel to the default and enables automatic logging to USB If a USB storage device is attached erases log files
141. SRS The PTC323 is a two channel multi range input card that can read a variety of temperature sensors It can read resistances between 1 Q and 2 5 MQ and can also read diode temperature sensors Standard calibration curves are included for the following sensors The Range column indicates the range of the standard calibration curve outside this range no reading appears for the sensor It may be possible to obtain a larger range by uploading a custom calibration curve nd Manufacturer DT ly Si410 0 450 Scientific Instruments Si430 0 400 Si440 0 500 DT 470 CY7 4 475 Diode LakeShore Omega DT 670 CY670 4 500 S700 5 475 Cryo Con S800 4 385 S900 5 500 RX 102A 0 050 40 LakeShore RX 103A 2 40 Ruthenium RX 202A 0 050 40 oxide Scientific Instruments RO600 1 0 300 R400 2 0 273 Cryo Con R500 0 050 20 IEC751 DIN43760 48 15 1173 15 RTD All US 48 15 1173 15 100 Q 193 15 373 15 300 Q 193 15 373 15 1000 Q 193 15 373 15 2252 Q 193 15 523 15 Measurement 3000 Q 193 15 523 15 Specialties 5000 Q 193 15 523 15 Thermistor di Yi 6000 Q 193 15 523 15 Omega 10000 Q type B 193 15 523 15 10000 Q type H 193 15 523 15 30 kQ 233 15 523 15 100 kQ 233 15 423 15 300 kQ 298 15 423 15 MQ 298 15 423 15 Other resistive and diode sensors can be used with the PTC320 but require custom calibration curves For
142. T1 Package LED T1 Package LED T1 Package LED T1 Package Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Diode Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Connector Male Connector Male PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 160 RN201 RN202 S 201 S 201A S 202 S 202A S 203 S 203A S 204 S 204A S 205 S 205A S 206 S 206A S 207 S 207A S 208 S 208A U 101 u 102 u 201 U 202 U 203 SRS 1 00559 100 1 00006 130 1 00363 130 1 00573 130 1 00515 130 1 00599 114 1 00 086 130 6 00519 609 7 0 3 00 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 713 701 629 329 466 461 909 465 909 465 431 461 288 462 213 462 510 461 510 461 467 461 355 462 551 461 524 461 414 461 575 461 527 461 479 461 503 461 495 461 503 461 406 461 517 461 500 461 503 461 606 409 471 461 471 461 4 00910 463 4 00905 463 4 00905 463 4 00905 463 4 01 4 01 4 01 707 463 618 463 707 463 2 00065 201 7 02 036 735 2 00065 201 7 02 036 735 2 00065 201 7 02 036 735 2 00065 201 7 02 036 735 2 00065 201 7 02 036 735 2 00065 201 7 02 036 735 2 00065 201 7 02 036 735 2 00065 201 7 02 3 01 3 01 3 01 037 735 497 360 498 360 215 360 3 0074 1 360 3 01 216 360 1 00MM FFC SMT 2 PIN DI 4 PIN 1 25MM X 14PIN
143. U T10 C 312 5 00522 569 47U T10 D111 3 00576 311 RED MINI D211 3 00403 301 1N459A D 212 3 01253 313 B270 13 D 214 3 00626 301 MUR1100E F221 6 00644 611 1A 60V J111 1 00251 130 10 PIN DIL J201 0 01097 035 571 0100 SRS Wire 22 UL1007 Connector Housing Receptacle Line Cord Fabricated Part SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Capacitor Electrolytic 80V 20 Capacitor Electrolytic 80V 20 Capacitor Electrolytic 80V 20 Capacitor Electrolytic 80V 20 Capacitor Electrolytic 80V 20 SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206
144. User Manual PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller RS Stanford Research Systems Version 3 290 June 25 2015 Certification Stanford Research Systems certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment Warranty This Stanford Research Systems product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment Service For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a Stanford Research Systems authorized service facility Contact Stanford Research Systems or an authorized representative before returning this product for repair Information in this document is subject to change without notice Copyright Stanford Research Systems Inc 2015 All rights reserved Stanford Research Systems Inc 1290 C Reamwood Avenue Sunnyvale California 94089 Phone 408 744 9040 Fax 408 744 9049 www thinkSRS com Printed in the U S A Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Contents Contents Safety and preparation for use Le eeeee eee esee esses eee esset een sse en stas tena asse sensa set enone v Specifications M vii Introduction l VO Cards EREE ATAPA E T T E E ETES 2 PTC320 thermistorZdiode ISXT D card 5 2 2 2 rer tror erra RE Rea 2 PTEC32I RID PAM Sr M MMC 5 PTC32
145. X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Capacitor Misc SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes LED Subminiature Diode Diode SMT Diode Fuse Connector Male Banana jack PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 175 J 202 0 01096 035 571 0500 Banana jack JD121 1 00234 109 96 PIN RT ANGLE DIN Connector Male L 201 6 00512 631 2744045447 Ferrite bead SMT L 202 6 00512 631 2744045447 Ferrite bead SMT L211 6 00645 609 330UH Inductor Fixed SMT L251 6 00236 631 FR47 Ferrite bead SMT PCI 7 01706 701 PTC DC OUTPUT Printed Circuit Board Q 233 3 01254 360 BSS123LT1 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Q 234 3 01254 360 BSS123LT1 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Q 235 3 01254 360 BSS123LT1 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Q 236 3 01254 360 BSS123LT1 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Q 251 3 01819 360 IRF6218PBF Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Q 252 3 01819 360 IRF6218PBF Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Q 253 3 01819 360 IRF6218PBF Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Q 254 3 01820 360 IRF9520NPBF Integrated Circuit Surfa
146. a macro or serial port without affecting the states of other relays use a bitwise operator for example the remote command relays 4 activates relay C while the remote command relays amp 11 deactivates relay C See the Remote programming section of this manual for more information on remote commands The eight TTL lines are located on a standard 25 pin D sub connector with the following pinout the pin numbers are usually printed next to the pins on D sub connectors Unconnected 14 Unconnected 2 DO 15 Unconnected 3 DI l6 Unconnected 4 D2 17 Unconnected 5 D3 18 Unconnected 6 D4 19 Gnd 7 DS 20 Gnd 8 D6 2 Gnd 9 D7 22 Gnd 10 5V 23 Gnd I 5V I2 Gnd 24 Gnd n 25 Gnd 13 Unconnected Since the digital I O lines are floating at least one gnd pin must be connected to the signal ground of whatever system the digital I O is interfaced with Alternatively if the digital I O lines are configured as inputs a 5V pin can be shorted to any of the inputs DO to D7 to pull them high or a end pin shorted to the inputs to pull them low The 5V pins are current limited with 4 7 kQ resistors and are not intended to power a remote system The status of the eight digital I O lines is reported on the PTC10 display as a single eight bit integer value Each I O line is assigned an integer value as shown in the following table PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 20 Bit Value DO
147. acro button on the System screen the macro name is the same as the text on the macro button If the name is too long for the button and has been truncated on screen the macro name is the full name the macro was defined under not the truncated name A macro can change its own name with the name instruction Use the kill list remote instruction to get the names of all currently running macros PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 88 Command syntax SRS instruction value instruction value instruction Most instructions must be followed by a numeric or text argument separated from the instruction by whitespace and or an optional equals sign Numeric values can be incremented using the operator There is no operator but the operator can be used with negative arguments Values that are selected from a list of possible arguments can also be incremented using the operator in which case an integer argument must be supplied that indicates how many places to advance in the list of possible arguments If the value is incremented past the end or beginning of the list it wraps back to the beginning or end of the list A question mark after the instruction queries the current value of a variable The result is sent to the remote interface and also appears on the Program screen if the program in question is selected on the tab bar Examples Out l value 5 Sets
148. ag is 30 s feedback is initially on and the system starts with the temperature stabilized at the 50 setpoint After the tuning has finished the feedback turns on and re stabilizes the system at 50 C after a few cycles of oscillation The relay tuner creates a temperature oscillation by switching the heater between two output values Outputhig Output Step Y 2 Outputio Output Step Y 2 where Output is the initial output and Step Y is the value specified in the Step Y control Note that the relay tuner cannot be started unless the output is greater than Step Y 2 For best results the output should be greater than Step Y The relay tuner begins by disabling the feedback if the feedback was on and measuring the drift and noise of the feedback input signal in the absence of any changes to the feedback output The drift and noise measurement continues for one third the amount of time specified with the Lag control the resulting drift and noise value is the difference between the largest and smallest input signal observed during this time After the drift and noise measurement the relay tuner sets the heater output to Output for the Lag time to start the oscillation If during this period the feedback input does not change by at least ten times the drift and noise value an error message is displayed in the Status window and tuning is PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 44 SRS cancelled If th
149. amic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 154 C 307 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 308 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 309 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 310 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 401 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 402 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 403 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 404 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 405 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 406 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 407 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 408 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 409 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C410 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C431 5 00334 569 1U T35 Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes C 441 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 442 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 443 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C444 5 00604 578 0 01UF 16V
150. ance that the autotuner applies to the output It should be large enough to increase the temperature by several degrees or significantly more than any noise or other temperature variations that would normally occur over several minutes If Step Y is too small the autotuner will produce inaccurate PID feedback parameters If Step Y is too large the tuning process will increase the temperature of your experiment to unacceptably high levels Step Y can be changed while autotuning is in progress but it doesn t take effect until the next time autotuning is started Lag Controls how long the autotuner waits before it first checks the response of the system to the output disturbance This time should be long enough for the temperature to rise noticeably after the output is increased by Step Y If Lag is too small the autotuner will mistake small noise spikes for the system s response to the output disturbance If Lag is much larger than it needs to be the autotuner will produce inaccurate results PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 74 System screen SRS If the Lag setting is changed while autotuning is in progress it doesn t have any effect until the next time autotuning is started Status Touch this button to display a text box with information on the progress of the autotuner Type Controls which PID tuning rules are used by the auto tuner The Cons conservative setting results in minimal overshoot id
151. and a Y buffer the log files for two different temperature sensors The software then determines the offset and gain of the X buffer relative to the Y buffer Check the Apply equation to X buffer box to multiply the X buffer by the gain factor and then add the offset Command line Opens a File Grapher command line window The commands described in the table below can be typed into the command line Sequences of commands can be stored as macros and then recalled either from the command line or the Special menu Align X axes Sets the X axis range of all graphs to be equal to the X axis range of the selected graph Add graph Adds another graph to the display When more than one graph is displayed you can select a graph by clicking on it Most operations only apply to the selected graph Overall plot size Changes the size of the entire plot window and all the graphs in the window Set as baseline When this option is selected the channel that is currently displayed becomes the baseline and is subtracted from all displayed data Selecting this option does not modify the data in any way just the way the data is displayed Clear baseline Disables the baseline feature This option is grayed out if no baseline is currently set Subtract average When selected each file s data is displayed with its average subtracted Selecting this option does not modify the data in any way just the way the data is displayed The process menu lets you m
152. and how quickly the temperature changes in response The step response tuner begins by disabling the feedback if the feedback was on and measuring the drift and noise of the feedback input in the absence of any changes to the output The drift and noise measurement takes one third the period specified with the Lag control the resulting drift and noise value is the difference between the largest and smallest input signal during this time Next the step response tuner increases the output by the value specified with the Step Y control The tuner then waits for the amount of time specified with the Lag control If during this period the feedback input does not change by at least ten times the drift and noise value an error message is displayed in the Status window and tuning is cancelled If this occurs either 1 ensure that the temperature is stable before starting the step response or 2 increase step Y or 3 if it looks like the temperature didn t have enough time to respond increase the Lag time The tuner continuously measures how quickly the feedback input changes i e the slope of the feedback input with respect to time Tuning ends once the lag period has passed and the most PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 45 recent slope is less than half the largest slope The tuner then calculates the maximum slope the lag time and the total response and uses these values to calculate the PID ga
153. anged to A heater current or V heater voltage Note that the low Imt and hi Imt settings are not automatically converted to the new units lt channel gt Value float If the indicated channel is an output lt channel gt value changes the channel s output value Regardless of whether the channel is an input or an output channel value returns the current value of the channel Attempting to set its value of an input channel produces a run time error PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 112 SRS Attempting to set the value of an output channel when outputs are disabled also produces a run time error Setting the value of an output channel under feedback control has no effect but no error is generated Examples Out l value 1 0 Sets channel Out 1 to output 1 watt of power Note that the instruction has to be enclosed in quotes because the channel name has a space in it The argument is not included in the quotes 2A value Queries the output of channel 2A The response is 37 4722 if System Com Verbose is set to Low or Medium or 2A value 37 4722 if System Com Verbose is set to High If sensor 2A is not connected or is out of the range of its calibration data the reported value is NaN not a number For input channels and measured output channels the current value reported by the PTC10 is the most recent ADC reading after being calibrated and filtered
154. angular LED Rectangular LED Rectangular LED Rectangular Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Header DIP Header DIP Header DIP Header DIP Header DIP PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 158 J 106 1 00166 130 60 PIN DIL Connector Male J150 1 00485 165 9 PIN VERTICAL Connector D Sub Female J160 1 00086 130 3 PIN SI Connector Male J201 1 00111 116 6 PIN WHITE Header Amp MTA 156 J 203 1 00006 130 2 PIN DI Connector Male J211 1 00006 130 2 PIN DI Connector Male J241 1 00006 130 2 PIN DI Connector Male J251 1 00006 130 2 PIN DI Connector Male JD100 00235 108 96 PIN VERTICAL DIN Connector Female JD101 00235 108 96 PIN VERTICAL DIN Connector Female JD102 00235 108 96 PIN VERTICAL DIN Connector Female JD103 00235 108 96 PIN VERTICAL DIN Connector Female JD104 00235 108 96 PIN VERTICAL DIN Connector Female JD105 00235 108 96 PIN VERTICAL DIN Connector Female JD107 00237 108 120 PIN VERTICA DIN Connector Female JP203 00087 131 2 PIN JUMPER Connector Female L 241 6 0069 1 600 22UH SMT Misc Components L251 6 0069 1 600 22UH SMT Misc Components PCI 7 01712 701 PTC BACKPLANE Printed Circuit Board Q 211 3 0028 3 340 IRF530 IRF532 Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Q 212 3 0028 3 340 IRF530 IRF532 Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg R 111 4 01495 461 4 7K Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 1
155. aph to the display specify height option b put new graph below current graph add constant buffer buffer constant align the start times of all buffers draws an annotation in the corner of the graph specified with annotationPosition sets the position of the annotation to top left bottom center etc set antialiasing on or off off by default sets automatic X and Y axis scaling on or off on by default set the number of X and Y grid lines break buffer at marks positive negative marks only clear the plot then plot the indicated n buffers clears the indicated mark use drawMarks to see mark numbers clears all stored marks remove all buffers from the plot make a copy of a buffer crop sourceBuffer to the time segment currently visible on the plot set the current directory divide one buffer by another buffer buffer buffer2 divide a buffer by its average divide by constant buffer buffer constant draws a vertical red line on the plot at the location of each stored mark set the size of the font used to label the graph axes hide tick marks subtract the average slope from a buffer set the width of the plot option p grid g and or axis a lines in pixels load a file into a new buffer specify a name for the buffer and the name of the file to load lowpass filter a buffer specify the time constant in seconds stores marks that indicate when the specified buffer enters a level plus or minus a tolerance
156. aseline figure the tuning process fails Otherwise the tuner continues the tuning process If the tuning process fails Step Y or Lag may need to be increased or you may need to ensure that the temperature is more stable before tuning In any event you ll need to wait for the temperature to re stabilize before trying to tune again While the tuner is running you can press the Plot button to see a graph of heater output and temperature Press the Plot button several times until the traces appear on two separate graphs To show the status message again press the Channel key and under Tune touch the Status button When tuning is finished the PID feedback is automatically enabled If the temperature is below the setpoint the PTC10 starts increasing power to the heater The temperature may overshoot the setpoint but should eventually settle down to the setpoint Since the optimum PID parameters usually vary with temperature if you tuned at ambient temperature it may be helpful to re tune once the setpoint has been reached PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 32 Acquiring and logging data Input filters The PTC10 offers several numeric filters that can be used to modify raw sensor readings Except for the sensor calibration the filters are disabled by default and can be enabled by the user In the order in which they are applied the filters are Sensor calibration converts sensor reading in ohms volt
157. assuming that channel 3A exists The virtual channel now echoes the value of channel 3A Next select Diff and then touch the button for channel 3B The value of the virtual channel is now the difference between channels 3A and 3B Sensor input channels only Selects the sensor type The button only appears on input channels that support more than one sensor type The list of available sensor types varies with the I O card Changing the sensor type has three effects First it changes the calibration curve that the PTC10 uses to convert raw sensor readings into temperature Second changing the sensor type may affect how the PTC hardware acquires data from the sensor For example if the sensor type of a PTC320 I O card is changed from Thermistor to Diode the PTC acquires voltage instead of resistance readings Finally changing the sensor type affects which buttons appear in the Channel Cal column as well as the list of options that the Channel Cal Type button offers For example if the sensor type is RTD the Channel Cal Type button offers a list of standard RTD types and the RTD s Callendar van Dusen coefficients appear in the Channel Cal column If the sensor type is Therm thermistor the Channel Cal Type button offers a list of standard thermistor types and the thermistor s Steinhart Hart coefficients appear in the Channel Cal column PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 66 ROX indicates a
158. ata points can be cumbersome to display and often cannot be imported into application programs The resample feature is useful for reducing the number of data points in the output file In addition different PTC channels can be logged at different time intervals and it s often useful to resample the data so that data points appear at the same interval for all channels Resample period seconds If the Resample control is checked the Resample period field controls how many seconds each line of data in the output file represents If the Resample control is not checked the Resample period field has no effect Start Press the Start button to begin the conversion Close Press the Close button to save all settings and close PTCFileConverter Clicking the X button in the upper right corner of the window closes the program without saving any settings PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 130 FileGrapher File menu Edit menu SRS FileGrapher is a Windows utility that plots PTC log files To plot a file either drag a PTC log file onto the File Grapher icon or double click the FileGrapher icon and then select Open from the File menu Once the file has been plotted a file selection window appears that shows all of the PTC files in the same directory as the plotted file Click on a file in the file selection window to plot it Shift click or Control click to plot two or more files at
159. ate for the RS 232 interface The interface always has no parity 8 bits and 1 stop bit system com verbose Low Medium High Affects how the system replies when a remote instruction is processed In the Low setting which is intended to be compatible with GPIB communication standards only successful queries generate a reply The Medium setting also sends a message whenever an error occurs and the High setting also sends a message whenever an instruction sets a parameter In addition the High setting echoes back the name of the parameter that was set or queried Response to instruction Verbose level 2A Xyz 2A 37 47 Low 37 4722 none none Medium 37 4722 Error xyz is not a valid instruction none High 2A Value 37 4722 Error xyz is not a valid instruction 2A Value 37 47 System IP submenu system IP Address lt string gt Sets the PTC10 s IP address The IP address should be in dotted decimal notation i e 172 16 0 0 Errors If part of the specified IP address is not in the correct format i e contains a non numeric character or a value that is not between 0 and 255 that portion of the IP address is set to zero The IP address cannot be changed if system IP DHCP is set to on system IP DHCP On Off Enables or disables the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol If DHCP is enabled and a DHCP server is available on your network the IP address subnet and gateway are automatically
160. ated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 320 3 00663 360 74HCO8 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 340 3 00907 360 LM324A Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Z0 1 00087 131 2 PIN JUMPER Connector Female PTC240 GPIB option C111 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C112 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 113 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C114 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C121 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 122 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 123 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 124 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 131 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 132 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 133 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 134 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 135 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 136 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 137 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 138 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 139 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 140 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C150 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 161 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C162
161. ating your own sensor and the calibration points are separated by less than 50 C it s usually easier and more accurate to load the calibration in the form of a calibration table instead of calculating the Callendar van Dusen coefficients Thermistors If the sensor is a thermistor and the calibration type is set to custom the A B and C settings are the Steinhart Hart coefficients The temperature T expressed in K is calculated from the thermistor resistance R in ohms using the following equation T A BIn R C In R If a standard thermistor calibration is selected the A B and C controls show best fit coefficients for whichever curve is selected These figures are approximations only and are not actually used to calculate the temperature unless the calibration type is changed to Custom Diodes If the sensor is a diode and the calibration type is set to custom the A B and C settings are a polynomial fit to the diode calibration curve T A BV CV where T is the temperature in Kelvins and V is the voltage across the diode in volts Note that polynomial fits are only accurate within a limited temperature range If a standard diode calibration is selected the A B and C controls show best fit coefficients for whichever curve is selected These figures are approximations only and may not produce the same results as the standard calibration curve A standard diode or bipolar junction transistor can be connected to the PT
162. be used to start and stop USB logging Touch the triangle to turn USB logging off equivalent to pressing the System Log Log To button and selecting RAM When the system is not logging to USB touch the grayed out triangle to turn USB logging on If a USB memory device is present but not functioning i e if the device is full not formatted or defective the triangle will remain grayed out and not turn white Removing the USB memory device or powering down the PTC10 without first ejecting the device causes loss of data and corruption of the memory device A corrupted device should be repaired by plugging it into a PC and running a program such as chkdsk Windows or fsck Linux The Help key displays a popup screen that provides more information about whichever window is currently visible For example to get a description of the Value setting in the Channel menu first touch the Channel key to bring up the Channel screen then touch the Value button to bring up the Value input window and then press the Help key The Help key does not work with pop up windows that just display text and don t provide any opportunity for changing a value like the Output Enable window that appears when you press the Output Enable key Output Enable key SRS When the PTC is turned on all outputs are disabled however inputs function normally This safety feature gives you a chance to adjust the PTC
163. being delivered the voltage range and the voltage drop across the heater For the PTC320 thermistor diode RTD reader PTC321 RTD reader and PTC330 thermocouple reader the requested fan speed depends on the card s internal temperature and the temperature specified with the Channel PCB control If the card temperature is below its Channel PCB setting the card doesn t request any cooling and its temperature is unregulated Since the default PCB setting is 30 C the temperature is normally regulated only if the PTC10 gets unusually warm To improve the thermal stability of the input cards the Channel PCB setting of one card can be reduced to a value just below its normal temperature such that the fan is always running and the card s temperature is continuously kept at the Channel PCB value However if the PTC10 outputs a large heater current the fan speed increases to keep the output card cool and the temperature of the input cards may fall out of regulation Manual fan control If the PTC10 s fan produces unacceptable vibration or noise the fan speed can be manually set by changing the System Other Fan control to a value other than auto In this case the fan speed requested by the I O cards is ignored If the fan is turned off completely the user must ensure that the temperature inside the PTC10 does not exceed 35 C or damage to the PTC10 may occur In addition temperature inputs may not be accurate at elevated temperatures The PTC430 DC ou
164. ble While the PTC10 is running you can unplug the USB device use a PC to edit a program stored on the device plug the USB device back into the PTC10 and run the new version of the program To ensure that the PTC10 runs the new version of the program use the Program screen s Load button to re load the program Programs that are prepared as files can contain up to 4096 characters and may include multiple lines and comments an apostrophe i e a single quote mark indicates that the rest of the line is a PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 58 comment Except for the first newline after a comment all whitespace is ignored each line can be empty or can contain one or more instructions Preparing programs from the front panel Simple programs such as a series of temperature ramps can be entered from the front panel To enter a program from the front panel press the program button and then touch the Progress window A list of available top level commands appears Command program IEEE488 while system else channel Any button with a name ending in a dot brings up a sub menu when pressed For example the commands to change the feedback setpoint or alarm limits for a channel are accessed by first touching the channel button Touch the left square bracket the button in the upper left corner Square brackets surround blocks of code to be repeated You re returned to the Program screen
165. bration or if the calibration couldn t be read a description of the problem The PTC10 has three virtual channels with the default names V1 V2 and V3 These channels are not directly connected to a physical input or output Instead they can be used to mirror another channel or a macro can assign them a value A custom calibration table offset gain factors difference filter lowpass and or derivative filter can be applied to the mirrored data Virtual channels can have alarms or PID feedback loops their value can be graphed and saved to a log One use of virtual channels is to allow different sets of filters to be applied to a single channel A virtual channel can be used for example to show the derivative of channel 3A with respect to time By using a virtual channel to perform this function instead of just enabling channel 3A s d dt filter the raw data is preserved and can be viewed alongside the derivative PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 35 Since a virtual channel s value can be set by a macro the channel can be used to reveal internal PTC parameters that cannot otherwise be graphed or saved to the log For example a virtual channel can be made to mirror a feedback setpoint The channel can also display the results of a calculation such as the value of channel 3A divided by the value of channel 3B Logging data to USB The most recent 4096 data points from each channel are stored in internal RAM At the
166. c 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Capacitor Chip SMT 1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Capacitor Electrolytic 35V 20 Rad Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller C 761 C 762 C 770 C77 C772 C 773 C774 C 775 C 780 D 11 D 20 D 202 D 26 D 262 D 30 D 302 D 36 D 362 D 40 D 402 D 46 D 462 D 50 D 502 D 56 D 562 D 614 D 615 15230 15240 15330 15340 18430 15440 18530 15540 19730 15740 jill J 201 J 301 J 401 J 501 JD121 L621 L 622 L 761 L 762 PCI Q 780 R 112 R 201 R 202 R 261 R 262 R 301 R 302 R 361 R 362 R 401 R 402 R 461 R 462 R 501 SRS 5 00519 569 5 00035 521 5 00601 578 5 00654 50
167. cally sample every 100 milliseconds TST Self test Returns a numeric error code that indicates whether data has been dropped and whether ADC conversions are occurring at the correct rate First two digits number of read misses or 30 whichever is smaller Third digit the lowest numbered slot from which data was dropped zero if no data has been dropped Fourth and fifth digits ADC conversion rate 00 10096 of the expected value as set by System Other A D rate 01 101 of expected 99 99 etc A value of 99 or 101 is usually not a problem and indicates that the line frequency is not exactly 50 or 60 Hz or that the PTC s clock is running slightly slow or fast A value significantly different from PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 100 100 may indicate a problem with the circuit that synchronizes the ADC conversions to the AC line frequency The first 3 digits are cleared each time TST is issued For example 13400 would indicate 13 read misses on slot 4 since the last time TST was issued and that the system clock is operating normally WAI Wait to Continue Pauses the parent macro until other macros started by the port that received the parent macro all PID tuning processes regardless of how they were started and all setpoint ramps have finished Identical to the OPC command but doesn t provide any explicit indication to the I O port when the wait is complete Program subm
168. cally throughout the table that is it must consistently increase or decrease throughout the entire file The value cannot change direction and the file cannot contain two displayed values that are the same Likewise the measured value must also increase or decrease monotonically However the displayed and measured values can go in opposite directions The calibration data must cover the entire expected range of measurements which in the example above is 0 to 100 C When readings fall outside the range of the calibration file no data appears on the display and any PID feedback loops that use the affected channel are frozen The order of the data points can be reversed measured value first displayed value second by adding a tilde to the beginning of the file The tilde must be the first character in the file appearing before the units declaration and any other header information Errors in calibration tables If the calibration file can t be read no readings appear for the affected channel This condition occurs if the file has any values after the header with no numeric characters if the values are not monotonically increasing or decreasing or if the file ends with a temperature value If a channel is renamed the calibration file also has to be renamed or the custom calibration will no longer be read the next time the PTC10 is turned on Press the Channel Cal Details button to see the first and last three data points in the custom cali
169. ce Mount Pkg R 112 4 01466 461 300 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 201 4 01406 461 0 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 202 4 01406 461 0 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 203 4 01406 461 0 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 204 4 01406 461 0 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 205 4 01406 461 0 Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor R 206 4 01186 462 5 23K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 207 4 01309 462 100K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 208 4 00436 409 d Resistor Wire Wound R211 4 01147 462 2 05K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 212 4 01292 462 66 5K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 213 4 01134 462 1 50K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 231 4 01173 462 3 83K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 232 4 01155 462 2 49K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 233 4 01117 462 1 00K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 234 4 01146 462 2 00K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 235 4 01173 462 3 83K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 236 4 01155 462 2 49K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 237 4 01117 462 1 00K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 238 4 01146 462 2 00K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 239 4 01173 462 3 83K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 240 4 01155 462 2 49K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R241 4 01117 462 1 00K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R242 4 01146 462 2 00K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 243 4 01173 462 3 83K Thin F
170. ch is high while the ADC is performing a conversion is also connected to the microcontroller through an optoisolator this signal tells the microcontroller when an ADC conversion is complete and without it the microcontroller freezes up PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 151 PTC520 digital I O card SRS The PTC s eight digital I O DIO lines can be user configured to serve as inputs or outputs All eight lines must have the same direction The DIO lines are presented on a 25 pin D connector J200 Resistors RN200 and RN201 terminate the lines Capacitors C200 C207 provide ESD protection while D200 D202 D204 and D206 provide overvoltage protection The parallel to SPI converter U210 reads the inputs while the SPI to parallel converter U220 produces the outputs When DOUT EN is high the outputs of U210 are placed into a high impedance state and the DIO lines serve as inputs When DOUT EN is low U210 is enabled and the DIO lines serve as outputs Since the digital I O lines are optically isolated and have a floating ground U210 and U220 are powered by an isolated 5V power supply The DIO card also includes four non latching relays K401 K404 Each relay is double throw Pins 2 3 and 4 serve as a monitoring relay If the monitoring relay fails to switch as expected XOR gates U410 notify the microcontroller by pulling one of OUTIMON OUT2MON etc high PTCIO Programmable Temperature Contr
171. change of the TEC driver output The rate must be between 0 and 1000 amps per second and the default value is 100 amps per second which corresponds to an unlimited slew rate at 10 samples second Each time the TEC current is set either by a PID feedback loop or with the Channel value control it ramps to the new value at this slew rate Rapid changes in the TEC current can create electromagnetic interference EMI in the temperature sensor and any other sensors near the TEC The resulting spikes in the temperature reading can cause feedback oscillations or noisy temperature readings For the slew rate setting to be effective the A D rate set with the System Other A D rate control should less than or equal to 100 ms The slew rate is implemented with a software algorithm that runs at each A D conversion and the TEC driver output has a 13 Hz lowpass filter If the A D rate is set for example to 1000 ms the algorithm only changes the TEC output current once each second and the output current therefore changes in discrete steps each of which may exceed the desired slew rate When the A D rate is smaller than 100 ms the lowpass filter smooths the steps into a continuous ramp When outputs are disabled by pressing the Output Enable button or with the OutputEnable off remote command the TEC output turns off immediately regardless of the slew rate setting When outputs are re enabled the TEC output ramps up to its previous value at the desired
172. ck Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip Network DIP Isolated Network DIP Isolated Network DIP Isolated Network DIP Isolated Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny 1 16W 5 Tiny 1 16W 5 Tiny LT1027C Precision 5 V Reference SO 8 74HC08 Quad 2 Input AND Gate 8 Bit Serial Input Parallel Output Shift Register 8 Bit Serial Input Parallel Output Shift Register High precision 10 volt reference Analog mux 8 to 1 15V okay TTL compat LT1027C Precision 5 V Reference SO 8 FET input dual opamp 4 MHz GBW PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 165 Uu680 3 01945 INA121UA Z1 0 00306 4 40X3 16PP Z2 0 00306 4 40X3 16PP Z3 7 02096 PTC320 FLANGE PTC321 4 channel RTD reader C11 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C112 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C113 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C12 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C122 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 123 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 124 5 00
173. ck on again while the PC application is running the application must be closed and re opened before it can communicate with the PTC10 This is a limitation of Windows that applies to all CDC devices When using LabView ensure that the National Instruments VISA driver is version 4 0 or later Older versions of the driver cannot communicate with the PTC10 The latest version can be downloaded for free from the National Instruments website Usbser sys has been reported to cause Windows to crash if ReadFile is called with a timeout value that is too small The crashes are especially common when more than one CDC device is in use USB host port Macros can be imported from a USB mass storage device such as a hard drive or flash key The macros should be saved as text files with names ending with txt and should be copied to a folder named macros in the root directory of the USB device When the device is plugged into the PTC10 buttons with the names of the text files appear on the System screen A file can then be run by touching the button with the corresponding file name In addition one macro can be saved in the root directory of the USB device under the name autorun txt The autorun txt macro automatically runs each time the USB device is plugged into the PTC10 The USB storage device should have a FAT16 or preferably a FAT32 format The number of extraneous files should be kept to a minimum since a directory structure with lar
174. cuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Thick Film 5 6 200 ppm Chip Resistor Resistor Misc Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Resistor Misc Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Resistor Misc Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Resistor Misc Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resisto
175. d 6 are occupied by general purpose analog and digital I O cards included as standard equipment Replacing I O cards Cards can be added removed or rearranged by the user No firmware setup is needed the system automatically recognizes the new cards and configures the front panel controls appropriately For most purposes the six slots are identical and cards do not need to be arranged in any particular order However the lower numbered slots are preferred for output cards because these slots get the most cooling from the fan In addition alarms can only activate relays on a digital I O card if the card is installed in slot 6 Some channel specific settings PID feedback parameters alarm settings sensor type custom calibration data and filter settings may be lost when I O cards are replaced or rearranged However each card s factory calibration is stored on the card and is not lost To add or replace an I O card Unplug the PTC10 from the wall otherwise even if the instrument is switched off live line voltage could be present Removing and installing I O cards while the power is turned on may permanently damage the instrument N Remove the PTC10 s top cover by unscrewing the four large Philips head screws on the sides of the cover and lifting the cover straight up o2 Remove the two flathead Phillips screws immediately to the right of the card s slot on the back panel P Remove the I O card by pulling
176. d as an argument to another instruction the argument must only contain the lt variable gt query and cannot include any other text or variables The PTC10 s digital I O card offers three virtual channels that behave like variables but with some important differences While a variable is private to the macro that defined it the value of a virtual channel can be accessed by any macro The value of a virtual channel also persists after the macro ends Also the value of a virtual channel is only updated when an ADC conversion occurs but the value of a variable is updated without any lag when an instruction changes its value Finally virtual channels can be plotted on screen and logged to USB while variables cannot except by assigning their value to a virtual channel lt instruction gt A single instruction query with no arguments if preceded by a pound sign can be substituted for any numeric argument The instruction cannot contain quotes parentheses or spaces For example Outl PID setpoint Out2 PID setpoint sets Out 1 s feedback setpoint equal to Out 2 s setpoint The PTC10 automatically appends a question mark to the argument resulting in the query Out2 PID setpoint and evaluates the resulting instruction at run time list Prints a comma separated list of macro variables that have been defined within the parent macro abort Stops the macro This instruction only affects its parent macro Use the
177. d for more than 100 log points in which case no data points are logged while the sensor is unplugged By default log files are given the name of the channel followed by the extension ptc i e ChannelName ptc If the file has more than 256 records or the file size reaches 2 GB the file is closed and a new log file with a numeric extension ChannelName 000 ChannelName 001 etc is created The highest allowed numeric extension is 999 A description of the file format follows All values are little endian Ases PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 37 File header Bytes 0 3 Format identifier 4 ASCII bytes PTCO equivalent to the 4 byte unsigned integer 0x50544330 Bytes 4 7 File format version number The version number is always 1 Any other number indicates that the format differs from this description 4 byte unsigned integer Bytes 8 11 Location of first record in bytes from the beginning of the file The file format allows additional information in ASCII format to be included in the space between the file header and the first record Currently no additional information is included 4 byte unsigned integer Must be at least 12 and is normally 12 Record Bytes 0 3 number of data points in this record if 1 this is the last record and the number of data points is equal to the number of bytes following this record header divided by four 4 byte signed integer Bytes 4 11 the time
178. d or PTC440 TEC driver is being used the fan should generally be set to Max or Auto otherwise the card may overheat and be permanently damaged The accuracy of temperature measurements may be reduced if the fan is disabled Volume Sets the speaker volume The volume affects all sounds played including alarms Time The system time Changing the time does not affect time stamps on previously acquired data points Therefore if the time is advanced by one hour a one hour gap appears in the plot Conversely if the time is set back by one hour any data taken over the last hour is no longer plotted and newly acquired data appears in its place The data is not actually erased from the USB log it just doesn t appear on the plot Date The system date Changing the date can affect the display of previously acquired data see the Time entry above About Displays a text box with information about the firmware version and installed I O cards PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 79 Reset Resets one of the following Running macros stops all running macros Has no effect on saved macros Saved macros deletes all saved macros from local memory Does not delete macros from USB memory devices Has no effect on running macros Display Resets all settings in the System screen s Display column to their factory defaults Returns the front panel to the Select menu de selects all channels in all groups and erases locall
179. d run time errors SRS If the PTC is unable to receive a macro due to an I O port RS 232 USB GPIB or Ethernet problem a communication error is generated and the macro does not run Once the macro is received the PTC assembles the macro During this process the PTC analyzes the text to ensure the following Fach instruction is valid The arguments for each instruction are valid for example if the instruction takes an integer value the argument must be an integer if the instruction has a list of acceptable values the argument must be one of those values Numeric values are not tested to see if they fall within acceptable limits since those limits may change as the macro runs If the macro fails these tests an assembly error is reported and none of the macro s instructions are executed If the System COM Verbose setting is Medium or High the error is reported by sending an I O port message that begins with the word Error If the Verbose setting is Low a message is placed on the error queue and can be retrieved with the geterror instruction During assembly calls to other macros are replaced with the text of the macros The called macros are also analyzed for syntax errors No instructions are executed until the macro is successfully assembled At this point the assembled macro is displayed on the Program screen and the macro starts to run As each instruction is executed several different kinds of run time e
180. d under the indicated name the old macro is overwritten If a file name conflicts with the name of a built in instruction the macro takes precedence if the command is issued with a capitalized first letter the built in instruction takes precedence if the command is issued with a lower case first letter A single macro cannot both define a macro and call it because submacro calls are expanded before the parent macro runs Example define Hello print Hello world pause 1 second 3 The macro Hello can now be run by issuing the remote command Ases PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 101 SRS Hello Errors If the macro name is longer than 32 characters it is truncated to 32 characters If the macro content is longer than 256 characters it is truncated to 256 characters The define instruction does not check the contents of the macro for syntax errors delete name delete all Deletes a saved macro Delete all deletes all locally saved macros but does not delete macros stored on attached USB devices Deleting a macro has no effect on currently running macros geterror If verbose mode is set to Low error messages generated by remote commands are not transmitted over the remote interface Instead they are stored in an error buffer that can hold up to 20 messages Each I O port USB RS 232 etc has its own error buffer The geterror instruction returns the oldest message stor
181. dback response Increasing P or I tends to create oscillations while increasing D reduces oscillations but adds noise Negative values of P I and D should be used if the output drives a fan or other device that cools the sample Errors Attempting to set P I or D when no PID input channel is selected produces a run time locked parameter error Attempting to set I or D when the PID mode is set to Follow also produces a run time locked parameter error Issuing a P instruction when the PID mode is set to Follow produces an assembly time Unrecognized instruction error lt channel gt PID Ffwd channel name Selects a feedforward input channel If a valid channel is selected and the PID mode is set to on the value the value of the feedforward channel is added to the PID output at each ADC conversion To disable this feature issue the channel ffwd instruction with an empty argument This feature can be used to implement feedforward control The feedforward input should be some quantity with a known and predictable effect on the feedback system The feedforward channel s cal offset and cal gain controls can be used to scale the feedforward effect lt channel gt PID Gain gain lt channel gt PID Zero pt zero point These instructions are only available when the PID mode is set to Follow They are used to adjust the offset and gain applied to the input In follow mode the output is determined as follows
182. despite the fact that the heater response is smaller and the temperature rise slower By reducing the proportional feedback response we ve forced the integral feedback to take more responsibility for raising the heater power and as the next figure illustrates the integral feedback has a greater tendency to overshoot and oscillate Integral as with proportional gain increasing the integral gain 7 also results in a larger heater response but integral feedback doesn t respond as quickly Integral feedback is slow because it works by adjusting its previous output rather than re calculating its output from scratch at each feedback cycle Therefore integral feedback has a tendency to overshoot the setpoint and cause oscillations When I is reduced to 0 001 W C s the temperature at first responds quickly due to the action of the proportional feedback However close inspection see the lowest trace in the bottom graph reveals that the temperature doesn t actually reach the 70 setpoint within the time period shown Without enough integral gain temperature errors tend to persist As an approximate guide the integral gain should be about one tenth the proportional gain PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 42 15 z 5 10 a S oO eo 5 75 9 9 70 E S 2 0 04 W C s 2 e 0 02 W C s 9 I 0 01 W C s 120 001 W C s 71 0 Oo 9 705 o 2 S 70 0 o a E 695 0 1 2 3 4
183. dless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Transformer Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Int
184. drive appears and then disappears Press the System key on the PTC10 s front panel If you don t have too many other macros defined there should be buttons labeled U1 U2 etc in the leftmost column Press button U1 to update the firmware of the I O card in slot 1 U2 for slot 2 etc While the firmware is updating the front panel LCD and fan turn off After about 15 seconds power is restored to the front panel and a status message is displayed on screen At this point the new firmware is already running however after all firmware updates are complete the PTC10 should be turned off and back on again to ensure that the I O card is properly initialized PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 8l Replacing the memory backup battery The PTC10 has a CR2032 battery that is responsible for keeping the following information in memory Time and date Most user settings User macros that have been saved with the define instruction or with the Save button in the Program window The instrument s serial number If the battery fails these settings will be lost each time the PTC10 is switched off Factory calibration data is stored in EEPROM and is not affected by loss of the CR2032 battery voltage The battery can be replaced as follows A Unplug the PTC10 from the wall This is important since otherwise live AC voltage may be present inside the chassis even if the PTC10
185. e Temperature Controller Operation 25 Set the data logging rate By default the PTC10 records one data point per second to each channel s log To change this rate press the System key on the front panel Under the Log column touch the Interval button and select from the list of available options The log interval only affects how often data is recorded it does not affect PID feedback performance It is also possible to assign a different log interval to each channel see the description of the Channel Logging control on page 62 Save data to and retrieve data from a USB memory device If there s no USB memory device plugged into it the PTC10 only stores the most recent 4096 data points for each channel and the data is lost if the PTC10 is turned off A USB memory stick can be used to keep a permanent record of logged data Save data to a USB device 1 Plug the USB memory stick into the port on the back of the instrument 2 Wait about 5 seconds until the message Please wait while the USB drive is opened appears on screen The message stays on screen for several seconds while the log files are opened then the message disappears 3 Look for a small grayed out triangle in the upper right corner of the screen This is the USB logging indicator Touch the triangle When the triangle turns white which can take a few seconds the PTC10 is saving data to the USB device 4 Before turning the instrument off or removing
186. e between log points is shorter than the time between A D samples each A D reading is recorded more than once in the log The plot screen always displays logged data Therefore a slow log rate reduces the noise visible in the graphs and may produce a stairstep appearance while a fast log rate produces graphs with more detail Format of PTCIO log files The PTC10 s log files use a binary data format The PTCFileConverter program available for download from the SRS website can convert the binary files to various text formats readable by other programs Each log file stores data for one channel and consists of a header followed by one or more records Each record contains a record header followed by zero or more floating point data values The floating point values within a record are evenly spaced in time and are expressed in the same units as on the PTC s front panel display Not a number values 0x7fc00000 if interpreted as an integer are recorded if the sensor is out of range or if the sensor or heater is unplugged for less than 100 log points If the sensor or heater is unplugged for more than 100 data points no values are recorded and a new record is created when the sensor or heater is plugged in A new record is created under the following conditions When the PTC10 starts logging to the USB device When the logging interval is changed When the system time is set When a sensor or heater is plugged in after being unplugge
187. e disturbance If either Lag or step Y is too small the autotuning algorithm will be susceptible to noise Step Y PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 118 Error codes SRS should be high enough to produce a temperature rise of several degrees and Lag should be long enough for the temperature to rise noticeably Errors Attempting to set step Y or Lag when no PID input channel is selected lt channel gt Tune Mode Off Auto Step Relay Starts or stops PID autotuning Step starts the step response tuning algorithm Relay starts the relay tuning algorithm In Auto mode the PTC begins a step response if the PID output is less than half of the Step Y value or relay tuning if the output is greater than half of the Step Y value Off cancels any PID autotuning that s currently in progress lt channel gt Tune Type Cons Moderate Aggr Auto Determines how the PID tuner sets the feedback gains Cons results in slow feedback response rates with little overshoot of the setpoint Aggr results in fast response but much more overshoot Moderate produces intermediate results Auto uses the conservative setting with the step response tuner and the aggressive setting with the relay tuner Error codes are returned by the getError instruction when system com verbose is set to low 100 199 assembly errors Produced before the macro starts to run and pre
188. e log The word next to get the point after the previous point that the getLog instruction fetched from the channel If the point has not been acquired yet the PTC waits for it to be acquired If the getLog instruction has not been used on this channel since the PTC was turned on or since the getLog reset instruction was last issued the last point in the log is returned If the xy option is added to the instruction both the time in milliseconds since 1970 and the value of the point are reported otherwise only the value is reported The reset option resets the next argument for all channels the next time the instruction getLog lt channel gt next is issued for any given channel the last point in that channel s log will be reported No arguments should be used with the reset option The v verbose option adds the name of the channel to the reply The name of the channel is also added if the System Com Verbose setting is High For example the macro getLog reset while 1 getLog 3A next transmits the value of 3A each time a new value is logged The getLog lt channel gt query returns the number of data points that can be read with the getLog lt channel gt next instruction before the most recent point is reached For example to read all logged data for channel 3A first issue the following instructions getLog 3A first getLog 3A Then send the instructi
189. e plot all selected channels appear on a single Y axis Multiple generates a separate plot for each selected channel Custom assigns each selected channel to a plot based on the channel s Plot setting Ponytail produces a single plot with all selected channels but each channel s trace is offset by its initial value The offset is recalculated whenever the user scrolls or zooms the graph system display Units C K F Sensor Sets the system units Setting the units does not change previously acquired data that is if a value of 22 C is recorded in the log and the units are then changed to F it will appear that a value of 22 F was recorded If the units are set to Sensor thermocouple readings are shown in millivolts and RTD and thermistor readings are shown in ohms and custom calibration tables are ignored see the Custom calibration section PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 106 SRS system display X labels None Absolute Elapsed Controls the type of label shown at the bottom of the plot Absolute shows the time and date while Elapsed shows the relative time in seconds minutes hours or days system display X range lt milliseconds gt Sets the X range of the plot Only the plot for the currently selected group is affected Errors a run time error occurs if the argument is less than 10000 10 seconds or greater than 2592000000 30 days System Other subme
190. e still on and an internal cooling fan may switch on occasionally Press the Output Enable key again to leave standby mode Each column of buttons on this screen represents one I O card and each button shows the name and the current value of an I O channel The value may not appear if no sensor or heater is connected to the channel The PTC10 includes two I O cards as standard equipment a 4 channel 10V analog I O AIO card in slot 5 and a digital I O DIO card in slot 6 These cards appear in the two right most columns of the Select screen The remaining four columns show any optional I O cards that have been installed Group 3 r AC out r DC out 1 TC RTD AIO DIO Out 1 Out 2 3A 4A 5A DIO 0 000 V 0 000W 2496 C 25 28 10 00 V 0 3B 5B Relays 26 06 C 10 00 0 3C 5C 25 10 C 10 00 V 3D 5D 25 13 C 10 00 V C 4B 25 33 C 4C 130 6 C V1 4D V2 Cold J 3 26 65 C V3 Buttons turn red if the channel s alarm is triggered that is if the alarm is enabled and the reading is outside of the alarm limits or no sensor is connected The name of the channel appears in bold if the channel uses a custom calibration table Touch one or more buttons to select which channels you d like to view on the Numeric Plot and Channel screens The top of the Select screen has four Group tabs that let you save and recall up to four groups of selected channels Touch one of the tabs or rep
191. e the secondary temperature might be the temperature of the hot air entering the incubator the vent temperature The primary loop controls the air temperature in the incubator by telling the secondary loop how hot the vent air should be The secondary loop regulates the temperature of the vent air by controlling the power to a heater coil The advantage of cascade control is that variations in the vent temperature can be accounted for much more quickly than would be possible with a single PID loop To use cascade feedback select one of the PTC10 s virtual channels V1 V2 or V3 and then press the Channel key Make sure the direction of the channel is Set out or Meas out and then touch the button labeled Casc A list of output channels appears Touch one of the channels to make its PID setpoint track the value of the virtual channel To disable cascade control touch the Casc button and then touch the selected channel to de select it Channel screen Tune column This menu which is only available for output channels configures the PID autotuner See the Automatic PID Tuning section for more details Mode Use this button to start the autotuning process The button is greyed out if a PID input channel has not been selected Select Step to start the step response autotuner Relay to start the relay autotuner See automatic tuning algorithms on page 43 for more information Step Y The size of the disturb
192. e to temperature CMRR Common mode isolation PTC420 AC output card Output Connector Four optoisolated thermocouple inputs Mini thermocouple jacks E J K N or T 500 mV 270 C to 980 C range of calibration table with cold junction at 25 C 210 C to 1177 C 270 C to 1342 C 270 C to 1281 C 270 C to 383 C lt 1 pF 500 mK over 12 months 20 mK RMS at 10 samples s 20 mK C type K thermocouple at 164 0 K 100 dB 250 VAC One line voltage output switched by solid state relay NEMA 5 15 3 prong North American wall socket a heater cable with a mating plug on one side and stripped ends on the other is included PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Output voltage Max output current On off cycle time Max line voltage Surge current Output resolution Heater resistance min Specifications xii 120 240 VAC 5A Adjustable between 1 and 240 s 250 VAC 100 A max non repetitive 0 196 at 10 s cycle time 24 Q 110 VAC 46 Q 230 VAC PTC430 50 W DC output card Output Connector Range Output resolution Accuracy Noise rms 50 load DC 10 Hz One linear unipolar DC current source Two banana jacks 0 75 inch center to center spacing 50V 1A 20 V2 A 50 V0 5A 20 V0 5 A 50 V 0 1A or 20 V 0 1 A 24 bits with dithering enabled or 16 bits with dithering disabled 1 mA 1 A range 0 1 mA 0 5 A range 0 01 mA 0 1 A range 6 uA 50 V 1
193. e uppermost plot If no channels are assigned to a given plot the plot won t appear on the Plot screen For example if all selected channels are assigned to plot 4 only one plot appears on the Custom plot screen Logging By default each channel s value is written to the log once every second This global log rate can be changed on the System screen System Log Interval The Logging button makes it possible to override the global log rate for individual channels Cycle AC output card only The PTC420 has a solid state relay that can either deliver full power or no power to the heater To more precisely control the power delivered to the heater power is switched on for some fraction of a preset cycle time then switched off for the remainder of the cycle For example if the cycle time is 10 seconds the relay might switch on at time t 0 s off at t 1 s on at 10 s off at 11 s on at 20 s and so on This would produce 10 of the maximum output The Cycle instruction sets the on off cycle time Shortening the cycle period will reduce temperature swings associated with switching the current on and off but will also reduce the lifetime of the relay The cycle time must be between 1 and 240 seconds inclusive PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 63 Dither DC output card only The DC output card has a 16 bit DAC For greater resolution the least significant bit can be dithered Dithering is enabled by default
194. e wire are held at different temperatures the charge carriers which in a metal are electrons at the hot end move faster than those at the cold end Since the electrons are free to diffuse throughout the wire they behave somewhat like a gas that expands when it s heated the hot end of the wire develops a lower density of electrons relative to the cold end As a result the hot end has a slight positive charge and the cold end a slight negative change producing a voltage difference between the two ends The exact voltage depends on the temperature at each end and the composition of the wire A thermocouple has two wires that develop different voltages in response to a given temperature difference The wires are welded together at one end the hot junction and the voltage difference is measured at the other the cold junction If we know the cold junction temperature we can then calculate the hot junction temperature Normally we measure the cold junction temperature with another sensor such as an RTD or a thermistor Thermocouple calibration tables generally assume that the cold junction is at 0 C Therefore to convert the thermocouple voltage to a temperature it s necessary to calculate what the thermocouple voltage would be if the cold junction were at 0 C For example say a type K thermocouple is used to measure the temperature of some liquid nitrogen The thermocouple reader measures a voltage of 6 829 mV and also determi
195. eading is blank an incorrect sensor range sensor type or calibration may be selected Unable to tune feedback because the outputs are disabled Press the Output Enable button to enable outputs The outputs must be enabled before autotuning or else the CTC100 will not be able to provide any power to the heaters PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 48 SRS Unable to tune feedback because the heater is disconnected This message appears when the heater is connected to channels Out 1 or Out 2 and the measured heater resistance is less than 1 ohm or greater than 10 000 ohms Unable to tune feedback due to a hardware fault in the heater output This message appears when the heater is connected to channels Out 1 or Out 2 and the current at the and terminals is not equal or current was detected when the heater was supposed to be off or the measured current differs from the expected current Make sure that the heater is not shorted to ground or to another power supply Unable to tune feedback because the heater is under range Unable to tune feedback because the heater is over range If Step tuning is selected the heater output must be less than the maximum output minus Step Y If Relay tuning is selected the heater output must be less than the maximum output minus Step Y and greater than the minimum output plus Step Y 2 Suggestions for best tuning results While tuning use the Plot display to graph the heate
196. eady known they can be loaded into the table with a macro such as the following Out1 PID Zone 1 select the first line of the tabl PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 116 SRS and disable zoned feedback Out1 PID Tmin 25 fill in the first line of the table Outl PID P 1 5 Out1 PID I 0 13 Out1 PID D 0 04 Out1 PID Zone 2 select the second line of the tabl Out1 PID Tmin 35 Outl PID P 0 75 Outl PID I 0 05 Outl PID D 0 03 Out1 PID Zone 3 select the third line of the tabl Out1 PID Tmin 1000 ensure that this line is never used Out1 PID Zone Auto enable zoned feedback Errors Attempting to change the zone when no PID input channel is selected produces a run time locked parameter error lt channel gt PID Mode Off On Follow Enables and disables PID feedback Turning feedback off freezes the output at its current value but does not set the output to zero Setting the mode to On starts PID feedback using the current PID gains In Follow mode the output is continuously set to the same value as the channel selected with the input instruction An offset and gain can be applied using the Zero pt and Gain instructions The input must be stable before either Step or Relay tuning is started Furthermore the output must be greater than half the step height before relay tuning is started The best time to start a step response is
197. eally zero overshoot but very slow response Conversely the Aggr aggressive setting results in much faster feedback response but typically 25 overshoot The moderate setting provides intermediate results For each of these three tuning types the relay tuner uses more aggressive tuning rules than the step response tuner If the auto setting is selected the step response tuner uses the conservative tuning the relay tuner uses aggressive tuning if the derivative gain is nonzero and conservative tuning if D is zero before tuning This setting works well if the step response tuner is used for an initial rough tuning at room temperature and the relay tuner is used for a final tuning once the system has reached its target temperature r Macro Log Com IP Display Other Interval RS 232 DHCP Units Fan O 1s 9600 Off C Auto Verbose Address Volume A D rate lear Clea Medium 0 0 0 0 4 100 ms Folder Subnet Bright Time d History 0 0 0 0 Max 1 55 pm Log to Errors Gateway T PCB Date RAM 0 0 0 0 Hide Jun 18 15 USB Telnet Xlabels A Mvianual 23 Bapsed bout Figures 3 Eject Reset The System screen includes controls for all settings that affect the entire instrument Time and date Ethernet and GPIB parameters and data logging are set up through this screen Nothing happens if the System button is pressed when the System screen is already showing Systems screen Macro column Buttons with
198. eatedly press the Select button to change the selection group PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 5 Numeric screen Group 1 Out 2 1 125 SA 49 951 This screen displays the current values of the selected channels as numbers The more channels that are selected the smaller the displays are If enough space is available an annunciator may appear that indicates whether the sensor or heater is disconnected N A over range Hi under range Lo if outputs are disabled OfP or if an internal error has occurred Err Input displays turn red whenever the input s alarm is triggered The name of the channel appears in bold if the channel uses a custom calibration table Repeatedly press the Numeric button to cycle through the four selection groups Touch one of the channel displays to show setup menu for the channel Plot screen 9 min This screen shows logged data from the selected channels on one or more graphs Press the Plot key repeatedly to cycle between the four formats described below single multi custom and ponytail The Plot screen always shows logged data If for example the log interval is set to 10 s the graph will have a stairstep appearance with a step every 10 seconds Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 52 Touch the tabs at the top of the screen to change the selection group Each of the four g
199. ect your settings or I O card calibration data CPU firmware updates 1 N o2 4 Ca The firmware update package supplied by SRS contains a release image img file and an update txt macro Copy the release image img file to the root directory of a USB flash drive or hard drive Copy the update txt macro into a directory named macros on the root directory of the USB drive Plug the USB device into the PTC10 and wait until a window that says Opening USB drive appears and then disappears Press the System key on the PTC10 s front panel If you don t have too many other macros defined there should be a button labeled Update in the leftmost column Press the Update button The PTC10 erases the existing firmware and then loads the new firmware The entire process should take about 20 30 seconds At this point the old firmware is still running Turn the PTC10 off and back on again to start using the new firmware I O card firmware updates 1 N o2 ao p ON SRS The firmware update package supplied by SRS contains 10 20 files with names that end in hex plus a number of macros named U1 txt U2 txt etc Copy the hex files to the root directory of a USB flash drive or hard drive Copy the txt files into a directory named macros on the root directory of the USB drive Plug the USB device into the PTC10 and wait until a window that says Opening USB
200. ed according to the American ANSI color coding scheme i e type J jacks are black type K jacks are yellow etc The colors may not conform to the standard colors used in other countries The thermocouple jacks are connected with thermocouple extension wires to a cold junction block inside the PTC10 The cold junction temperature is measured with a platinum RTD temperature sensor The cold junction temperature is recorded so that if unexpected drift or other artifacts appear in the thermocouple readings it can be determined whether the artifacts are due to erratic behavior of the cold junction If readings are displayed in sensor units see the System Other Units button the raw thermocouple EMFs are displayed in millivolts not corrected for the cold junction temperature and the cold junction temperature is displayed in ohms The PTC330 s inputs are optically isolated and the thermocouples can come in direct contact with electrically live metal In this case however the noise level and accuracy of the measurement may be affected The PTC330 hardware is calibrated at ambient temperatures of 25 and 35 C An on board temperature sensor continuously interpolates between these two calibrations to account for thermal drift of the board s electronic components Since the PTC10 enclosure is usually elevated 2 to 3 degrees above ambient temperature the accuracy of the PTC330 may be compromised if the ambient temperature rises above about 32 C
201. ed Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Connector Male Connector BNC Connector BNC Connector BNC Connector BNC DIN Connector Male Ferrite Beads Inductor Fixed SMT Ferrite Beads Inductor Fixed SMT Ferrite Beads Inductor Fixed SMT Printed Circuit Board Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 181 R 210 4 01155 462 2 49K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 227 4 01163 462 3 01K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 228 4 01117 462 1 00K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 230 4 01139 462 1 69K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 231 4 01110 462 845 Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 234 4 01156 462 2 55K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor RN101 4 01704 463 100Kx4D 5 Resistor network SMT Leadless RN102 4 00911 463 4 7KX4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN103 4 00910 463 1 0KX4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN105 4 01707 463 47KX4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN206 4 00910 463 1 0KX4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN310 4 00909 463 470X4D Resis
202. ed in the buffer and then removes the message from the buffer If the buffer is empty no errors is returned Only errors generated by the port over which the geterror instruction was received are reported If for example a geterror instruction is transmitted over the USB port it only reports errors caused by messages that were received by the USB port Geterror does not remove messages from the System Com Errors window kill lt string gt kill all Stops all currently running macros with the given runtime name The runtime name is assigned with the name instruction and is not necessarily the same as the file name that a macro may be saved under The kill all instruction stops all currently running macros regardless of name or which port started the macro There is no kill query name lt string gt Assigns a runtime name to the currently running macro A remote command or another macro can then use the kill instruction to stop the named macro In addition the name appears on the macro s tab in the Program screen The name can be any alphanumeric string up to 32 characters long and more than one macro can have the same name Macros are assigned a default runtime name in the form ProgramN where N is an integer that increments each time a new macro is started A macro s runtime name has no relationship to its file name see the define command The name command does not change the file name that
203. ed port The port must be a value between 0 and 65535 inclusive and should normally be either 23 the default or a value greater than 1024 System Display submenu system display Bright Off 2 3 4 5 6 Max Sets the brightness of the front panel LCD display If Off is selected touch the front panel to turn the display on for 2 seconds system display Figures 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Sets the number of figures that appear after the decimal point in the replies to remote queries of floating point values as well as on the Numeric tab of the Show Data screen Fewer figures appear after the decimal point if the value is greater than 1000 or less than 1000 system display Stats Off On Controls whether statistics are visible in the plot If Stats is set to On and the plot type is single or multiple the average and standard deviation for each channel for which statistics collection has been enabled with the lt channel gt stats instruction is shown next to the channel name Ponytail plots instead show the offset of each channel system display Extras Hide Show If set to Show various internal monitor channels are displayed These channels display printed circuit board PCB temperatures for the I O cards as well as heater current voltage and resistance The system must be restarted before the PCB temperatures are shown system display Type Single Multiple Custom Ponytail Controls the type of plot On a Singl
204. egrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Voltage Reg TO 220 TAB Package PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 172 U 630 3 01717 360 MAX6629MUT Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 710 3 01469 360 MAX6250BCSA Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg u 720 3 01500 360 LTC2440CGN Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg u 750 3 00663 360 74H C08 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 760 3 00814 360 78M05 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg u 770 3 01822 360 LTC2052CS Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 780 3 00659 360 OP284FS Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Zo 0 00043 011 4 40 KEP Nut Kep Z0 0 00187 021 4 40X1 4PP Screw Panhead Phillips Zo 0 00306 026 4 40X3 16PP Screw Black All Types Z0 0 00772 000 1 5 WIRE Hardware Misc Z0 0 01093 007 563002B00000 Heat Sinks Z0 0 01116 062 92916A325 Washer Other Z0 0 01117 000 92671A005 Hardware Misc Z0 0 01118 020 4 40X3 8 Screw Flathead Phillips Z0 0 01119 023 4 40X3 8 Screw Roundhead Phillips Z0 0 01120 049 TFCC 010 50 Thermocouple Wire Z0 0 01121 049 TFCH 010 50 Thermocouple Wire Z0 0 01159 062 92916A330 Washer Other Z0 0 01160 049 TFCY 010 50 Thermocouple Wire Z0 0 01161 049 TFAL 010 50 Thermocouple Wire Z0 0 01209 049 TFIR 010 50 Thermocouple Wire Z0 0 01210 049 TFCI 01
205. eighted average of all data acquired before the point This filter emulates an analog RC lowpass filter and is similar to the PTC s lowpass filter except that it s first order rather than sixth order Median filter Removes single point noise spikes with a sliding window median filter The filter replaces each data point with the median value of itself the previous point and the next point Normalize Subtracts a constant from a buffer then multiplies the buffer by another constant such that the minimum value in the buffer is zero and the maximum value is one Revert to saved Re loads a buffer from disk discarding the effects of all operations performed with the Process menu Smooth Removes noise using a sliding window Gaussian filter Smoothing replaces each data point with a weighted average of data acquired before during and after the point Subtract average Subtracts the average value of a buffer from all data points in the buffer Subtract initial Subtracts the value of the first point in a buffer from all data points in the buffer Subtract slope Subtracts the overall slope from a buffer Undo Undoes the last operation performed with the Process menu This contents of this menu are defined in the file Resource SpecialMenu rsc Each item in the menu is the name of a macro which is located in the Resource directory PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 135 SRS Small plot size Displa
206. elded cable and connecting the shield to pin 3 Excitation current The excitation current provided to the sensor is automatically determined by the PTC320 For resistive sensors the current is determined by the type of sensor and the measurement range as shown in the table below When a diode sensor is in use the card always produces a 10 uA excitation PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 5 Measurement RTD Thermistor Diode range excitation excitation excitation 30 Q 5 mA 200 pA 100 Q 2 mA 100 uA 300 Q mA 50 pA I kQ 500 pA 30 pA 3 kQ 200 pA 20 pA 10 kQ 100 pA 10 pA 30 kQ 50 pA 5 pA 100 kQ 10 pA 3 pA 300 kQ 5 pA 2 pA 2 5 V 2 5 MO uA uA 10 pA Excitation current produced by the PTC320 The thermistor excitation current results in about 1 uW of power being dissipated in the thermistor at the high end of each measurement range Therefore if the dissipation constant of the thermistor is above 1 mW C the measurement error due to self heating should be less than 1 mK PTC321 RTD reader SRS Resistance temperature detectors RTDs use the resistance of a metal wire or film to indicate temperature RTDs are usually made of platinum which being very non reactive produces sensors with exceptional long term stability However platinum RTDs are also expensive and have a limited temperature range Typically the sensor s resistance is measured by passing an excitation current through it and meas
207. elp key which displays a pop up window with a brief description of whichever is currently showing on the screen Touch the OK button or press the Help key again to dismiss the help window In the Lopass menu select one of the six options Select the largest value that is less than the response time of your heater The lowpass filter reduces noise improving the accuracy of the PID tuning process and the performance of the tuned PID feedback loop Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 29 SRS Lopass Off 300s 1s Configure the alarm To protect your system from being damaged by excessive heater power which can occur if for example the PID feedback is configured incorrectly or the sensor becomes disconnected it s important to set up an alarm The alarm automatically shuts off the heater whenever the temperature exceeds limits that you specify whenever the sensor becomes disconnected and whenever the temperature becomes too high or low for the sensor to measure On the Setup screen for your temperature sensor under the Alarm heading set the options as follows 3A Alarm Cal Name PCB Status Output 3A 30 00 C Off Out 2 Diff Mode Relay Offset Level None 0 000 C Lopass Latch Min Gain 3s No 0 000 C 1 000 Plot didt Max Mu 1 Off ute 100 0 C Logging Sound Lag Default 1 beep is Status Thus button shows you if the alarm is currently triggered It can
208. els the native units are by default watts but can be changed to percent volts or amps with the Units control in PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 34 Virtual channels SRS the Channel menu If in doubt have the PTC10 display its readings in native units by touching the System Display Units button and then selecting Sensor The calibration table must be expressed in the units in which the reading now appears A calibration table must contain at least two calibration points and the entire file cannot contain more than 4095 characters about 100 200 calibration points Commas should not be used within numeric values The PTC10 uses a cubic spline algorithm to interpolate between the calibration points except between the first and last two calibration points where a less accurate linear interpolation algorithm is used The data points do not have to be equally spaced they can be closely spaced in critical temperature areas and more widely spaced in outlying areas For RTDs the interval between data points should be 10 C or less to ensure the best possible 0 1 mK interpolation accuracy For thermistors an interval of 1 C or less should be used The numeric values may be separated from each other with one or more commas spaces tabs and or newlines It s not actually necessary to put each calibration point on a separate line as shown above The displayed value must either increase or decrease monotoni
209. emperature Controller Operation 49 Front panel controls The front panel has six menu keys to the left of the display labeled Select Numeric etc These keys can be pressed at any time to display one of the six main screens Each of the main screens except for the Program screen has six columns of buttons usually with a column name at the top of each column Each button has a name in large text and usually a value beneath the name in smaller text In this manual buttons are referred to by the name of the screen Select Numeric Plot etc the name of the column if any and the name of the button separated by dots For example System Log Interval refers to the Interval button in the Log column of the System screen The text System Log Interval can also be sent to the PTC10 over one of its communications ports RS 232 USB etc as a remote command The front panel also has a Help button that displays help text for whatever is currently on screen and an Output Enable button that turns all the PTC10 s outputs on and off USB logging indicator Help key When the PTC10 is logging to a USB memory device a small white triangle appears in the upper right corner of all screens if a USB device is present but the PTC10 is not logging to it the triangle is drawn in dark blue If no USB device is present the triangle doesn t appear at all The triangle confirms that the system is logging to USB and can also
210. en IP column DHCP Enables or disables the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol If DHCP is set to on and a DHCP server is present on the network the other IP settings are automatically configured and are grayed out Address Sets the IP address Subnet Sets the subnet mask Gateway Sets the gateway for communications outside of the local network In general this setting is not needed since the PTC does not initiate communications outside the local network Telnet Sets the telnet port for Ethernet communications Remote commands can be sent to the PTC through a telnet connection on the selected port The port must be a value between 0 and 65535 inclusive and should normally be either 23 the default or a value greater than 1024 PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 77 SRS System screen Display column Units Sets the temperature units for the entire instrument Temperature measurements are both displayed and logged in the specified units If the units are changed in the middle of an experiment there will appear to be a large jump in all of the temperature records PID setpoint values are not adjusted to compensate for the new units Five units options are available C K mK F and Sensor If the Sensor option is selected sensor measurements are not converted to temperature and instead appear in the native units of the sensor i e millivolts for thermocouples volts for diode sensors and o
211. enu The program prefix can be used but is not necessary for these instructions abortMacro lt text gt Defines an abort macro The abort macro is run if the macro that defined it is aborted with an abort or kill instruction or is stopped from Program or System screens The abort macro is not run if the macro ends normally if a RST instruction is issued if a reset running macros instruction is issued or if a reset all instruction is issued The abort macro also does not run if the macro is aborted before the abortMacro instruction is processed The abortMacro instruction only affects the macro that called it and has no effect on any other macros clearerrors Erases all error messages for the port over which the instruction was transmitted Also clears all messages from the System Com Errors window regardless of which port generated them cls Clears the messages window on the program screen if the program is selected on the program screen s tab bar There is no cls query define lt macro name gt lt macro content gt Saves a macro The first argument is a file name under which to save the macro the second argument is the content of the macro Once a macro is saved it can be called from another macro by issuing the file name like any standard instruction The saved macro can also be started from the Program screen via the Load button or by touching the Progress window If a macro is already save
212. er Touchscreen and button presses are detected by touchscreen controller U201 which is connected to the microcontroller with an SPI interface The Atmel microcontroller automatically plays click sounds and illuminates the front panel LEDs except for the Output Enable LED when the buttons or touchscreen are pressed The LCD display is illuminated by three strings of built in LEDs The LCD backlight supply has three independent constant current sources that each produce 62 5 mA of current to power one string of LEDs The BACKLIGHT ON signal is driven by one of the Atmel microcontroller s PWM outputs The LCD display can be dimmed by rapidly switching the backlight LEDs on and off The fan driver converts a PWM signal from the Atmel microcontroller into a constant current output The microcontroller can vary the fan speed by changing its PWM output The front panel has provisions for a fan tachometer that are currently not used The RS 232 port is provided for debugging and is not used PTC240 GPIB card SRS The GPIB interface is based on a National Instruments TNT4882 GPIB chip Since the GPIB chip uses a 5V supply while the other CPU bus components use a 3 3V supply 5V tolerant transceivers are needed to interface the chip with the CPU bus A glue logic chip U160 resolves incompatibilities between the GPIB s data bus and the CPU bus PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 144 I O cards All I
213. er error lt channel gt Logging Off 0 1 s 0 3 s 3 s 10 s 30 s min 3 min 10 min 30 min I hr Default Sets the log interval for this channel Default makes this channel s log interval the same as the global default interval see the System Log Interval instruction Off disables logging for this channel lt channel gt Lopass Off s 3 s 10 s 305 100 s 300 s Sets the time constant for a 6th order lowpass RC filter This instruction is only available for input channels lt channel gt Low Imt float lt channel gt Hi Imt float These instructions are available for output channels only They determine the minimum and maximum output and can be used to prevent the PID loop from delivering excessive power to a heater The limits must be specified in the same units that the output is expressed in The limits must normally be reset when the output units are changed since the limits are not converted to the new units lt channel gt Name lt string gt Changes the name of this channel A macro cannot change a channel s name and then use the new name to set or get the channel s parameters This is because the PTC10 checks the syntax of a macro before the macro runs Since the channel s name hasn t been changed at this point the PTC10 will produce an unrecognized instruction error if it sees any instructions beginning with the new channel name lt channel gt Off This instruction is onl
214. er does not exist it is created If the folder does exist and it already contains PTC10 logfiles new data points are appended to the existing files system log interval off 0 1 s 0 3 s 1 s 3 s 10 s 30 s min 3 min 10 min 30 min hr Sets the default log interval which determines how often each channel s value is written to the log Individual channels can override this value using the channel logging instruction system log Log to RAM USB None Set this parameter to USB to begin logging data to a USB memory device if one is present Set it to RAM to stop logging data to the USB device and store data in local memory and to None to disable logging altogether If set to None no data appears on the Plot screen Errors if USB is selected and no USB storage device is present this parameter automatically switches to None system log USB Auto Manual If set to Auto any time a memory device is plugged into one of the PTC10 s USB ports the PTC automatically begins logging to it If set to Manual each time a USB device is plugged in a system log log to instruction must be issued to begin logging data to it or the user must touch the USB logging indicator in the upper right corner of the screen PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 104 SRS System COM submenu system com RS 232 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 115200 250000 Sets the baud r
215. erature was not stable before the autotuner was started or the temperature was changed by some external factor after the autotuner was started In particular after running the autotuner it s necessary to wait for the temperature to re stabilize before running the autotuner again The autotuner disturbance size Step Y was not large enough to create a noticeable change in the temperature The autotuner wait time Lag was not long enough for the heater to change the temperature To determine the source of the problem look at a dual plot with the heater output on one plot and the sensor temperature on the other Make sure that the temperature was stable before the heater turned on and that it changed significantly after the heater was turned on Autotuning was cancelled because the Tune gt Mode control was set to Off This message indicates that the user turned off autotuning by setting the autotuning mode to off while it was running Autotuning was cancelled because the PID mode was set to manual The user turned off PID feedback while the tuner is running The tuner is unable to run when PID feedback is turned off Autotuning was cancelled because the PID mode was set to follow The user changed the PID mode to Follow The tuner is unable to run in this mode Tuning was cancelled because the input was disconnected No sensor signal was detected Ensure that a sensor is plugged in and that its reading is not blank If the r
216. et gain factors By doing these calculations on a virtual channel that has been configured to follow a sensor input instead of doing them directly on the sensor input channel the raw sensor input is preserved and can still be viewed If the virtual channel is an output it has a PID feedback loop that can be used for cascade control see the description of the Channel PID Casc button in the Operation section Unlike other outputs virtual outputs aren t forced to zero when the PTC s outputs are disabled with the Output Enable button However virtual PID feedback loops do stop running when the PTC10 s outputs are disabled When the value of a virtual channel is changed by a macro or from the front panel the new value does not become effective until an ADC conversion occurs Therefore if a macro sets the value of a virtual channel and then immediately reads the value back the old value may be returned PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 21 SRS PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 22 Quick start tutorial Turn the instrument on Plug the PTC10 in and turn it on with the power switch located next to the AC power inlet The SRS logo should appear on screen immediately It remains on screen for about 30 seconds while the system boots The Select screen The PTC10 boots up with the Select screen showing This screen has a button for each physical input or output on the PTC s back panel T
217. example rhodium iron germanium and carbon glass sensors have too much sensor to sensor variability to use a standard curve and therefore must be custom calibrated Connecting the sensor The sensors are connected via a 9 pin D sub DB9 socket that mates with any standard DB9 plug such as Amphenol L717SDEO9P with backshell 17E 1657 09 One plug and backshell is PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 8 provided with each PTC323 Here is the pinout of the socket as it appears when looking at the PTC10 s back panel fee 2 VB 8 VA 7 3 Gnd dU 6 2 A A Sensor In 1 for example should be connected to pins HA IA VA and VA as described below Cable shields should be connected to pin 3 which is chassis ground The I and I pins provide a small current that should be routed to the temperature sensor through two wires preferably a shielded twisted pair When these leads are properly connected a voltage equal to the excitation current multiplied by the sensor resistance is produced across the sensor Two additional pins V and V are provided to measure the sensor voltage These pins should be connected to the sensor with two additional wires preferably a second shielded twisted pair as shown in the figure below V should be connected to I as close as possible to the temperature sensor and likewise should be connected to V as close as possible to the sensor Unlike the I leads essentia
218. feedback output at each A D conversion If the PID mode set to off outputs are disabled or no PID input channel is selected changes to the feedforward channel s value have no effect on the PID output To disable feedforward touch the Ffwd button and then touch the selected input channel Feedforward can be used to compensate for environmental or other factors that affect the feedback loop in predictable ways The feedforward channel typically must be scaled using 3 4 offset gain factors in the channel s cal menu or a custom calibration table PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 73 SRS Casc Cascade control A cascade control system consists of two or more PID loops As in a normal PID system a primary PID loop monitors a temperature that needs to be regulated the primary temperature However instead of driving the physical output heater valve etc the output of the primary loop becomes the setpoint for a secondary PID loop The secondary loop monitors a secondary temperature reading and controls the physical output The secondary temperature reading is typically a temperature that is not in and of itself critical to the application but responds more quickly to the control output than the primary reading For example the temperature of an incubator might need to be kept constant using a forced air heater In this case the primary temperature is the air temperature inside the incubator whil
219. flowing or if the current is turned on when no TEC is present the card s output is disabled and remains disabled until its output is set to zero This feature ensures that the voltage between the output terminals is always zero when a TEC is plugged in A nonzero voltage would produce a destructive current spike when the TEC is plugged in Therefore if the PTC440 does not produce any output current turn the current off and back on again either by pressing the PTC10 s Output Enable button three times or setting the output value to zero with the Channel value control PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction l6 SRS Connecting the TEC Connect the TEC to pins 1 and 3 Pins 2 and 4 can also be connected to reduce contact resistance The PTC440 is a current source that is it has direct control over the current that passes through the TEC but not the voltage Since thermoelectric coolers are easily destroyed by both voltages and currents even slightly above their rated maximum the PTC440 provides a voltage input Vmon to monitor the TEC voltage The connections for this input are the TEC sense and TEC sense pins If these leads are connected to the TEC at the same locations as the TEC and leads respectively Vmon shows the voltage across the TEC If the leads are not connected Vmon shows the voltage at the PTC s back panel If only a small current passes through the TEC even at its maximum voltage the TE
220. ge numbers of files slows down the PTC10 s response GPIB PTC10 units equipped with the GPIB option can be connected to GPIB interface devices Any standard GPIB cable can be used to connect the PTC10 but due to space restrictions a single ended cable such as a National Instruments X5 cable is recommended A right angle X4 cable can also be used No more than three GPIB cables should be stacked on a single GPIB connector and no more than 14 devices can be connected to a single GPIB interface The total length of all GPIB cables must not exceed 2 meters per instrument or 20 meters whichever is less Ethernet Remote commands can be sent to the PTC10 s Ethernet interface using telnet port 23 The IP address and subnet mask have to be set before the Ethernet interface can be used It s not necessary to connect to your building s network to use an Ethernet connection the PTC10 can be connected directly to a computer A special crossover cable may be needed for some older PCs but in general a standard Cat 5 cable can be used Follow the following procedure to test an Ethernet connection 1 Connect the PTC10 to your computer with a standard Cat5 Ethernet cable PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 86 2 Enter a suitable IP address into the PTC10 s System menu The IP address should be within your computer s subnet If you re testing a direct connection i e nothing else is connected to the network
221. here may also be buttons for other values such as heater resistance Group 3 r AC out r DC out 1 TC RTD AIO DIO Out 1 Out 2 3A 4A 5A DIO 0 000 0 000 VV 2496 C 25298 C 10 00V 0 3B 4B 5B Relays 26 06 C 2533 C 10 00V 0 3C 4C 5C v1 25 10 C 1306 C 10 00V 3D 4D 5D v2 25 13 C 10 00 V Cold J 3 26 65 C The Select screen has one column for each I O card The leftmost four columns are for optional I O cards some of these columns will be empty if fewer than four such cards are installed Every PTC10 includes as standard equipment a 10V analog I O card and a digital I O card The AIO column on the Select screen shows the four channels on the analog I O card while the DIO column is for the digital I O card V1 V2 and V3 are virtual channels that can be used to perform real time calculations In addition to the buttons that represent physical outputs the Select screen can have buttons that represent internal data channels In the figure above for example the thermocouple card has a button for the cold junction temperature It s also possible to display buttons for heater current voltage and resistance use the Extras button on the System setup screen to set this option The Select screen controls which channels are shown on the Numeric Plot and Channel Setup screens To select a channel touch a button on the Select screen the button becomes lighter indicating that the channel
222. hms for resistive sensors Bright Sets the brightness of the screen If Off is selected the screen turns completely off but can be turned on again for 2 seconds by touching the screen Extras If set to Show various extra channels that display printed circuit board PCB temperature heater current heater voltage and heater resistance are displayed A system restart is required before the PCB temperature is displayed X labels Set to Absolute to label vertical grid lines with the full time and date Set to Elapsed to display more concise easy to read labels that indicate the amount of time between grid lines The elapsed time is reset to zero once per minute hour or day depending on the X range of the graph 50 2 50 0 53 00 pm 1 54 00 pm 1 55 00 pm 1 56 00 pm Jun 18 15 Jun 1815 Jun 1815 Jun 18 15 Absolute X labels PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 78 SRS 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min min Elapsed X labels Figures Sets the number of figures that are shown after the decimal point on the Numeric tab of the Show Data screen and in values sent in response to remote queries Fewer digits are shown if the value is greater than 1000 or less than 1000 or if the requested number of digits doesn t fit into the available space This setting does not affect logged data or plots System screen Other column Fan Controls the speed of the front panel fan If a PTC430 DC output car
223. hould be soldered directly to the pins on the DB plug and covered up with the backshell Because AD590 sensors are highly sensitive to electromagnetic interference the AD590 wires and package must be shielded with the shield connected to pin 3 of the DB9 connector Excitation current The excitation current provided to the sensor is automatically determined by the PTC323 For resistive sensors the current is determined by the type of sensor and the measurement range as shown in the table below When a diode sensor is in use the card always produces a 10 pA excitation Measurement RTD Thermistor Diode range excitation excitation excitation 10Q 3mA mA 300 3mA 300 pA 1000 2mA 100 pA 300 Q mA 30 pA kQ 500 pA 10 pA 3 kQ 200 pA 3 pA 10 kQ 50 pA pA 30 kQ 50 pA 300 nA 100 kQ 5 pA 100 nA 300 kQ 5 pA 30 nA 2 5 MQ pA uA 2 5 V 10 pA Excitation current produced by the PTC323 The thermistor excitation current dissipates a maximum of 10 uW of power in the sensor at the 10 Q range Sensor self heating decreases as the measurement range is increased such that the maximum self heating at the 300 kQ range is only 300 pW This feature is important for cryogenic systems in which the sensor resistance increases and heat conductivity decreases as the temperature approaches 0 K PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 10 PTC330 thermocouple reader SRS How thermocouples work If the two ends of a conductiv
224. how channels with tripped alarms on the Numeric screen This macro turns selection group 1 into a display of channels with tripped alarms Once per second if group 1 is selected all channels whose alarm mode is on are selected all other channels are deselected The macro is best used with the Numeric screen visible but also works with the Select or Plot screens if group 1 selectAlarmed pause 1 s Jai Make a virtual channel show the PID setpoint Virtual input channels have a follow control that can be used to make the channel echo the value of any other channel With a macro the virtual channel can likewise be made to echo any PTC10 parameter not just channel values The following macro uses a virtual channel to echo a feedback setpoint This macro makes it possible for example to graph the setpoint on the Plot screen alongside other variables or using the Diff button to graph the difference between the setpoint and the actual temperature waitForSample Vl 4 Outl PID actual 1 Each time an ADC conversion occurs this macro sets channel V1 equal to the actual setpoint of channel Out 1 if channel Out 1 s setpoint is ramping Out1 PID setpoint is endpoint of the ramp while Out1 PID actual is the current value of the ramp if the setpoint is not ramping the two values are the same Because the macro is contained within a 1 statement it repeats indefinitely running as a backgrou
225. ich shows text received over RS 232 or GPIB a Messages window which shows responses and error messages from the PTC10 and a Progress window which shows the list of instructions that make up the current program If a program is not running you can compose or modify a program by touching a line in the Progress window Touching a blank line brings up a list of possible commands Touching a line that already contains an instruction brings up a list of three options you can add a new instruction on the line above the one that was touched delete the instruction that was touched or replace the instruction that was touched The Program screen has six buttons Play symbol If a program is displayed but not running press this button to start the program If a program is running in the currently selected tab the button is highlighted and pressing it stops the program Pause symbol Press this button to temporarily pause the program running in the currently selected tab Press the button again to resume running the program Clear Erases all text from the Input Messages and Progress windows Unless it has previously been saved the current program is lost This button cannot be pressed while a program is running in the current tab Load Touch this button and a list of programs stored in memory is displayed Programs can be stored in memory with the Program Save button by sending a define instruction to a remote interface or by attaching a US
226. ile to channel name gt txt copy the file into the cal directory of your USB stick and plug the USB stick into the PTC10 To verify that a particular file has loaded display the Select screen by pressing the Select menu key If a channel uses a custom calibration the upper left corner of its button is clipped For more details select the relevant channel press the channel menu key and look in the Cal column The Type button should read custom and a Details button should appear at the bottom of the column Press the Details button to view the first three and last three calibration points or a message describing why the calibration data could not be read Each time a USB device is plugged into the PTC10 the PTC10 searches the Cal directory and loads any calibration tables found there into RAM If the USB device is unplugged the calibration tables remain in RAM However if the PTC10 is switched off all calibration tables in RAM are lost Therefore once a custom calibration table is leaded it remains in effect until one of the following occurs The instrument is turned off or rebooted Once this occurs the custom calibration table must be reloaded from the USB device for example by leaving the device plugged in when the instrument is turned back on PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 33 A USB device with a different calibration file is plugged into the PTC10 The calibration
227. iles more manageable Double click the program icon to open the setup window which has six input fields and two buttons Once the fields have been filled in files can be converted by clicking the Start button Or click the Close button and then drag one or more files onto the PT CFileConverter icon In this drag and drop mode the setup window is not displayed and the files are immediately converted using the most recently saved settings the Input folder or file setting is ignored Input folder or file Select the PTC log file or files that you d like to convert If you select a directory when the Start button is pressed PTCFileConverter will convert all PTC log files in the directory but not in its subdirectories and combine them into a single output file Files that do not contain any data empty PTC log files or files that are not PTC log files are ignored and do not appear in the output file Output file If a Text or HTML output format is selected this field determines the name of the output file If you do not specify a directory the output file will be saved in the same folder as the input file If you do not specify an extension txt or html will be appended to the file name when the file is saved If Binary output format is selected this field determines the output folder The output files are saved to this folder and have the same name as the input files The output folder must be different from the inp
228. ilm 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 244 4 01201 462 7 50K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 245 4 01146 462 2 00K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 246 4 01088 462 499 Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 247 4 01155 462 2 49K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 248 4 01117 462 1 00K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 249 4 01146 462 2 00K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R251 4 02456 400 1 OHM 1 Resistor Misc R 252 4 01712 409 4 0 5W Resistor Wire Wound R 253 4 01729 449 20 0 100PPM Resistor Metal Film 1 2W 1 50ppm R 254 4 01320 462 130K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 255 4 01146 462 2 00K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 256 4 01146 462 2 00K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 257 4 01146 462 2 00K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 263 4 01404 462 976K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 264 4 01296 462 73 2K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 273 4 01242 462 20 0K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor R 274 4 01117 462 1 00K Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor RN111 4 01707 463 47KX4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN112 4 01707 463 47KX4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN113 4 00910 463 1 0KX4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN121 4 01707 463 47KX4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN271 4 00910 463 1 0KX4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN272 4 01764 463 10X4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN273 4 00911 463 4 7KX4D Resistor network SMT Leadless Asso PTCIO Programmable Tem
229. in the root directory and begins logging to USB All resets all of the above items system other Volume off 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 max Controls the volume of all tones and alarm sounds played through the front panel speaker lt channel gt submenu SRS lt channel gt To set the value of an output channel send the name of the channel followed by the new value For example sets the value of channel 5A to 2 5V assuming that channel 5A is an output and Output Enable is on To read the value of any channel send the name of the channel followed by a question mark For example 5A queries the value of channel 5A Errors a run time error occurs if this instruction is used to set the value of an input channel lt channel gt Average If statistics collection is enabled for this channel using the lt channel gt Stats instruction this query prints the average over the most recent n A D samples where n is set with the lt channel gt Points instruction lt channel gt Current Forward Reverse AC PTC321 4 channel RTD reader lt channel gt Current Forward Reverse AC off PTC320 channel thermistor reader Selects the direction of the excitation current passed through RTDs and thermistors The current direction can be switched from forward to reverse to check for offsets caused by thermal EMFs In AC mode the current direction is switched with each ADC reading and each measurement is the average of the two most
230. input and output card The second and third numbers indicate the specific type of board The last number which is sometimes omitted indicates the revision PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 140 Core system cards PTC211 CPU board The CPU U102 is a Motorola ColdFire running at 90 MHz The ColdFire s 32 bit data bus is directly connected to 16 MB of SDRAM U201 and to an expansion connector J202 used for the GPIB option All remaining bus components only use the upper 16 data bits and are connected to the CPU through a set of transceivers U520 U530 U540 to avoid overloading the ColdFire s bus drivers which can drive a maximum of 50 pF A 4 MB flash chip U202 stores the PTC10 s software When the instrument is first switched on a bootloader program copies the firmware from flash into SDRAM after which the flash is no longer used 512 kB of SRAM U204 with battery backup holds all user settings if the battery fails all user settings revert to their default value A jumper J201 can be installed to prevent the part of flash memory that contains the bootloader from being overwritten As long as the bootloader is present the flash can be reprogrammed through the serial port If the bootloader is somehow erased the card must be reprogrammed at the factory The LCD controller U401 contains the PTC s video memory and generates drive waveforms for the LCD display Because the LCD display must be dr
231. ins Because the slope calculation is sensitive to noise it s important to enable the lopass filter on the feedback input channel to achieve accurate tuning results Since the relay tuner does not require a slope measurement it s less sensitive to noise than the step response tuner If the tuning mode is set to Auto the PTC10 selects the relay tuner if both its high and low outputs are within the heater s limits otherwise it selects the step response tuner For example if the output is off and can t go negative when autotuning is started the step response tuner runs because the relay tuner would require a negative output Aggressive moderate and conservative tuning Both the step response and relay tuners offer aggressive moderate and conservative tuning options Conservative tuning theoretically produces zero overshoot and is usually the best choice when the temperature needs to follow a changing setpoint The aggressive tuning option theoretically produces 2596 overshoot although in fact it tends to be larger and is usually the best choice for applications in which the setpoint is constant Moderate tuning produces a very stable feedback loop that behaves reasonably in a wide variety of situations The figure below compares the system s behavior when we change the setpoint from 60 to 70 C after relay tuning with the aggressive moderate and conservative options In this case the conservative tuning produces the best response
232. is occurs either 1 ensure that the temperature is stable before starting the step response 2 increase step Y or 3 if it looks like the temperature didn t have enough time to respond increase the Lag time The tuner then sets the output to the Outputhign value Then each time the temperature crosses its initial value 50 C in the figure above the output is switched from high to low or low to high This produces a temperature oscillation 180 out of phase with the output oscillation The tuner performs two oscillation cycles not including the kick start and measures the period and amplitude of the second oscillation The relay tuner has to wait several times for the temperature to cross its initial value If the temperature measurement is disturbed during this time for example if the temperature sensor is moved or if the sensor is in an oven and the oven door is opened the temperature may never cross its initial value and the tuner may run indefinitely without finishing Step response tuner min 6 min Heater power top and sensor temperature bottom during step response autotuning Step Y is 2 5 W Lag is 45 s feedback is initially off and the system starts at room temperature After the step response is complete the feedback turns on and the temperature drops before stabilizing at the 50 C setpoint The step response tuner makes a single change to the amount of power delivered to the heater and measures how much
233. is selected Touch the button again to deselect the channel Configure the sensor inputs If you re using a PTC320 or PTC323 thermistor diode RTD input card it may be necessary to select the sensor type and calibration curve Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 23 1 Select one or more inputs on the Select screen 2 Press the Channel key to display the channel settings screen The top of this screen has one tab for each selected channel Touch one of the tabs to display the settings for that channel 3 Touch the Sensor button and select the appropriate sensor type RTD thermistor diode etc 4 Set the Range to Auto 5 In the C al column touch the Type button and select the appropriate calibration curve If the sensor reading does not appear The sensor reading is blank whenever it falls outside the limits of the calibration data or input hardware This normally occurs when no sensor is connected but can also occur if the sensor is incorrectly configured In this case try the following steps 1 Ensure that the sensor is correctly connected Thermistors and RTDs should normally be connected with four wires Thermocouples and diodes must not be connected backwards 2 Measure the resistance of the sensor with an ohmmeter to ensure that one of the wires is not broken 3 Bring up the channel setup screen for the input channel and check the following settings Sensor must ag
234. is switched off Remove the four black screws that secure the top cover Lift the cover off of the N instrument Looking at the front of the PTC10 the battery should be clearly visible It is a 20 mm diameter coin cell located 8 inches directly behind the LCD screen The PTC10 only has one battery 4 Remove the battery by pulling the coin cell toward you and sliding it to the left It can be o2 somewhat difficult to remove Install a new battery with the side facing toward the rear of the instrument Replace the PTC10 s lid After turning the PTC10 back on reset the instrument s time and date and any other user MO C settings A new battery should last for 6 years Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 83 Remote programming The PTC10 can be remotely controlled over RS 232 USB Ethernet and the optional GPIB port All of these ports are always enabled and accept the same commands In addition the front panel controls are always enabled To control the PTC10 remotely you transmit lines of ASCII text to one of its ports No action is taken until one of the following end of line characters is received alinefeed decimal 10 hex A n or acarriage return decimal 13 hex D r followed by a linefeed decimal 10 hex A n The PTC s replies always end with a carriage return followed by a linefeed Each line of text sent to the PTC is treated as
235. ise levels and are intended to be used when very precise temperature control is needed The maximum power that the PTC431 can deliver depends on the resistance of the heater see the table below Output Heater resistance Maximum range R Q power W I0 0 50V2A 10 25 4R 25 100 gt 25 2500 R lt 75 0 4R 50V0 6A 75 33 275 2500 R 250 0 04R 50 V0 2 A 250 10 gt 250 2500 R Maximum output power as a function of output range and heater resistance If the heatsink temperature of a DC output card exceeds 60 C the card s internal protection circuitry shuts down the output This is likely to occur if the heater resistance is under 100 if the ambient temperature outside the chassis is above 30 C and or if the system fan is turned off or not working Although up to four PTC431 cards can be installed in a chassis only two can be run at full power at any given time If more than two PTC431 cards are installed their output should be limited to half their maximum value either by using the 20V range or by setting the upper limit to 50W Hardware faults The PTC431 can detect certain unsafe operating conditions If such a condition occurs and persists for more than 2 seconds the PTC431 s output is shut down to re enable the output disable all outputs by pressing the Output Enable key then re enable the outputs by pressing the Output Enable key twice In addition one of the following error messages appears in a pop up
236. iven with 5V signals while the LCD controller produces 3 3V signals a 3 3 to 5 V level translator is provided Also on the ColdFire s data bus are the Ethernet and USB host device controllers U440 and U600 Voltage supervisor U101 resets the ColdFire if the 3 3V supply voltage drops below 3 1V or if the reset button S101 is pressed The supervisor also provides battery power to the SRAM and prevents the SRAM chip select from going low when power to the rest of the card is shut off Other components on the CPU card include a real time clock which runs off of battery power when the PTC is switched off and transceivers that interface the ColdFire to the backplane bus The EEPROM and battery monitor circuits are not used The CPU card has an RS 232 transceiver which is only used for updating the firmware and for debugging the RS 232 transceiver for user communications is on the backplane board PTC221 backplane SRS The backplane contains a proprietary parallel bus that connects the CPU card to the six I O cards and the front panel The bus has four wide and two narrow I O card slots Except for their width all six slots are equivalent The backplane also includes 5V and 3 5V switching power supplies for the PTC s digital components A 1 8V digital supply is available but not used 8 20 and 20V switching supplies provide power for most of the PTC s low noise analog circuitry Jumper J203 connects the analog supply ground to the syste
237. izes C 473 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C521 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C522 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 523 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 524 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 531 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 532 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 533 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 534 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 541 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 542 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 543 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 544 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 601 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 602 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 603 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 604 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 605 5 00366 552 18P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C 606 5 00366 552 18P Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO C621 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes C 631 5 00299 568 AU Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R SRS PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 155 C 632 C 633 C 641 C 642 C 643 C 644 C 645 C 646 C 647 C 648 D 301 D 302 D 303 D 304 D 305
238. k is started the ramp temperature automatically increases or decreases at the ramp rate until it reaches the setpoint This feature allows you to bring your system up to its operating temperature at a controlled rate The actual temperature of your experimental system should PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 117 SRS ideally follow the ramp temperature perhaps lagging a few seconds behind depending on how quickly your system responds and how well the PID parameters have been tuned Once it reaches the setpoint the ramp temperature remains at the setpoint as long as the feedback is running If the setpoint is changed the ramp temperature automatically increases or decreases at the ramp rate until it reaches the setpoint If the feedback is disabled the ramp temperature immediately begins to track the sensor temperature To start a temperature ramp enable the feedback set the ramp rate and then change Channel PID Setpoint to the desired end point of the ramp In general the ramp temperature should not be directly set by the user except perhaps as a way to cancel a ramp for example Out1 PID RampT Outl PID setpoint tells the PTC10 to stop gradually ramping the temperature and instead proceed as quickly as possible to the setpoint On the other hand Out1 PID setpoint Out1 PID RampT stops ramping by freezing the temperature at its current value The following line can be used to pause a mac
239. ke sure the Channel screen is still visible and touch the tab for the heater output channel Out 1 in this example In the first PID column touch the Input button A window showing all available input channels appears Touch the temperature input channel 3A in this example Sensor 3A is now the PID input for heater Out 1 PID input channel Out 2 3A 4A 0 000 W 24 16 C 24 65 C 12 3B 4B 2480 C 2436 C v2 3C 4C 24 85 C 130 9 C R2 3D 4D 25 27 C Cold J 3 25 79 C Next touch the Setpoint button and enter the desired temperature Touch OK once you ve entered the setpoint Since the feedback is disabled the temperature will not actually start to change yet Feedback setpoint Old value 0 0000 C OK PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 3l Configure the feedback autotuner Next provide a rough estimate of the response time and response magnitude of whatever system you re heating or cooling Make sure the Channel screen is showing with the tab for the heater output channel selected In the Tune column look at the Step Y and Lag controls If the output is increased to the value shown in Step Y would you expect to see a noticeable rise in temperature within the time shown in Lag Would the amount of power shown in Step Y damage your system Change these values if necessary Touch D and set the derivative gain to 1 Any nonzero
240. l other leads entering the enclosure The filters should be located at the point where the wires enter the enclosure and the enclosure itself should be grounded D sub and circular connectors with built in filters as well as individual filters can be obtained from Spectrum Advanced Specialty Products We have found their 4000 pF pi filters to be effective These filters include capacitors to ground which should be connected either to the ground pin pin 3 of the PTC323 s sensor input connector or to chassis ground PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 9 SRS The PTC323 can read AD590 sensors if the sensor is connected in series with a 2 kO resistor as shown below Note that the diagram shows the sensor connected to channel A but it can also be connected to channel B The diagram shows the back of the DB9 connector that is the side that you solder to with pin 1 in the bottom right corner The 2 kQ resistor must have a low temperature coefficient of resistance TCR Ordinary resistors have a TCR of about 100 ppm C which means that the sensor reading will drift upward by about 30 mK for each 1 C rise in ambient temperature Thermal drift can be reduced substantially by using a 5 ppm C resistor available from SRS ask for part number 4 02502 457 For even better stability a 1 ppm C resistor such as the Riedon USR2G 2KX1 available from Digi Key can be used In any case to minimize noise and drift the resistor s
241. ll be set to a round number of units off by default save a buffer as a text file save the current plot as a GIF in the current directory selects the indicated graph O first graph to be added second graph etc add or remove a graph from the graph selection window sets the current size and position of the FileGrapher window as the default store positive negative marks from the specified buffer for use with break and riseStats set the x and y size of the plot in pixels no change list names of all currently existing buffers show tick marks on all plotted buffers apply a Gaussian smoothing filter specify radius in data points subtract two buffers buffer buffer buffer2 subtract constant buffer buffer constant subtract average buffer buffer ave buffer subtract initial buffer buffer buffer 0 undoes the last operation that modified the indicated buffer weighted average buffer buffer buffer2 weighting factor 1 weighting factor Sets the X axis label to dateTime date and time elapsedTime elapsed time or off none Label the Y axis of the graph with the indicated text PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 139 SRS Circuit description Each of the PTC10 s circuit boards has a 4 digit model number i e PTC2104 The first number indicates the general type of board 2 core system board 3 input card 4 output card 5
242. ll creates a constant offset in temperature readings but the offset is usually too small to be of PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 36 concern with thermocouple readings and can be removed from RTD readings using current reversal By moving the Trigger source jumper on the motherboard to the 1 MHz clock position it is possible to set the A D rate to any value between 10 and 1000 ms with a resolution of 1 us note that the jumper should only be moved while the system is switched off However the A D conversions will no longer be perfectly synchronized to the AC line voltage even if the A D rate is set to a multiple of the line period As a result low frequency sinusoidal noise may appear in your temperature sensor readings The frequency of the noise is the difference between the AC line frequency and the closest multiple of the ADC conversion rate in Hertz For example if the A D conversion rate is 10 Hz and the AC line frequency is 60 1 Hz a sine wave with a frequency of 60 1 6 10 0 1 Hz may be superimposed on your temperature readings Log rate The log rate controls how often channel readings are logged The log rate can be set independently for each channel the default is one point per second Normally the time between log points should be longer than the time between A D samples in which case multiple A D readings are averaged together to create each logged value If on the other hand the tim
243. lly no current flows through the V leads which allows them to accurately transmit the sensor voltage to the PTC323 Using four wires instead of two ensures that the PTC323 measures the resistance of the sensor and not the wires going to the sensor TM V Sensor l l Four wire sensors usually have two wires of one color attached to one side of the RTD and two of a second color attached to the other side In this case the RTD should be wired to thePTC10 in one of the following two ways assuming the leads are white and black Vv l Ground V 1 Option White White Unconnected Black Black Option 2 Black Black Unconnected White White Two wire sensors can be converted to four wire sensors by soldering two additional wires one on each side of the sensing element and as close to the sensing element as possible The higher the resistance of an RTD or thermistor the more sensitive it is to ambient electromagnetic noise Therefore it s important in these cases to use a shielded cable Diode sensors can be connected in either direction If no reading appears change the current direction from Forward to Reverse Diode sensors are especially susceptible to electromagnetic noise because the diode rectifies any noise picked up by the sensor leads increasing the measured voltage It may be necessary to place the sample within an electromagnetically shielded enclosure and to put EMI filters not only the on the sensor leads but also on al
244. lm 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor SMT Resistor Misc Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 1 100ppm Chip Res SMT Thick Film 1 100ppm Chip Res SMT Thick Film 1 100ppm Chip Res SMT Thick Film 1 100ppm Chip Res SMT Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 156 an I o 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 30 302 303 443 60 602 632 64 01 01 ole M rns u 201 u 202 U 204 U 206 U 302 U 303 U 304 u 401 u 403 u 430 u 440 u 470 U 520 U 530 U 540 u 600 u 610 u 620 Y 101 Y 201 Y 440 Y 601 Z0 Z0 SRS 4 01406 461 4 009 4 009 1 463 1 463 4 01727 463 4 01727 463 4 01727 463 4 009 4 009 4 009 4 009 4 009 4 009 4 009 4 009 4 009 1 463 1 463 1 463 1 463 0 463 0 463 1 463 1 463 0 463 4 00912 463 4 00912 463 4 01727 463 4 01727 463 2 0005 3 208 3 01229 360 3 01230 360 3 01231 36
245. low Default Relay value Relay value Relay state gt 0 1 2 4 or8 power off alarm off alarm on Back panel pin gt NC NO NC NO NC NO Polarity 0 Closed Open Closed Open Open Closed Polarity Closed Open Open Closed Closed Open The default state is what the relays revert to when the PTC10 is switched off If no alarms are configured they will stay in that state when the PTC10 is turned back on again Channel screen Alarm column Each input channel has an alarm If enabled the alarm is triggered if any of the following conditions occur The input or its rate of change exceeds the user specified minimum and maximum values The input exceeds the measurement range of the I O card The sensor is disconnected except on analog I O channels which cannot detect disconnected sensors When an alarm is triggered it can do any of the following Play a sound Triggera relay on the digital I O card Shut off an output channel Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 67 SRS The alarm can be programmed to remain triggered until it is manually shut off latching alarm or to shut itself off as soon as the input returns to a value within the alarm limits non latching alarm The alarm can also be programmed to ignore momentary glitches To determine which alarms are currently triggered look at the Select screen A small white dot in the upper right corner of a button i
246. m C RMS noise 3 uV RTDs Range 0 10 30 100 3000 1 3 30 300 250 kQ 2 5 MQ or auto Excitation 10 Q range 3 mA 30 Q range 3 mA 100 Q range 2 mA 300 Q range 1 mA 1 kQ range 500 uA 3 kQ range 200 uA 1 kO range 50 uA 30 kO range 50 uA 100 kO range 5 uA 300 kO range 5 uA 2 5 MO range 1 uA Initial accuracy AC current at midrange 10 Q range 0 005 Q 30 Q range 0 005 Q 100 Q range 0 008 Q 300 Q range 0 015 Q 50 mK for Pt100 RTD at 25 C PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller 1 kQ range 3 kQ range 10 kO range 30 kO range 100 kO range 300 kO range 2 5 MO range Specifications xi 0 05 Q 0 10 0 25 0 10 40 130 3 kQ Typical drift due to temperature at midrange 100 range 300 range 100 0 range 300 Q range 1 kQ range 3 kQ range 10 kO range 30 kO range 100 kO range 300 kO range 2 5 MO range RMS noise at midrange 100 range 300 range 100 0 range 300 Q range 1 kO range 3 kQ range 10 kO range 30 kO range 100 kO range 300 kO range 2 5 MO range 0 00010 C 0 00010 C 0 00020 C 0 00040 C 0 0010 C 0 0030 C 0 010 C 0 020 C 10 C 20 C 500 C 0 0001 Q 0 0001 Q 0 0002 Q 0 0003 Q 1 4 mK for Pt100 RTD at 25 C 0 0007 Q 0 002 Q 0 007 Q 0 008 Q 0 120 0 20 10 0 PTC330 thermocouple reader Inputs Connector Thermocouple types Range Type E Type J Type K Type N Type T Input capacitance Accuracy Noise Drift du
247. m ground if removed the analog supplies operate with a floating ground A circuit is available U201 U202 to synchronize the switching frequency of the various switching supplies with each other potentially reducing noise The circuit is normally not used since it doesn t have a noticeable effect on noise levels An AC power bus J100 J104 distributes 120 or 220VAC power to any PTC420 AC output cards that are installed The AC power connectors have a lifetime of 25 mate unmate cycles Connected to the AC bus is a line trigger circuit that synchronizes the A D sampling actually the CONV signal see the description of pin C18 below with the 50 or 60 Hz line frequency If this circuit fails the PTC may become unresponsive Jumper J160 can be used to synchronize the PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 141 SRS CONV signal to a 1 MHz clock instead of the line frequency in this case the A D sampling period can be set to any integer multiple of 1 us rather than being limited to an integer multiple of the line period but 60 Hz interference is inevitable Jumper J160 should not be moved while the PTC is turned on The pinout of the I O card connectors on the backplane bus is described below The pin numbers and some pin names are printed next to each I O card s backplane connector Power A31 A32 8V An analog supply used to generate 5V B31 B32 20V An analog supply used to generate t 15V C
248. mands Erases all locally stored macros Does not affect macros stored on USB memory devices RST The RST instruction is equivalent to turning the instrument off and back on again except the Power On bit of the Event Status Register is not set RST has the following effects Outputs are disabled as if the Output enable button were pressed All currently running macros are stopped regardless of whether the macros were started by the GPIB interface another I O port or the Program screen The instrument returns to the Select screen Partially received instructions on all I O ports are cleared All pending transmissions on all I O ports are cancelled The error queues for all I O ports are cleared The plot screen returns to showing the most recent data on autoscaled Y axes The instrument automatically triggers at the rate set with the A D rate control PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 99 Clears all locally stored log data Logs on USB devices are not affected If data is not being logged to a USB storage device the Plot screen shows no accumulated data immediately after a RST command SRE integer SRE Sets or gets the value of the Service Request Enable SRE register If a bit of the Status Byte register is set and the same bit of SRE is also set a GPIB Service Request is generated STB Returns the value of the Status Byte STB register The 8 bits of
249. meric input screen where you can type 1 Touch OK and you ll get a second menu where you can enter the units s The completed instruction will pause the program for one second Next enter the instruction program print world followed by program pause 1 s Finally enter the instruction 3 This makes the program repeat everything between the square brackets three times Press the start button While the program is running the current instruction is highlighted and the total number of repetitions as well as the number of repetitions remaining appears next to the right square bracket In addition while the program is running a new tab labeled New program appears at the top of the screen By touching this tab you can enter and start a second program while the first program is still running gt lI rogram print hello Save Delete program pause 1 000 s Input program print world program print hello program p Program pause 1 000 s 2 3 hue ges gt hello gt world gt hello world When the program is done the messages hello and world should appear three times in the Messages window Once the program is finished you can press the start button to run the program again the Save button to save the program or the Clear button to erase the program and the Messages window Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 61 Running c
250. meric value that indicates the ratio between the signal and reference resistances Since the reference resistance is known the signal resistance can be calculated The accuracy of the PTC321 therefore depends on the stability of resistor R200 To reduce noise the analog section is isolated from the digital section with optoisolators ISO610 IOS611 and ISO630 SPI to parallel converter U640 has four outputs ANA CSO ANA CS3 that select one of the four ADCs for SPI communication and four outputs that control the current direction of each channel The BUSY signal of channel 0 s ADC which is high whenever an ADC conversion is occurring is passed to the microcontroller through an optoisolator without this signal the microcontroller may freeze up An Atmel ATmega64 microcontroller receives data from the ADCs and applies a temperature dependant 4 coefficient polynomial calibration Temperature sensor U720 monitors the temperature of transistor Q721 which indicates the approximate temperature of the circuit board To compensate for thermal drift the PTC321 is calibrated at circuit board temperatures of 25 and 35 degrees C The microcontroller continuously monitors the circuit board temperature and interpolates between the two calibrations as necessary The output of the PTC321 is an accurate resistance value the PTC s main processor is responsible for converting that value to a temperature PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit
251. mmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 119 221 Locked parameter The parameter is locked on the front panel the control is grayed out and cannot be changed 222 Argument out of range The argument was a numeric value and was too large or too small 224 Bad argument The argument must be chosen from a list of possible values and the argument provided is not on the list 225 Out of memory At attempt was made to define a macro but ten macros are already defined in RAM Startup macro Each time the PTC boots up it looks for a macro called Startup If the macro has been saved in the internal RAM or in a Macros folder on an attached USB storage device it is automatically run For example the following remote command defines a startup macro that displays a message each time the PTC boots up define Startup popup Power has cycled Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 120 Sample macros The sample macros are shown on multiple lines for clarity but if they are sent to the PTC10 via the RS 232 GPIB USB or Ethernet port each macro must be formatted as a single line otherwise each line will be treated as a separate macro The sample macros can be used as written by saving them to a USB device as follows 1 Enter the macro into a text editor such as Notepad Save the macro as an ASCII text file with the extension txt Copy the file into a directory named mac
252. mp is set to zero ramping is disabled and the PTC10 heats or cools your system at the maximum possible rate Ramp T The Ramp T button shows the temperature that the PID feedback is currently trying to maintain Ramp T is equal to the setpoint unless 1 the feedback is disabled or 2 a temperature ramp is currently in progress If the feedback is disabled Ramp T follows the sensor temperature When the feedback is enabled Ramp T increases or decreases at the ramp rate until it reaches the setpoint This ensures that the temperature of your sample ramps smoothly to the setpoint at the rate specified by the Ramp control If it s preferable to reach the setpoint more quickly touch the Ramp T button and enter the setpoint value Once it reaches the setpoint Ramp T will remain exactly equal to the setpoint until the setpoint is changed When the setpoint is changed Ramp T increases or decreases at the ramp rate until it reaches the new setpoint If the feedback is disabled Ramp T immediately starts to follow the sensor temperature again It doesn t ramp to the sensor temperature because the feedback is now off The Ramp T button can be used to monitor the progress of temperature ramps The sensor temperature could also be used for this purpose but is subject to noise external disturbances and other artifacts that in some cases could make it difficult to determine the intended temperature P Sets the proportional gain factor The PID equati
253. n a single line Therefore if the command xX 10 2 is sent over the serial port and at a later time the command dx is sent over the serial port the response is 0 because the PTC runs each line of text as a separate macro and the variable x has not been defined in the second macro The four basic arithmetic operations power bitwise and amp and bitwise or can be applied to variables X 2 x 8 dx 1 x 2 6 X 7 4 x 2 dx amp 2 dx 2 Spaces are not allowed before the and operators The equals sign is optional and can be replaced with a space Once defined a variable can be substituted for any numeric argument For example the macro y 5 Outl y sets the value of channel Out 1 to 5 When lt variable gt is used as an argument a question mark can optionally be added after the variable name to indicate that the variable is being queried y 5 Outl y Variables can be used within conditional statements The macro Ases PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 93 x 0 while x lt 5 x 1 Outl x pause 1 s cycles through the while loop five times at a rate of once per second setting channel Out 1 to 1 2 3 4 and then 5 The PTC10 s macro system does not support equations For example a statement of the form Hx y 2 is not allowed More generally when a variable is use
254. nd Unexpected output current The PTC430 s output is off but current is flowing into the negative terminal anyway This error may indicate that the heater is shorted to a power source other than the PTC430 It can also indicate a failure of the PTC430 s current output circuitry DC output card overheated Either the resistance of the heater is too low the positive and negative terminals are shorted to each other the PTC10 s chassis fan has been turned off or the chassis fan is no longer functioning Try reducing the maximum output voltage or current and make sure the front panel fan is running PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 14 To re enable the PTC430 s output disable the outputs by pressing the Output Enable key then re enable the outputs by pressing the Output Enable key twice PTC431 100W DC output card SRS The PTC431 DC output card can deliver up to 100 W of power and is intended for precise control of small heaters The card offers two voltage ranges 50 V and 20 V and three current ranges 2A 0 6A and 0 2A An auto range feature continuously adjusts the current and voltage ranges to the smallest values needed to achieve the power specified with the channel s Hi Lmt setting The 20V range can be used to limit the output voltage for safety purposes Selecting this range does not otherwise affect the performance of the card On the other hand the 0 6A and 0 2A current ranges offer lower no
255. nd task Using the diff function on channel V1 the difference between the actual temperature and the feedback setpoint can be plotted This can be helpful for monitoring the accuracy of setpoint ramps s Linearizing outputs when interfacing with external power supplies For applications that require more heater power than the PTC10 can deliver the PTC10 s analog outputs can be used to control a programmable power supply Since the analog input on programmable power supplies usually sets the voltage or current supplied to the heater the temperature rise of the heater roughly depends on the square of the PTC s output For example if a 1 V output increases the temperature by 1 degree over ambient a 2 V output would increase the temperature by about 4 degrees Such variation in the gain of the feedback system causes sluggish response at low output values and or feedback oscillations at high outputs Feedback performance can be made more consistent by linearizing the PID output vs temperature response curve One way to linearize the PID output is to apply a custom calibration table to the output channel see page 32 for a description of how to make and upload calibration tables In this case the calibration table is a file containing comma separated data in the format X1 Y1 X2 Y2 where Xn is the analog output in volts to be produced when the PID algorithm requests output PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Pr
256. ndicates that the channel s alarm is in the triggered state It s very important to set at least one alarm if your heater can output enough power to damage your system The alarm should be configured to disable the heater output when triggered For additional protection the heater output can be routed through one of the PTC10 s relays and the relay associated with the alarm Without such a safety mechanism it s possible for the PTC10 to enter a runaway feedback condition if a sensor becomes unplugged or malfunctions or if the PID feedback is incorrectly set up The following controls are available for input channels only Status Indicates if an alarm condition is currently present on this channel If a latching alarm has been triggered touch the Status control and set its status to Off to turn the alarm off This control can also be used to artificially turn the alarm on to test the sound output channel disabling and GPIB status reporting To test an alarm enable the alarm with the Mode control and then set its Status to On The alarm immediately turns on If the alarm is non latching it turns off in less than a second if it is latching it stays on until the Status is set to Off The Lag setting has no effect on this test Mode Enables or disables the alarm The following three alarm modes can be selected Off the alarm never sounds Level the alarm sounds whenever the input exceeds the values set with the Min and Max c
257. nel other than the output of a PTC430 DC output card produces an assembly time not a valid instruction error lt channel gt Follow channel name This instruction is only available for virtual channels channels V1 V2 and V3 that are configured as inputs If the argument is a valid channel name the value of the virtual channel is updated with the value of the argument channel each time an ADC conversion occurs To exit follow mode issue the Follow instruction with an empty argument PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 109 SRS lt channel gt IO type Input Set out Meas out This instruction is only available for output channels It determines the channel s direction Not all options are available for every output channel If set to Input the channel does not output anything but just measures whatever value is present If the IO type is Set out the channel outputs voltage current or power and the channel reading reflects the most recently requested output regardless of what value actually appears on the output If the IO type is Meas out an ADC is used to measure the output and the channel value reflects the ADC reading The difference between Set out and Meas out is especially noticeable with an AC output card Errors If a channel s direction cannot be changed due to hardware limitations attempting to set its IO type generates a run time locked paramet
258. nes that the cold junction is at 25 C The calibration table indicates that the voltage of a type K thermocouple at 25 C is 1 000 mV So we add 1 mV to the reading and look up the result 5 829 mV in the calibration table The result is the temperature of the inaccurately named hot junction 196 C Choosing a thermocouple Thermocouples are inexpensive and can sense a wide range of temperatures but without frequent calibration they are accurate to no more than 1 C partly because they tend to oxidize or otherwise react with gases in their environment Thermocouples made from thinner wires oxidize more quickly and therefore exhibit more calibration drift than heavier gauge thermocouples When selecting a thermocouple type there s generally a tradeoff between sensitivity and stability That is thermocouples that produce the largest voltages also have a lot of calibration drift With the exception of type B the letters that describe thermocouples E J K etc appear to be assigned in order of increasing long term stability with type C being the least stable and type T the most Therefore if your application requires low noise it might be best to choose type E for the best absolute accuracy type T might be more appropriate Each PTC330 input supports one of the following thermocouple types Type E thermocouples have one chromel 90 nickel 10 chromium and one constantan 60 copper 40 nickel wire It has a large voltage
259. never you switch to another screen and back to the Plot screen If you don t touch the PTC s controls the offset is never recalculated Using the ponytail plot does not affect how channel values are logged the offsets are only applied to the plots not to the log files Ponytail plot 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min In ponytail plot mode all traces are offset so that they start at zero SRS PTC10 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 54 Zooming and panning To change the X axis scale of a plot touch anywhere inside the plot Touch the right half of the plot to zoom in Touch the left half to zoom out Drag to pan Whenever the most recent data is visible on the graph the graph automatically scrolls to keep the most recent data visible If the most recent data is not visible the words X lock appear in the bottom left corner of the screen to indicate that scrolling is disabled To show current data and resume scrolling touch the words X lock Graphs that appear together on a screen always have the same X axis range However each selection group has its own independent X axis range Touch this area Touch this area to zoom out to zoom in How to change the X axis scale 2 Sethe oa Touch this area and drag to pan How to pan the graph horizontally SRS PTC10 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 55 By default the PTC10 continually adjusts the Y axis scale to accommodate all
260. ng separate sense and excitation leads However for convenience the PTC320 can also read sensors attached with only two leads To make a two wire measurement connect one end of the sensor to pin 1 Excitation and the other to pin 5 Excitation An inaccuracy is introduced because the resistance of the leads affects the measurement however some thermistors have such a high resistance that the lead resistance may be negligible in comparison A four wire measurement eliminates the effect of lead resistance In the four wire configuration two of the wires carry the excitation current while the other two wires sense the voltage that the current produces across the sensor RTDs sold with four wires normally have two wires of one color both attached to one side of the RTD and two of a different color attached to the other side In this case the RTD should be wired to the PTC320 in one of the following two ways assuming the leads are white and black Pinl Pin2 Pin 3 Pin4 Pin5 Option White White Unconnected Black Black Option 2 Black Black Unconnected White White RTDs with two wires can be modified by connecting two additional wires one on each side of the sensing element and as close to the sensing element as possible The higher the resistance of a sensor the more its leads pick up noise from ambient electromagnetic radiation The noise level of high resistance thermistors in particular can often be improved by using a shi
261. nput sched ling 5 1 1 rrr tree eiecti aeaii 121 Show channels with tripped alarms on the Numeric screen sse 122 Make a virtual channel show the PID setpoint essere 122 Linearizing outputs when interfacing with external power supplies 122 Control instrument functions with the digital IO lines seeeerr 123 Drive a solid state relay with the digital IO lines essent 124 PC applications PT CFileConverter sc isscisssisssssssssssssssssesssssssesssssssesssssssesssssssessseesseesessssesssssssesssssssesssssssess 128 lal CI PTT TTE TETTE ILIO 130 File menik ios coercere eere TOUR NEIN ON ON AID DO ID ID OIN IM LM MO DID 130 Edit fient mde oie be nem ERTUEO DERE 130 PROCESS MENUS ces entes eua Ier OE LOU eM eU ADU OM E ans 132 Specialienil cs SURE UDURUDQNRRORNNURENEEUNUNRRERUBUREDURUNDRUNURENERUNUS 134 Command line and macro instructions cccccccesccesccsscescessccecesecsscesecesecsscessceseensceeeeseenes 136 Circuit description SRS Core system cards ee eeeeee eee esee esee seen esset essa set es asset esas sete en asse sess s s tense i S ESTES 140 PDE PU Oeil eC EE 140 PRC22 ll backplarie intr tre rrr nna net re re Rer Pe Er HERE 140 PTC231 front panel PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Contents iii PTC240 GPIB card nna doi e n RE ER AERA RELATO TATEEC 143 lle rr
262. nstant should be longer than the cycle time of the output When a sensor is disconnected and then reconnected to a lowpass filtered channel the PTC allows one second for the reading to settle During this time no reading appears The output of the lowpass filter is then set equal to the next ADC reading so that you don t have to wait for the reading to gradually settle to its new value Units PTC420 AC output card and PTC430 DC output card only By default the output of these heater driver cards is measured in watts Using the Units button the output units of the AC output card can be changed to i e percentage of the maximum output and the output units of the DC output card can be changed to A heater current or V heater voltage d dt input channels only Derivative If this control is set to On the value of the channel is replaced with its derivative with respect to time Since the derivative is normally somewhat noisy the lowpass filter should be enabled when the derivative filter is used Follow virtual input channels only This button only appears for virtual channels that are configured as inputs Once a channel is selected the virtual channel s value continuously follows the value of the selected channel Difference derivative or other filters may be applied to the virtual channel to modify the value For example select Follow then on the menu that appears touch the button for channel 3A
263. nt still passes through a reference resistor although the reference resistor voltage is not actually used In this case the lowest resistance reference is selected Select current source and forward reverse current Multiplexer U230 controls the direction of current flow through both the temperature sensor and the reference resistor ADC input buffers These FET input op amps isolate the signal and reference resistors from the current produced or drawn by the ADC input pins The buffers are equipped with RC networks that allow them to drive 1 uF capacitors PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 145 Compensate for current direction When reverse current is selected a multiplexer ensures that the voltage at the ADC s REF pin is more positive than the voltage at the REF pin The multiplexer creates a significant voltage drop because the ADC s REF and REF pins draw a few microamps of current To compensate for this voltage drop the feedback network of each ADC input buffer is connected through the multiplexer to a point as close as possible to the actual ADC input pins ADC a 24 bit delta sigma ADC the LTC2440 s input range is 0 5 Vref 0 5 Vref where Vref is the difference between the voltages at pins ref and ref Heater driver this feature is not used Ambient temperature sensor this feature is not used PC board temperature sensor used to compensate for thermal drift Each PTC320 is calibra
264. nu system other A D rate 20 ms 40 ms 60 ms 80 ms 100 ms 120 ms 140 ms 160 ms 180 ms 200 ms 220 ms 240 ms 260 ms 280 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms 800 ms 900 ms 1000 ms 50 Hz line frequency system other A D rate 16 7 ms 33 3 ms 50 ms 66 7 ms 83 3 ms 100 ms 150 ms 200 ms 250 ms 350 ms 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms 800 ms 900 ms 1000 ms 60 Hz line frequency system other A D rate float MHz trigger source Sets the A D conversion time This setting also determines how often PID feedback loops run Different arguments are available depending on whether the line frequency is 50 or 60 Hz If the Trigger source jumper on the PTC10 s motherboard is moved to the 1 MHz clock position the A D sampling can set to any value between 10 and 1000 ms system other fan off low medium high max auto Controls the system fan speed If a DC output card is in use the fan should be set to max or auto otherwise the system could be permanently damaged Turning the fan off can reduce the accuracy of temperature measurements system other date date string system other time time string Sets the time and date Note that setting the time and date can adversely affect the display of previously acquired data The time string should be in the form 10 57 am while the date string should include the month day and year in that order i e Apr 7 2008 or 4 7 08 system other reset
265. o must consist of one or more complete instructions with arguments Macro calls cannot be used to substitute text into arguments Like normal instructions macro names are not case sensitive However if a macro has the same name as a built in instruction the macro takes precedence if it is called with a capitalized first letter the instruction takes precedence if it is called with a lower case first letter Errors A child macro cannot be both defined and called by a parent macro The result will be either an assembly time not a valid instruction error or if a macro with the child s name already exists the old macro will be called instead of the newly defined one Invalid instructions in the child macro result in assembly time errors when the parent macro is assembled menu Select Numeric Plot Program Channel System Help Output Enable menu integer Makes the system behave as if one of the eight front panel buttons has been pressed The argument can be the name of a front panel button Output enable can be abbreviated Output or a numeric value between 1 and 8 inclusive 1 for Select 2 for Numeric 3 for Plot 4 for Program 5 for Channel 6 for System 7 for Help and 8 for Output Enable Menu 1 advances the PTC to the next menu issuing the Menu 1 instruction while the System menu is showing brings up the Select menu not Help outputEnable on off Enables
266. odify data The operations are applied to an internal copy of the data i e a buffer and do not affect log files on disk When you select an item from the process menu a dialog may appear asking which of the currently plotted buffers you d like to apply the operation to PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 133 SRS Add buffer Adds two buffers together You re asked to select two buffers from among the buffers that are currently plotted the buffer to be modified buffer 1 and the buffer to add buffer 2 When you click Apply or OK each point in buffer 1 is added to the first point in buffer 2 that has a time equal to or greater than the time of the point in buffer 1 Subtract buffer Subtracts one buffer from another Multiply by buffer Multiplies two buffers together Divide by buffer Divides one buffer by another Add constant Adds a constant to each point in a buffer You re asked to select one of the currently plotted buffers and to provide a numeric value When you click Apply or OK the value is added to each point in the selected buffer Subtract constant Subtracts a constant from each point in a buffer Multiply by constant Multiplies each point in a buffer by a constant Divide by constant Divides each point in a buffer by a constant Kelvin to Celsius Assuming the contents of a buffer are expressed in Kelvins converts the data to C Celsius to Kelvin
267. of ten ADC conversions Therefore the values returned by getLog are not as noisy as the values returned by the getOutput and lt channel gt instructions both of which return the result from the most recent ADC conversion only In addition getLog makes it easier to retrieve data acquired at consistent time intervals For example begin by sending this command which retrieves the last point in channel 3A s log getLog 3A last 27 53936 Note that the channel name must be in quotes if it contains a space Next send the following command getLog 3A next 2 1 51 3 15 Each time this command is sent the PTC10 waits until a new point is added to channel 3A s log then returns the new data point Control a temperature The PTC10 can control the temperature of one or more external devices Each device must include a heater or cooler and a temperature sensor that monitors the temperature of whatever is being heated or cooled Each of the PTC10 s output channels has a proportional integral differential PID feedback algorithm that can monitor a temperature reading and determine how much power to send to the heater or cooler The algorithm uses a set of three gain factors to determine how much and how quickly the heater or cooler power should be adjusted when the temperature deviates from its desired value These gain factors must be properly set before the PTC10 can control the temperature of your system Start by plugging the heate
268. oftware that can communicate with a standard RS 232 port can then be used to send remote commands to the PTC10 The USB interface is about as fast as the RS 232 interface at its fastest baud rate 250000 baud When a Windows PC is first connected to the PTC10 s USB interface the PC may display a New Hardware Found dialog If it does the USB drivers package for PTC10 should be downloaded from the SRS website www thinksrs com Then in the New Hardware Found dialog click the Have Disk button and point the installer to the gserial inf file in the downloaded package No additional setup is needed The USB driver provided by SRS is not actually a driver it s a text file that tells Windows to use a shared driver usbser sys provided by Microsoft as a normal part of Windows More specifically the PTC10 is a Communications Device Class Abstract Control Model CDC ACM compliant peripherial and since CDC communications are built in to Windows and Macintosh PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 85 it s not necessary to install a driver on those operating systems However Windows requires an information file gserial inf to associate the PTC10 with the appropriate driver On Linux systems the Gadget Serial Driver can be used to communicate with the PTC10 If the PC does not register the presence of the PTC10 unplug the USB cable and plug it back in In addition if the PTC10 is turned off and ba
269. ogramming 123 Yn To produce such a table experimentally set the analog output to a series of different voltages At each analog IO voltage Xn measure the temperature Yn at which the system stabilizes Another way to linearize the PID output is by using a macro to apply a simple equation to the PID output Use a virtual channel for example channel V1 to host the PID feedback loop Set the IO type of channel V1 to Meas out then configure channel V1 s PID loop with the appropriate input sensor and temperature setpoint Set the IO type of analog I O channel 5A to Set out or Meas out and disable channel 5A s PID feedback loop Next run the following macro which sets channel 5A to the square root of channel V1 each time an ADC conversion occurs waitForSample x V1 x 0 5 5A dx JSL Control instrument functions with the digital IO lines This macro enables the feedback for channel Out 1 whenever bit 0 of the digital I O is high and disables the feedback whenever the bit is low The program runs indefinitely start with the feedback turned off Out1 PID mode off this loop repeats indefinitely while 1 wait for DIO bit 0 to go high then turn feedback on while DIO amp 0x01 0 pause 0 25 s Out1 PID mode manual wait for DIO bit 0 to go low then turn feedback off while DIO amp 0x01 1 pause 0 25 s Out1 PID mode off The next macro lets DIO bit 1 control which tem
270. oller Parts List 153 PTC211 CPU board BT101 0 01089 000 BT101A 6 00789 612 C 101 5 00334 569 C 102 5 00601 578 C 103 5 00471 569 C 104 5 00609 578 C 105 5 00609 578 C 106 5 00609 578 C 107 5 00609 578 C 108 5 00609 578 C 109 5 00609 578 C110 5 00609 578 C111 5 00609 578 C112 5 00609 578 C113 5 00609 578 C114 5 00609 578 C115 5 00609 578 C116 5 00609 578 C117 5 00609 578 C118 5 00609 578 C119 5 00609 578 C 120 5 00609 578 C121 5 00609 578 C122 5 00609 578 C 123 5 00609 578 C 124 5 00609 578 C125 5 00609 578 C 126 5 00609 578 C127 5 00609 578 C 128 5 00609 578 C 129 5 00609 578 C 130 5 00609 578 C131 5 00609 578 C 132 5 00609 578 C 201 5 00601 578 C 202 5 00601 578 C 203 5 00601 578 C 204 5 00601 578 C 205 5 00601 578 C 206 5 00601 578 C 207 5 00601 578 C 208 5 00601 578 C 209 5 00601 578 C210 5 00601 578 C211 5 00601 578 C212 5 00601 578 C 213 5 00601 578 C215 5 00601 578 C216 5 00601 578 C218 5 00601 578 C 302 5 00601 578 C 303 5 00601 578 C 304 5 00601 578 C 305 5 00601 578 C 306 5 00601 578 SRS 1065 CR2032 W OUT PN IU T35 0 1UF 16V X7R 10U T16 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 0 oc m oO Eme cU OLS OOO OOO DO IUF 16V X7R 1UF 16V X7R IUF 16V X7R 1UF 16V X7R 1UF 16V X7R 1UF 16V X7R IUF
271. on getLog 3A next the indicated number of times Errors if the channel does not exist a run time error occurs getOutput Returns a single comma separated string containing the current value of all channels getOutput names Returns a single comma separated string containing the names of all channels getOutput units Returns a single comma separated string containing the units of all channels group 1 2 3 4 Changes the channel selection group PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 95 lasttouch Indicates how many seconds have elapsed since the user last touched the touchscreen or pushed a button If the user has not touched the touchscreen or a button since the PTC was turned on the return value indicates how many seconds have elapsed since the PTC10 finished booting macro name gt Once a macro has been defined it can be called by including its name in another macro the parent macro When the parent macro is assembled the macros it calls are expanded to their component instructions Up to six levels of subroutine calls are allowed Variables declared in the parent macro are also valid in and can be modified by the child macro For example define a macro called multiplyXY by sending the following text define multiplyXY x y Subsequently multiplyXY can be called to modify the variables of a parent macro x 3 y 4 multiplyXY dx 12 0000 A subroutine macr
272. on is Output Pe O 5IT eo ei ei e ec F ea ea e D TD ec e1 where P I and D are the derivative gains e is the error the difference between the setpoint and the PID input signal at time t and T is the ADC sampling time Thus larger values of P I or D produce a faster feedback response Increasing P or I tends to create oscillations while increasing D reduces oscillations but adds noise Negative values of P I and D should be used if the output drives a fan or other device that cools the sample Gain Follow mode only In follow mode the input is multiplied by this value before being sent to the output See Zero pt Sets the integral gain factor Integral gain should normally be about one tenth of proportional gain D Sets the derivative gain factor PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 72 Zone This control stores up to eight sets of feedback parameters Each set can be associated with a temperature range or zone and automatically recalled when the setpoint enters that range The zone can also be manually selected ignoring the temperature To view a table of all stored feedback parameters touch the Zone button and then select Edit The table that appears has a row for each zone and columns for the zone s minimum temperature and the P I and D feedback gains By default zone 1 is selected and contains the current values of these parameters the re
273. oncurrent macros Since a macro can run for a long period of time or even indefinitely it s possible to start a new macro before the previous macro has finished It s also possible to run multiple instances of a saved macro simultaneously The PTC can run at most ten concurrent macros including the startup macro macros received over all I O ports and macros started from the Program screen If an eleventh macro is started a Too many macros assembly error is generated and the macro does not run If the PTC10 is turned off and turned back on again macros that were running when the PTC10 was turned off are not restarted Channel screen m PID Tune Name Range Dither Mode P Mode Out 2 50V 1A On On 0 845 Off Value Units Input Step Y 1 058 V Vy 3A 1 000 wy IO type Setpoint B Lag oti Set out 50 00 C 4 795 30 s Low Imt Plot Ramp zone Type 0 000 Wy 1 0 000 s 1 LO TET Hilmt Logging RampT Ffwd 50 00 W Default 50 00 C Status The Channel screen includes controls for all settings that affect individual data channels Sensor calibration PID feedback parameters and alarms are all set up through this screen Note that the layout of the screen varies depending on which channel is selected for example only output channels have PID controls while only input channels have alarm controls Only one channel can be set up at a time One tab appears at the top of the screen for each channel in the curren
274. onditions PTC323 thermistor diode and RTD reader Inputs Two inputs for 4 wire thermistor diode or RTD Connectors One 9 pin D sub socket Thermistors Range 0 10 30 100 3000 1 3 10 30 100 300 kQ 2 5 MQ or auto Excitation current 10 Q range mA 30 Q range 300 uA 100 Q range 100 uA 300 Q range 30 pA 1 kQ range 10 uA 3 kQ range 3 pA 10 kO range 1 uA 30 kO range 300 nA 100 kO range 100 nA 300 kO range 30nA 2 5 MO range 1 uA Initial accuracy AC current at midrange 10 O range 0 007 Q 30 Q range 0 03 Q 100 Q range 0 07 Q 300 Q range 0 25 Q 1 kQ range 0 60 3 kQ range 20 PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller 10 kO range 60 30 kO range 250 100 kO range 1500 300 kO range 1 kQ 2 5 MO range 3 kQ Typical drift due to temperature at midrange Specifications 10 Q range 0 00020 C 30 Q range 0 00040 C 100 Q range 0 0020 C 300 Q range 0 0040 C 1 kQ range t0 010 C 3 kQ range t0 060 C 10 kO range t0 20 C 30 kO range t10 C 100 kO range 30 C 300 kO range 200 C 2 5 MO range 300 C RMS noise DC at midrange 10 Q range 0 0003 0 30 Q range 0 001 0 100 Q range 0 002 0 300 Q range 0 006 Q 1 kQ range 0 02 Q 3 kQ range 0 06 Q 10 kO range 0 20 30 kO range 1 00 100 kO range 60 300 kO range 40 Q 2 5 MO range 100 Diodes Excitation current output 10 uA Initial accuracy t 100 ppm Drift 5 ppm C Voltage input 0 2 5 V Initial accuracy 10 pV 0 01 of reading Drift 5 pp
275. ontrols The alarm also sounds whenever the input is disconnected or the sensor value exceeds the range of the input Rate s the alarm sounds whenever the rate of change of the input in degrees per second exceeds the Min or Max values The alarm also sounds whenever the input is disconnected or the sensor value exceeds the range of the input Latch If set to Yes the alarm once triggered stays on until it is turned off with the Status or Mode control If set to No the alarm turns itself off once the input is again within the alarm limits Mute Temporarily silences the alarm sound but does not otherwise affect the alarm Once this button is touched the alarm stays muted until the alarm condition goes away or until the button is touched again Sound Controls which sound plays when the alarm goes off Output The alarm when triggered can shut off one of the PTC s output channels setting the output to zero and temporarily disabling that channel s feedback loop Once the alarm status returns to Off the output returns to its previous value and the feedback is re enabled This feature can be used to guard against runaway feedback loops or to otherwise protect equipment from damage due to PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 68 SRS excessive temperatures For example one or more backup temperature sensors can be programmed to shut off a PID output to prevent damage in case the primary sensor fails To
276. ort more than one sensor type The available arguments depend on the I O card Changing the sensor type may affect how the PTC hardware acquires data from the sensor For example if the sensor type of a PTC320 I O card is changed from Thermistor to Diode the PTC acquires voltage instead of resistance readings The sensor type also affects the options available in the lt channel gt Cal submenu For example if the sensor type is set to RTD the lt channel gt cal type instruction offers a list of RTD types and settings for the RTD s Callender van Duzen coefficients appear in the lt channel gt cal submenu Select ROX for a ruthenium oxide sensor E J K N and T refer to thermocouple types Since the PTC10 s thermocouple input hardware determines which type of thermocouple can be read the thermocouple type can be queried but not changed with the Sensor instruction Some resistive cryogenic temperature sensors such as Rhodium Iron Germanium and Carbon Glass are not included in the list of available sensor types because they do not have standard calibration curves To use these sensors set the Sensor type to Thermistor RTD or ROX and PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming Ill load a custom calibration table see Custom Calibration Tables in the Introduction of this manual Channel Slew float Output channel of PTC440 TEC driver only Sets the maximum positive and negative rate of
277. ortened to measout Instructions and arguments are normally separated from each other by spaces If an instruction or argument contains spaces it must be enclosed in parentheses or quotation marks otherwise it will be interpreted as multiple instructions and arguments In general this type of mistake is caught before the macro starts to run as a result the macro doesn t run and an error is generated Parentheses can be nested quotation marks cannot Using two quotation marks in a row before an instruction results in an empty instruction assembly error These two instructions are equivalent print Hello world print Hello world If the argument doesn t contain any spaces it s not necessary to enclose it in quotes or parentheses print Hello Whitespace before or after parentheses or quotes is optional Jn A group of instructions can be repeated by enclosing it in square brackets and placing the number of repetitions after the right bracket print Hello pause 1 s print world pause 1 s 3 Whitespace is not necessary before or after square brackets If the left bracket is omitted all instructions from the beginning of the macro to the right bracket are repeated If the right bracket is omitted all instructions after the left bracket do not run A negative number after the right bracket causes the group of instructions to repeat indefinitely Therefore print Hello pause 1 s 1 is equivalent to while 1
278. p Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Resistor Wire Wound Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Switch Momentary Push Button Injection Molded Plastic Switch Momentary Push Button Injection Molded Plastic Switch Momentary Push Button Injection Molded Plastic Switch Momentary Push Button Injection Molded Plastic Switch Momentary Push Button Injection Molded Plastic Switch Momentary Push Button Injection Molded Plastic Switch Momentary Push Button Injection Molded Plastic Switch Momentary Push Button Injection Molded Plastic Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 161 U 301 3 01841 360 LM4871M Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 302 8 00069 800 INVERTER 1000V Miscellaneous U 303 3 00966 360 IRF7103 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 304 3 00959 360 MAX686EEE Integr
279. perature The autotuner can be started with the feedback either on or off Disable or enable derivative feedback Because derivative feedback has a tendency to amplify sensor noise it may sometimes be preferable to disable it If the derivative feedback gain is set to zero before autotuning begins derivative feedback is disabled and the autotuner calculates P and I feedback gains leaving the derivative feedback set to zero In contrast if the derivative feedback gain is initially nonzero the autotuner calculates P I and D feedback gains using a more aggressive algorithm Therefore setting D to a nonzero value the exact value doesn t matter before autotuning produces faster acting feedback but more noise If your temperature sensor is noisy or you re not using a lowpass filter leave D set to zero Set the step size and lag time Two controls on the channel setup screen help the PTC10 to separate the effect of the heater from random temperature fluctuations Step Y controls how much the PTC10 increases the heater output and Lag controls how long the PTC10 waits for a response If either value is too small the PTC10 may after attempting to tune display a message saying that there was an insufficient response If the values are too large tuning will take longer than necessary and your heater will get excessively hot Start tuning To begin tuning go to the channel setup screen and set the tuning mode to Auto If the tuner finishes
280. perature Controller Parts List 176 RN291 RN292 u 110 u 120 u 140 u 210 U 230 U 233 U 234 U 235 U 236 U 240 U 243 U 244 u 250 U 260 u 270 U 271 U 280 u 290 U 300 U 310 Z0 Z0 Z0 Z0 Z0 Z0 Z0 Z0 4 00910 463 4 00911 463 3 01696 360 3 01498 360 3 00413 340 3 01255 360 3 00814 360 3 01821 360 3 01821 360 3 01821 360 3 01821 360 3 00675 360 3 00795 360 3 01256 360 3 01822 360 3 01386 360 3 01257 360 3 01186 360 3 01258 360 3 01366 360 3 01717 360 3 01741 360 0 00187 021 0 00246 043 0 00306 026 0 01092 007 0 01093 007 0 01094 067 0 01095 003 7 01733 720 PTC440 TEC driver C110 C111 C112 C113 C121 C122 C123 C124 C200 C202 C203 C210 C211 C212 C213 C216 C223 C226 C231 C232 C233 C240 C241 C242 C250 C251 C252 C260 C261 SRS 5 00513 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00299 5 00516 5 00520 5 00299 5 00299 5 00399 5 00388 5 00526 5 00388 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00526 5 00299 1 0KX4D 4 7KX4D ATMEGA64 16AC 74ABT16245CMTD LM34DZ LM2586T ADJ 78M05 LTC6102HMS LTC6102HMS LTC6102HMS LTC6102HMS LTC1655 T4AC138 MAX4634EUB LTC2052CS DG408DY LMC6484AIM MAX6241BCSA LTC2433 1CMS DG333ADW MAX6629MUT MAX660M 4 40X1 4PP 8 X 1 16 4 40X3 16PP 78060 563002B00000 MAX02 HF300P 001 AC PTC BRACKET 1U 16V A CASE 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 1
281. perature sensor serves as the input for channel Out 1 s feedback loop x DIO dx amp 2 if bit 1 is clear and the PID input channel is not 3A set the PID input channel to 3A if x 0 amp amp Outl PID input 3A Outl PID input 3A if bit 1 is set and the PID input channel is not 3B set the PID input channel to 3B if x 2 amp amp Outl PID input 3B Outl PID input 3B pause 0 25 s Jat Within an if or while statement the prefix prevents the following text from being treated asa query If the prefix were left out the statement would attempt to compare the name of the PID input channel to the value of channel 3A rather than to the string 3A SRS PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 124 Drive a solid state relay with the digital IO lines In some high power applications the current to a heating or cooling unit is provided by an external power supply and modulated with an external solid state relay SSR To modulate the heater or cooler power and obtain accurate temperature control a variable duty cycle square wave similar to pulse width modulation but typically with a much longer cycle time is required from the PTC10 For example to supply half of the maximum power to the heater the PTC10 would need to turn the relay on for 5 seconds off for 5 seconds on for 5 seconds etc The following procedure transforms the output of a PID feedback
282. ple and the entire system must be as small as possible If the system is an environmental chamber consider using a flow through configuration in which fresh air is continually introduced into the chamber and is heated or cooled before it enters the chamber This can be accomplished using a chassis mount fan with a built in heater This configuration can produce a much quicker response than heating the chamber itself The rate at which the system can be cooled should ideally equal the rate at which it can be heated Systems based on resistive heaters often cool very slowly if they re insulated to protect them from ambient temperature variations or if they operate close to the ambient temperature Because PID feedback uses the same algorithm for both heating and cooling the response time of the feedback will be limited by the cooling rate even while the system is heating up Performance can be dramatically improved either by adding a fan to help cool the system or by using a TEC device which can both heat and cool Ambient temperature variations must also be minimized To achieve 1 mK stability it s often necessary to enclose the temperature controlled system within a larger chamber that s also temperature controlled Basic PID feedback concepts To control a temperature the PTC10 must be connected to a temperature sensor that measures the temperature in question and to a heater or cooler that raises or lowers the temperature when power is applied
283. ply indicates that it takes a single floating point argument Outl value list Out 1 Value float 0 000 1200 If an argument has minimum and maximum values these are shown in the reply In this case Out 1 value takes a single floating point instruction in the range 0 1200 However most arguments do not have minimum or maximum values pause list pause float ms s min hr The pause instruction requires two arguments 1 a floating point argument with no bounds and 2 one of ms s min or hr lt instruction gt help Prints the help text for any instruction that sets some sort of variable The help suffix is not available for program flow instructions such as if while abort and kill while else Conditional statements consist of the if or while statement followed by a condition one or more instructions in curly brackets and possibly an else clause The condition must be in parentheses if it contains spaces or if it compares two or more values The condition can contain numeric values queries that do not require any arguments and comparison operators lt lt gt and gt The condition can also include or operators and amp amp and operators For example the following macro waits until temperature 4A is between 39 and 41 degrees while 4A lt 39 4A gt 40 pause 1 s
284. print Hello pause 1 s list lt submenu gt list lt instruction gt list If appended to the name of any menu System Channel etc or submenu System COM Channel PID etc the list suffix prints the available instructions for the menu or submenu If appended to an instruction the list suffix prints the arguments required for the instruction List on its own prints out a list of top level menus A question mark after the list query is optional The list suffix is only available for instructions that set some sort of variable and is not available for program flow instructions such as if while abort and kill PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 90 SRS Examples the first line in each example is the remote command the second line is the reply Outl list pid Name Value Off Low lmt Hi lmt Units IO type Plot Logging Stats Points Average SD Selected Debug Cycle Reset The reply is a list of instructions that can be appended to Out 1 In the reply the dot at the end of pid indicates that pid is a submenu that is Out 1 pid is not a complete instruction Outl pid list Input P I D Setpoint Mode Step Y Lag Sq root Ramp Memory T min Since Out 1 pid is a submenu the reply lists the instructions available in the submenu Outl pid setpoint list pid Setpoint float Since Out 1 pid setpoint is an instruction the re
285. r and temperature sensor into the PTC10 s back panel The sensor must be in thermal contact with the heater the better the thermal contact is the more precise the temperature control will be Enable the lowpass filter For good PID feedback performance it s important to lowpass filter the temperature input On the Select screen touch the buttons for the heater output and the sensor input that you plan to use making sure that they and no other channels are highlighted In this example we re using heater Out 2 and thermocouple input 3A Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 28 Group 3 r AC out r DC out 1 TC RTD AIO DIO Out 1 Out 2 3A 4A 5A DIO 0 000 W 0 000W 24 6 C 25 19 C 10 00 V 0 3B 4B 5B Relays 2571 C 2519 C 10 00V 0 3C 4C 5C V1 2496 C 1306 C 10 00V 3D 4D 5D V2 24 86 C 10 00 V Cold J 3 26 41 C Press the Channel key At the top of the screen are two tabs one for each of the two channels you selected Touch the tab for the temperature sensor 3A Alarm Cal Name PCB Status Output 3A 30 00 C Off Diff Mode Relay Off None Lopass Latch Min Off No 0 000 C Plot didt Max 1 Off 0 000 C Logging Sound Lag Default 1 beep 0s Touch the Lopass button to display the list of available lowpass filter time constants To get more information about the Lopass setting press the H
286. r chassis terminal A Caution refer to accompanying documents Earth ground terminal Ope o pe PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Specifications SRS Specifications vii PTCIO temperature controller Maximum PID rate Data logging rate Display resolution PID feedback auto tuning Display Alarms Computer interface Power Dimensions Weight Warranty 50 or 60 Hz depending on AC line frequency 10 samples second channel 1 sample hour channel can be set independently for each channel or globally for all channels 0 001 C F K V A W etc if 1000 lt displayed value lt 1000 6 significant figures otherwise Single step response or relay tuning with conservative moderate and aggressive response targets 320 X 240 pixel touchscreen numeric and graphical data displays Upper and lower temperaturelimits or rate of change limits can be set on each channel If exceeded an audio alarm and a relay closure occur USB Ethernet and RS 232 optional GPIB IEEE488 2 10 A 88 to 132 VAC or 176 to 264 VAC 47 to 63 Hz or DC 17 x 5 x 18 WHL 25 lbs One years parts and labor on defects in material and workmanship PTC320 thermistor diode and RTD reader Inputs Connector Thermistors Range Excitation current 300 range 100 0 range 300 Q range 1 kQ range 3 kQ range 10 kO range 30 kO range 100 kO range 300 kO range 2 5 MO range Initial accuracy 300 range 100 0 range 300
287. r internal temperature variations Diff input channels only The value of the channel selected with the Diff button is continuously subtracted from whichever channel is selected in the tab bar at the top of the Channel menu To turn the difference feature off touch Diff then touch whatever channel is currently selected The Diff button then shows an empty value Channels with a difference filter can be used as the input for PID feedback loops in which case the feedback maintains a constant temperature differential between two locations rather than a constant absolute temperature PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 65 SRS Lopass input channels only If a non zero value is selected a 6th order RC lowpass filter is applied to the selected channel The lowpass filter removes noise with a period shorter than the indicated time constant but also increases the effective response time of a sensor The lowpass filter should always be enabled on the temperature inputs of all PID control loops This is especially true when using step response PID tuning or when derivative feedback is enabled i e the derivative gain is nonzero since these algorithms calculate the change in temperature over time and therefore produce poor results if high frequency noise is present The filter s time constant should be just below the response time of the system When using an AC output card for PID control the filter co
288. r network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 168 u 251 u 252 U 260 u 290 u 351 u352 U 360 u 390 u 451 u 452 Uu 460 u 490 U 551 uU 552 U 560 u 590 u 600 u 601 U 640 u 650 u 660 u 670 u 680 u 720 Z0 Z0 Z0 Z0 3 01695 360 3 01695 360 3 01822 360 3 01500 360 3 01695 360 3 01695 360 3 01822 360 3 01500 360 3 01695 360 3 01695 360 3 01822 360 3 01500 360 3 01695 360 3 01695 360 3 01822 360 3 01500 360 3 00663 360 3 00749 360 3 00787 360 3 00814 360 3 01175 360 3 01176 360 3 00542 360 3 01317 360 0 00306 026 1 01106 100 7 01888 720 7 01920 720 MAX4635EUB4 MAX4635EUB4 LTC2052CS LTC2440CGN MAX4635EUB MAX4635EUB LTC2052CS LTC2440CGN MAX4635EUB4 MAX4635EUB4 LTC2052CS LTC2440CGN MAX4635EUB MAX4635EUB4 LTC2052CS LTC2440CGN 74HC08 74HC541 74HC595 78M05 78M15 79M15 AD587 R MAX6627MKA T 4 40X3 16PP 1690450000 PTC BRACKET PTC10 PTC330 thermocouple reader C111 C112 C113 C121 C122 C 123 C 124 C 200 C 201 C202 C 203 C 205 C 206 C 207 C 208 C210 C211 C 220 C 230 C 240 C 250 C 260 C 261 C262 C 264 C 270 C 300 C 301 C 302 C 303 C 305 C 3
289. r output and the temperature on separate graphs Make sure that you can see the temperature begin to rise or fall after the heater output changes If tuning fails let the temperature stabilize and try increasing the step Y or lag before attempting to tune again You may also need to increase the lowpass filter time constant The temperature must be stable when tuning is started Either the feedback must be running and stabilized at the setpoint or the heater must be off and the temperature stabilized at the ambient temperature Set the lowpass filter on the input temperature channel to a value just below the expected response time of the system The step response tuner in particular requires adequate lowpass filtering to produce accurate results Make sure the system doesn t experience any temperature disturbances during the tuning process Since the ideal feedback parameters usually vary with temperature run the tuning algorithm at about the temperature at which the feedback will be used If the system has never been tuned before you may need to tune at room temperature then let the feedback bring the system to its working temperature and re tune at the working temperature The autotuning algorithm assumes that the temperature is a linear function of heater power In most cases it isn t which means that the results produced by the algorithm may not be perfectly accurate and may need to be manually adjusted PTCIO Programmable T
290. r second exceeds the limits The rate of change is calculated over two successive A D conversions and is therefore susceptible to noise lt channel gt alarm mute True False Turns off the alarm sound Has no effect on the alarm relay The alarm stays muted until the alarm condition disappears lt channel gt alarm output channel name Associates an output channel with the alarm This output is shut off whenever the alarm is triggered the output is set to zero and its feedback loop if any is disabled Once the alarm status returns to Off the output returns to its previous value and the feedback loop resumes if it was running to begin with This feature can protect equipment from the excessive temperatures that can occur if a PID feedback loop is poorly tuned To turn this feature off issue the alarm output command with an empty argument i e 4A alarm output lt channel gt alarm relay None A B C D If a digital I O card is installed in slot 6 an alarm can trigger one of its relays The alarm relay instruction determines which of the card s four relays is triggered lt channel gt alarm sound None beep 2 beeps 3 beeps 4 beeps Controls which sound plays if the alarm goes off lt channel gt cal submenu All lt channel gt cal instructions are only available for input channels PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 114 SRS lt channel gt cal A lt channel gt
291. rated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Transformer PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 183 ul u 12 u2 u22 u3 u32 U 360 u 410 u 420 Z0 Zi Z2 Z3 Z4 oooooc SRS 3 01497 360 3 01498 360 3 01343 360 3 00787 360 3 01322 360 3 01460 360 3 00814 360 3 01375 360 3 00741 360 7 01738 720 0 00306 026 0 00306 026 0 01093 007 1 01186 131 ATMEGA162 16AI 74ABT16245CMTD 74HC166D 74HC595 LT1425CS MC7815ACD2T 78M05 74HC86AD 74HC04 PTC DIG I O BRK 4 40X3 16PP 4 40X3 16PP 563002B00000 1690520000 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg
292. recent readings thereby eliminating errors caused by thermal EMFs On the PTC320 this control also offers the ability to switch the excitation current off entirely lt channel gt Current mA 100 pA 10 pA Auto PTC440 TEC driver Determines how much excitation current is passed through the sensor Type alt 0181 to enter the u character on a PC If auto is selected the excitation current is set at every ADC conversion according to the measurement range or sensor resistance see page 63 for a description of how the auto excitation current is determined PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 108 SRS lt channel gt Cycle int seconds This instruction is only available on the PTC420 AC output card The PTC420 has a solid state relay that can either deliver full power or no power to the heater To more precisely control the power delivered to the heater power is switched on for some fraction of a preset cycle period then switched off for the remainder of the period The Cycle instruction sets the length of that period Shortening the cycle period will reduce temperature swings associated with switching the current on and off but will also reduce the lifetime of the relay The cycle time must be between 1 and 240 seconds inclusive Errors Attempting to set the cycle time for any channel other than the output of a PTC420 AC output card produces an assembly time unrecognized instruction error P
293. ree with the type of sensor that is in use Range set to Auto or if a fixed range is selected make sure it s larger than the sensor resistance Current Forward Reverse or AC If the current is off no sensor reading will appear Cal Type must agree with the type of sensor that is in use Cal R0 for RTDs only must agree with the type of sensor that is in use 4 Go to the System Setup screen and change the Units to Sensor Now the reading will appear in ohms or volts instead of degrees Is the value correct 5 If you re using a custom calibration table make sure that the sensor resistance or voltage is within the range of the calibration table 6 If you re using a resistive sensor and the reading in ohms is incorrect remove the sensor and instead connect a resistor of about the same value to the PTC10 If the reading is still incorrect the unit may need to be returned to SRS for recalibration Plot data To plot data on screen 1 On the Select screen select the channels that you d like to plot Make sure that no other channels are selected 2 Press the Plot key on the PTC10 s front panel Once the Plot screen is showing press the Plot key repeatedly to cycle between four screen arrangements One plot for each channel All channels on a single plot Ponytail plot all channels on a single plot offset such that each channel starts at zero Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 24 Test
294. resent portholdoff on off Prevents the IO port that received the parent macro from receiving any more macros until the parent macro has finished running or until a portholdoff off instruction is encountered Same as PHO print string Prints the indicated message The message can be any alphanumeric string up to 128 characters long If the program is selected on the program screen the message appears in the Messages area of the program screen If the program was initiated from the remote interface the message is also sent through the same remote interface that was used to transmit the program to the PTC There is no print query redraw Redraws the current top level menu This instruction closes all pop up windows that may have been showing including input windows the Help window windows produced with the popup instruction the PID status window COM port error and history windows and warning message windows There is no redraw query run lt macro name gt Starts a child macro that runs concurrently with the parent macro The child macro runs invisibly in the background any messages that it generates are not printed and the macro has no effect on the OPC and WAI instructions The parent macro continues to run while the child macro runs The run instruction should only be used when a child macro needs to run in a separate thread from the parent macro Otherwise macros should be called as subroutine
295. resistive unplug it from the PTC10 and measure its resistance with a multimeter Make sure that the resistance is appropriate for the output card PTC420 AC output card 240 3000 120VAC 460 6000 230VAC e PTC430 50W DC output card 10 1kQ e PTC431 100W DC output card 100 1kO Display the heater resistance go to the System screen and in the Display column touch the Extras button and select Show Return to the Select screen Underneath the heater power there should now be buttons for heater current labeled I 1 if the heater output card is in slot 1 voltage V 1 and resistance R 1 Turn the heater on again Is the heater resistance the same as what you measured with a multimeter Is the voltage or current at the maximum that the output can produce Verify that the PID mode is set to off On the channel setup screen make sure that the output s hi limit and range are both greater that the output value that you entered Ifthe output is a PTC440 TEC driver disable and re enable the outputs The PTC440 s output is automatically disabled if you try to output a current when no TEC device is connected or if the voltage exceeds the Vmax setting If you ve previously set up an alarm see Configure the alarm below it could be disabling the output For example if you move a sensor from one input to another remember to disable the alarm on the old input PTCIO Programmabl
296. resses 0 5 select the I O cards 6 selects the front panel 7 is not used and addresses 8 and above select none When low the I O card can send and receive messages from the CPU during which time the card stops all other activity C14 SRDY Slave Ready The I O card inverts the state of this line after reading data or placing data on the bus Each bus transaction starts with SRDY in a high state C15 MRDY Master Ready The CPU inverts the state of this line when it places data on the bus in write mode or after it has read data in read mode Each bus transaction starts with MRDY in a high state C16 R W Read Write If high the selected I O card takes control of the data lines If the CPU holds the R W line high when CS is pulled low the I O card immediately sends its most recent reading from each channel Otherwise the I O card waits to receive data from the CPU PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 142 C17 SIZ16 Transfer size 16 Can be used to enable 16 bit data transfers Currently not used C18 CONV Convert A rising or falling edge on this line puts the I O card into a standby state for 5 ms during which the I O card is inactive The CPU card normally requests the I O card s ADC readings during this period 5 ms after the falling edge the I O card exits the standby state and begins an ADC conversion If it does not receive the CONV signal the I O card never performs any AD
297. rinted Circuit Board Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Thick Film 5 6 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Resistor Misc Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 0 196 25ppm Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 0 196 25ppm Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 0 196 25ppm Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 0 196 25ppm Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm Chip Resistor Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Resistor network SMT Leadless Varistor Zinc Oxide Nonlinear Resistor Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Screw Black All Types Hardware Misc Wire 22 UL1007 FEM Termination Heat Sinks Power En
298. rmistor 1 mA excitation 100 Q Pt RTD LM135 235 335 AD590 592 Initial accuracy 10 pA excitation 1 kQ thermistor 2252 Q thermistor 10 kO thermistor 100 uA excitation 1 kQ thermistor 2252 kO thermistor 10 kQ thermistor 1 mA excitation 100 O Pt RTD LM135 235 335 AD590 592 Thermal drift 10 uA excitation 100 uA excitation 1 mA excitation LM135 235 335 AD592 592 Analog I O Inputs outputs Connector Range Resolution ADC noise Digital I O Digital I O Inputs outputs Connector Relays Outputs SRS 0 70 15 mK 0 60 5 mK 10 4mK 0 1 0 1 5 mK 0 1 0 0 7 mK 0 20 0 5 mK 0 005 Q 6 mK 4 mK RMS 6 mK RMS 1 2 Q 30 mK 10 Q 100 mK 66 Q 150 mK 0 06 Q 1 6 mK 0 1Q 10mK 0 5 0 1 1 mK 0 004 Q 5 mK 70 mK 400 mK sensor at 25 C 4 BNC jacks 10V 24 bit input 16 bit output 30 uV RMS 100 uV p p 10 samples s Specifications 4 voltage I O channels independantly configurable as inputs or outputs 8 optoisolated TTL lines configurable as either 8 inputs or 8 outputs One DB 25F 4 independent SPDT relays xiii PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller SRS Connector Maximum current Maximum voltage One 12 pin 3 5mm header 5A 250 VAC Specifications xiv PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction l SRS Introduction The PTC10 is a high performance general purpose laboratory temperature controller that can monitor and con
299. ro until the ramp is complete while Outl PID RampT Out1 PID setpoint pause 1 s Errors Attempting to set the ramp temperature when no PID input channel is selected produces a run time locked parameter error lt channel gt PID Setpoint lt setpoint gt Sets the PID setpoint The PID loop attempts to keep the input at this value by changing the output Errors Attempting to set the setpoint when no PID input channel is selected produces a run time locked parameter error Issuing a setpoint instruction when the PID mode is set to Follow produces an assembly time Unrecognized instruction error lt channel gt PID T min lt t min gt Sets the minimum temperature of the current PID memory location This instruction has no effect until the PID memory location is set to Auto Errors Attempting to set the minimum zone temperature when no PID input channel is selected produces a run time locked parameter error lt channel gt Tune submenu See the Automatic PID Tuning section of this manual for more information on using these instructions lt channel gt Tune Lag lt seconds gt lt channel gt Tune Step Y lt height gt These parameters provide the PID autotuners with initial guesses of the system s response magnitude and time Step Y controls the height of the step response or relay disturbance while Lag determines how long the tuner waits before it first evaluates the effect of th
300. ros on a USB memory stick or hard drive 2 Plug the USB stick or drive into the PTC10 3 Press the PTC10 s System key A button with the macro s file name should appear in the Macros column Touch the button to start running the macro The button remains highlighted as long as the macro is running Touch the highlighted button to stop the macro To make the macro run automatically whenever the PTC10 boots up enclose the macro in the following statement define Startup lt macroText gt where lt macroText gt is the content of the macro Send the macro over a serial port or run it from a USB stick The macro won t actually run instead a Startup macro is defined that runs each time the PTC10 boots up Temperature profiles SRS The following macro ramps the temperature controlled by channel Out 1 to 100 C at a rate of 1 C second Once the ramp is complete the system pauses for 1 minute at 100 C and then ramps the temperature down to 80 C After another 1 minute pause the system is allowed to cool back to room temperature by changing the feedback setpoint to 0 degrees without ramping The macro is shown as it would appear if entered from the front panel with the optional channel and program prefixes channel Outl PID ramp 1 set the ramp rate channel Outl PID setpoint 100 start a ramp to 100 degrees program waitForRamp wait for the ramp to finish program pause 1 min wait for 1 minute channel Outl PID
301. roups remembers its graph format single multi etc X range and Y range Therefore when you change the selection group the graph s range may also change Single plot Up to eight selected channels are shown together on one graph with a single Y axis If more than eight channels are selected only the first eight are shown 4 min 5 min 6 min min Single plot mode showing the ambient temperature measured by two thermocouples channels 3B and 3C and one Pt 00 RTD 4B RTDs have a much lower noise level than thermocouples Multi plot Each channel is shown in its own graph with an independent Y axis If more than eight channels are selected only the first eight are shown 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min In multi plot mode each sensor gets its own graph The X scale is the same for all 3 graphs but the Y scale is different SRS PTC10 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 53 Custom plot Each channel is assigned to a plot according to its Channel Plot setting 24 65 24 60 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min In custom plot mode the user can manually assign each channel to a graph Here the thermocouple inputs have been assigned to plot and the RTD input to plot 2 Ponytail plot Like Single plot up to eight selected channels are shown together on one graph Each trace is offset by its initial value so that the trace begins at zero The offset is recalculated whenever you touch the graph to zoom or pan or whe
302. rrors can occur PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 87 The instruction tries to change a value that can t be changed for example it tries to set the value of an input channel The instruction existed at assembly time but not at run time for example the name of a channel was changed after assembly and the instruction uses the old channel name The instruction tries to set a parameter to a value outside the allowed limits If a run time error occurs the instruction in question is not executed but the macro continues to run If Verbose is set to Medium or High an error message is sent to the I O port if Verbose is set to Low a message is placed on the error queue Concurrent macros Macro names SRS A macro can run for a long period of time or even indefinitely When the PTC10 receives a macro over an I O port the new macro may start running before the previous macro has finished It s also possible to run multiple instances of a saved macro simultaneously The PTC can run up to 10 concurrent macros received over any one I O port and up to 20 total concurrent macros including the startup macro macros received over all of the I O ports and macros started from the Program screen If more than this number of macros is received a Too many macros assembly error is generated and the macro does not run If the PTC10 is turned off and turned back on again macros that were running when the PTC10
303. s by including their name in the parent macro without the run instruction standby Puts the PTC10 into standby mode in which the outputs are turned off data acquisition is paused macros are paused the front panel display and system fan are shut off and the system does not respond to remote commands The PTC321 s excitation currents remain on and the chassis PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 103 cooling fan may switch on occasionally Press the Output Enable key to exit standby There is no remote command to leave standby mode waitForRamp Pauses the macro until all PID setpoint ramps are complete To wait for a particular channel s setpoint ramp to finish use a while loop for example while Outl PID setpoint Outl PID actual pause 1 s waitForSample Causes the macro to pause until an ADC conversion occurs waitForTune Pauses the macro until all PID tuning processes are complete To wait for a particular channel s tuning process to finish use a while loop for example while Outl Tune Mode Off pause 1 s System submenu SRS System Log submenu system log clear yes no system log clear yes erases all log files from the current folder on the USB device system log clear no has no effect system log clear always returns no system log folder folder name Determines which folder on the USB memory device receives log data If the fold
304. s etc to temperature Follow filter virtual channels only makes the channel equal to another channel Offset gain multiplies a channel by a gain and adds an offset 1 2 3 4 Difference takes the difference between two channels 5 Lowpass filters out noise 6 Derivative takes the derivative of the signal with respect to time The filters can interact with each other For example Ifthe settings of filters 1 4 are changed and the lowpass filter is enabled the effect of the new setting on the sensor reading is lowpass filtered Changing the gain may have unpredictable results if the difference filter is enabled and changing the offset has no effect if the derivative filter is enabled Custom calibration tables have no effect if the follow filter is enabled Custom calibration tables SRS A custom calibration table can be applied to any channel To use a custom calibration create a text file containing the calibration information as described below The name of the file should be the name of the channel plus the extension txt Create a directory named cal within the top level directory of a USB storage device and put one txt file into the directory for each channel to be calibrated Plug the storage device into the PTC10 and the PTC10 automatically loads the files If you are using a calibrated Lake Shore sensor the PTC10 will accept the dat calibration file included with the sensor Just rename the f
305. s one for each of the three current ranges plus one that increases output resolution by outputting a small dithered current The four current sources differ mainly in the resistance of their current sense resistors The microcontroller selects a current range by outputting a 2 bit address IRANGEO IRANGE1 Based on this address address decoder U243 enables one of the current sources In addition switch U244 changes the maximum output of the dither current source to a value equal to one LSB of the main current source A 16 bit DAC U240 sets the desired output current The DAC outputs a value between 0 2 V no output current and 4 0 V highest possible current for the selected range Considering the 2 0A circuit current from the 50V supply flows through sense resistor R251 then through FET Q251 which throttles back the current to the desired level then to the user s heater This high side configuration is safer than the more common low side current source but requires a special high side sense IC U290A The output of this chip is a voltage proportional to the voltage across sense resistor R251 A 0 2V reference voltage offsets U233 s output such that when no current is flowing through R251 the output of U233 is 0 2V while when the maximum current is flowing 2A in this case the output is 4 0 V Switch U290A enables or disables the 2A current source When the control voltage at pin 1 is high the switch output pin 3 is connected to 5V
306. s sesta sse tn sse tns netos 32 milio a 32 Customicalibration tables 31 13 1 9 1 eee peace Le tape ela igo steer ey eese 32 Virtual channels 4 525399899289 999 GU IRAN ERINE MURIS 34 Lossing datato USBcost ceo LIU LIU LU P E E 35 ADC sampling and logged data eese entente reipsa ener netten nent 35 zisiureesadgpetilt 36 Using the system fan eere sees e eese eese nets seen sse tns setas sten s s toss etas etse sten set ens sno 38 Using PID feedback eee eene eene eene eene tense tnn nets netta sesta essen sse assets sets sse ens sno 39 How stable is the PTCIO s feedback control esee 39 Basic PID feedback concepts sss nennen 39 M n al tiis eos UNLESS LATA UA LAD ALAS EREA E 40 Automatic tuning algorithms tette tetennene ees 43 Using the automatic tUner a oir riri tree tet irte ie pbi rer reip ias 46 Front panel controls 1 eee e eee ee ee ee esee eene esee enses tens sese ens sse t essa set ens asse esse set enasue 49 USB logging indicator um keke dnteenekakuntanneadannnadkadnanhcedad 49 SRS PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Contents ii Ed c M 49 Output Enable Key M 49 ESI 50 Numeric
307. sing the Vmon channel s alarm Set the Channel Alarm Mode control to level the Channel Alarm Latch control to yes and the min and max to the desired voltage limits Touch the Channel Alarm Output button and select the TEC output channel The Channel Alarm Lag control can be set to 1 s to prevent noise spikes from inadvertently triggering the alarm or left at 0 s to better protect the TEC from rapid voltage increases PCB RTD thermistor and thermocouple readers only Sets the maximum printed circuit board PCB temperature for all channels on the selected card If the card s temperature exceeds the maximum and System Other Fan is set to Auto the PTC10 increases the fan speed to reduce the card s temperature The PCB control only appears for I O cards that have internal temperature sensors The PCB temperature is always in C regardless of the System Display Units setting The default setting is 30 C Thermal drift of the RTD or thermocouple inputs can be reduced by setting the PCB temperature of one card to a lower value This value should be a few degrees above room temperature i e 25 C Reducing the maximum PCB temperature results in tighter regulation of the PTC10 s internal temperature particularly of the selected card at the expense of more fan noise However if a DC output card is being used the system might sometimes turn up the fan speed to prevent thermal damage to the output card causing large
308. st of the table is empty Touch one of the parameter cells to modify its value If a particular set of parameters is no longer needed touch its zone number in the Delete column to clear the entries for that location r Delete Min P I D 1 10 00 4 997 0 576 10 84 25 00 5 493 0 675 11 14 35 00 4 454 0 407 12 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The PID zone editor To manually select a zone touch the Zone button and select one of the zone numbers 1 8 The feedback parameters immediately change to the values stored in the corresponding row of the Zone table If the selected zone contains empty cells the feedback parameters don t change and are copied into the empty cells Whenever the feedback parameters change for example if the feedback is tuned the selected zone is automatically updated with the new values To have the PTC10 automatically select zones based on the temperature assign each zone a minimum temperature using the Min column of the memory table The min temperatures can be in any order they do not have to be monotonically ascending or descending Next set the zone to Auto The CTC100 automatically selects the zone with the largest Min value that is less than the ramp temperature Ramp T Memory locations without min values are never recalled in auto mode Ffwd Touch the Ffwd button to select a feedforward input channel The value of the selected channel is added to the PID
309. stamp When converting data to a text or HTML file this setting determines how the time of each data point is recorded PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 129 SRS Date and Time records the time to the nearest second in the format March 26 2015 6 43 11 PM Milliseconds since 1970 is a single 64 bit decimal value that indicates how many milliseconds have elapsed since midnight on January 1 1970 Elapsed seconds Elapsed minutes Elapsed hours and Elapsed days record the time as a single floating point value that indicates how much time has elapsed since the first point in the log Resample Check the Resample box to allow PTCFileConverter to downsample or upsample log files If Resample is checked PTCFileConverter either averages points together or duplicates points so that the log rate of the output file is the value set in the Resample period field For example if the input log has one point per second and the Resample Period is set to 10 seconds checking the Resample box produces an output file in which each point is the average of 10 input points Gaps between logfile records see Log File Structure above are not resampled Therefore if the instrument was turned off in the middle of a log or a sensor was unplugged for more than 100 data points the gap in the log file remains even after resampling PTC log files with a large number of d
310. successfully a high pitched tone plays and the feedback mode automatically changes to manual turning the feedback loop on If the tuner was unsuccessful Output Enable was off the heater was unplugged the temperature sensor was unplugged the heater was out of range or the response was insufficient a low pitched tone plays and the feedback mode changes to off disabling feedback control PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 47 SRS When PID tuning is started a window with information about the autotuner s progress appears This window can be dismissed by touching the OK button or any menu key Dismissing the window does not cancel autotuning to cancel autotuning either 1 set the tuning Mode control to Off 2 touch the output channel s Off button or 3 disable all outputs by pressing the Output Enable key If the status window is dismissed it can be shown again by touching the Status button in the output s Channel menu Explanation of error messages produced by the autotuner One of the following messages appears in the Tuning Status window if tuning was unsuccessful If tuning fails and you don t see a message press the Channel gt Tune gt Status button Tuning was cancelled because the response was less than 10 times the noise and drift This message indicates that the heater produced an insufficient temperature response It can result from any of the following factors The temp
311. t selection group select the tab for the channel you want to set up Repeatedly pressing the Channel button cycles through the four selection groups Name Sets the name of the channel The name must have 10 or fewer characters Value If the channel is an input this button shows the most recent reading but is grayed out indicating that the reading can t be changed from the front panel If the channel is an output the reading is not grayed out and pressing this button allows you to enter a new output value However if PID feedback is turned on or Output Enable is off changing the value will have no effect Off Sets the PID feedback mode to Off cancels any PID tuning processes currently operating on the channel and sets the channel s output to zero or the Low Imt value whichever is higher This button is only available for output channels PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 62 SRS Low Imt This control which is only available for output channels sets the minimum output However if the minimum is greater than zero the output is still set to zero whenever outputs are disabled with the Output Enable key Limits are always expressed in the same units as the value The limits should normally be changed when the output units are changed since the limits are not automatically converted to the new units Hi Imt This control which is only available for output channels sets a maximum limit
312. t the auto range or one of the 20 V ranges to prevent thermal shutdown The temperature of the heatsink can be monitored by setting the System Display T PCB button to Show then turning the PTC10 off and back on again A new display labeled T PCB should appear on the Select screen directly underneath the current value of the DC output card If T PCB exceeds 60 C the card s output will be shut down If the 50 V 1 A range is used and the average heater resistance is less than 650 up to three DC output cards can be installed in a single chassis and run at full power simultaneously If four DC output cards are installed and the average output current at any given moment exceeds 0 8A a system reset may occur to protect the power supply from overload If any other range is used or the average heater resistance is greater than 650 up to four DC output cards can be installed in a single chassis and run at full power Hardware faults The PTC430 continuously monitors for unsafe operating conditions If such a condition occurs and persists for more than 2 seconds the PTC430 s output is shut down In addition one of the following error messages appears in a pop up window on the PTC10 s screen Ground fault The PTC430 s output is on and the current flowing out of the card s positive terminal is not the same as the current flowing into the negative terminal This error can occur if one of the leads is shorted to an external grou
313. ted at 25 and 35 C Based on the PC board temperature reading the PTC320 interpolates between these two calibrations PTC321 4 channel RTD reader SRS The PTC321 s analog components are powered by the backplane s 8 20 and 20V analog supplies These supplies are regulated to 5 15 and 15V respectively with on card regulators U650 U660 and U670 The PTC321 has four identical input channels Considering only channel 0 op amp U230A provides a 1 mA excitation current while switch U251 controls the direction of the excitation current through the sensor The excitation current passes through switch U251 which is somewhat prone to static damage then a lowpass T filter intended to prevent static damage and reduce high frequency noise The current passes through the sensor connected to J200 and a precision reference resistor R200 The current then passes through another T filter through switch U251 again and then to ground Four voltages are provided to the ADC s inputs one from each end of the sensor and one from each end of the reference resistor Each voltage is passed through a T filter Diodes D201 4 prevent excessive voltages from damaging op amps U260A D U251 is similarly protected by built in diodes The chopper stabilized op amps U260A D buffer the voltages which is necessary to prevent ADC glitches and to prevent the ADC from injecting change between the RTD and reference resistor The ADC U290 outputs a nu
314. temperature and therefore results in a more stable temperature PTC510 analog I O card This card is included as standard equipment and fits in either of the two narrow I O card slots Each of its four channels can be either an input 10V 24 bit ADC or an output 10V 16 bit DAC Each channel has a red back panel LED that lights up when the channel is an output The analog I O channels can be used as PID inputs or outputs Since each channel can only supply up to 10 mA of current the analog I O can t be used to drive a heater directly but can be connected to an external amplifier If the I O type of an analog I O channel is set out or meas out buttons to configure the channel s PID feedback appear on the Channel Setup screen The corresponding remote instructions are also available If the channel s I O type is input the PID instructions are not available and the PID feedback loop is disabled Instead controls and remote instructions for an alarm lowpass filter difference filter time derivative and offset gain calibration appear These controls disappear the remote instructions are not available and the functions are disabled when the channel is an output PTC520 digital I O card This card is included as standard equipment and fits in either of the two narrow I O card slots although for compatibility with the PTC s alarms it should be installed in slot 6 It offers four relays each capable of passing up
315. ter the units is ignored therefore the XY data must begin on the second line If the display units are C F K or mK the PTC10 automatically converts calibrated readings to the units specified by the System Display Units control If any other units are specified they override the System Display Units control and the control has no effect on the channel s reading Such non standard units can be used for example to convert data to non temperature units All text after the units declaration and before the first numeric value is ignored as long as the text does not contain any numeric values i e digits periods or plus or minus signs If the units declaration is not present all text before the first numeric value is ignored Calibration data The second line of the sample table above contains a calibration point consisting of two numeric values the first is the value that s displayed on the front panel and the second is the corresponding value that s measured or produced at the back panel This line indicates that when the measured value is 100 ohms the PTC10 should show a reading of 0 C The displayed value must be expressed in whichever units are declared in the first line of the calibration table or in Kelvins if no units are declared The measured value must be expressed in the native units of the channel ohms for resistive sensors volts for diode sensors and analog I O channels For heater driver chann
316. the Status Byte are assigned as follows Bit Value Description 7 128 Unassigned Always 0 6 64 Requested Service set when the PTCIO issues a GPIB service request 5 32 Event Summary Bit set when a bit is set in both the ESE and ESR registers 4 l6 Message Available set when data is waiting to be read on the GPIB port 3 8 Unassigned Always 0 2 4 Error Available set when errors are waiting in the error queue This bit will never be set unless System COM Verbose is set to Low 2 Unassigned Always 0 0 Alarm set when an alarm is triggered if the bit that s set in the alarm s mask see the lt channel gt alarm mask instruction is also set in the ASE register TRG Trigger command Identical to the Group Execute Trigger GET bus message Causes all channels to read their outputs The amount of time that it takes to process this command is twice the value of the A D rate setting After receiving a trigger command the PTC10 stops automatically acquiring data The inputs are only read and PID feedback loops only update their outputs when a TRG or GET message is received PID feedback outputs will not function properly unless the PTC receives TRG commands or GET bus messages at the rate specified with the System Other A D rate instruction To resume automatic sampling set the A D rate using the System other A D rate instruction For example System other A D rate 100 sets the PTC to automati
317. the data on the graph Each graph has its own independent Y axis scale To change the Y axis scale for a particular graph touch the area to the left of its Y axis Touch the top third of the Y axis to zoom out Automatic scaling is disabled so the Y axis scale no longer changes as new data is acquired Touch the middle third to 1 re enable automatic scaling and 2 reset automatic scaling that is ignore previously acquired data and adjust the Y range to accommodate only new data Touch the bottom third to zoom in Automatic scaling is disabled Drag to pan Touch this area to zoom out Touch this area to enable and reset automatic scaling Touch this area to zoom in OOL How to change the Y scale of the bottom graph Touch and drag to pan How to pan the bottom graph vertically Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 56 Program screen SRS gt lI Out2 PID setpoint 50 0000 pause 10 00 min Input Out2 PID setpoint 25 0000 Out2 PID setpoint 50 pause 10 pause 10 00 min Save Delete 4 tie s A program is a set of one or more instructions that can be used to customize the behavior of the instrument Programs can be input over the RS 232 GPIB USB or Ethernet interface from the program screen or as a files on a USB memory device Regardless of how a program was input its progress can be monitored from the program screen The Program screen has an Input window wh
318. the previous macro has finished The OPC instruction waits for all autotuning processes to finish regardless of whether they were started by the parent macro or not It also waits for all setpoint ramps to finish regardless of how those ramps were started Finally if two or more macros are running at the same time the OPC instruction waits until all other macros started by the source port have finished running before setting the Operation Complete bit If the GPIB port starts two or more macros that contain WAI OPC or OPC instructions the result is a deadlock and all of the macros pause indefinitely Macros started by the front panel or another port are ignored While the OPC instruction is waiting new commands received over the source port are held in the input buffer The commands are not processed until the OPC instruction is finished waiting OPC Identical to the OPC command except that instead of setting the Operation Complete bit OPC writes 1 to the I O port once all tuning processes setpoint ramps and GPIB macros have finished PHO Port holdoff Prevents the I O port that received this instruction from processing any incoming messages until the current macro the macro that contains the PHO instruction has finished running Once the current macro is finished the I O port returns to its normal state and the PHO instruction has no further effect Not a standard IEEE488 2 instruction PMC Purge Macro Com
319. thermoelectric cooler and a sensor input for a thermistor RTD or IC temperature sensor The card has a single 15 pin D sub connector for both sections The pinout follows Pins 7 and 8 are shown in bold because they must be connected in order to read a sensor the other sensor pins are optional Likewise at least one TEC currentt pin and one TEC current pin must be connected to use a TEC the other TEC pins are optional Sensor excitation Sensor signal Sensor shield TEC shield TEC current TEC current TEC current TEC current I5 Sensor signal I4 Sensor excitation 13 Not connected 12 TEC sense I Not connected 10 TEC sense 9 Not connected m NWAUDN CO TEC driver section A thermoelectric cooler TEC also referred to as a Peltier device is a solid state electric heat pump that can both heat and cool depending on the direction of current flow Thermoelectric coolers are generally used for precise temperature control of small objects in the range of 100 100 C With its high current low voltage output its ability to change the direction of current flow and circuitry to protect the TEC from excessive voltages the PTC440 is primarily intended to drive TEC devices However it can also drive low resistance optimally 2 4 ohm resistive heaters In this case the lower output limit should be set to 0 A and the heater should be connected to pins 1 and 3 If the TEC is unplugged while current is
320. time does the negative terminal actually have a negative voltage with respect to ground Current bypass When the BYPASS signal from the microprocessor is low PhotoMOS relay U230A shorts out the positive and negative terminals This feature is used when no TEC is attached to the PTC440 otherwise small errors in the current monitor or DAC output would result in a 15V differential voltage across the TEC and TEC terminals With such a voltage present the output filtering capacitors would produce a brief current spike of tens of amps when the TEC is plugged in enough to destroy the TEC The current bypass is also used whenever the output current is set to zero to reduce the current resulting from any small errors in the current monitor or DAC output PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 150 The current bypass should not be activated while current is flowing However in case it is resistor R231 protects the relay by preventing more than 0 15A of current from flowing through it Power shutoff When the TEC POWER signal from the microprocessor is low FET Q202 shuts off power to the current source This safety mechanism is engaged whenever the PTC s outputs are disabled with the Output Enable button When the power is not shut off even if the set current is zero a 7 5 V voltage is present at the TEC and TEC terminals and shorting these terminals to ground can cause the PTC440 to output its the maximum current AD
321. tion 64 SRS When outputs are disabled by pressing the Output Enable button or with the OutputEnable off remote command the TEC output turns off immediately regardless of the slew rate setting When outputs are re enabled the TEC output ramps up to its previous value at the desired slew rate Vmax Only appears on the Vmon channel of TEC driver cards Sets the maximum voltage that the PTC440 TEC driver can output This control is intended to protect thermoelectric coolers from damaging voltages If the measured voltage across the TEC is above Vmax for more than one second current to the TEC is automatically shut off The first time this occurs after the system is turned on a hardware fault window also pops up on the front panel display To turn the current back on again set the channel s output to zero for example by touching the Off button on the Channel menu or by disabling and re enabling all outputs with the Output Enable button If the output current suddenly increases and the slew rate setting is too high it is still possible to damage the TEC even if Vmax is set to an appropriate value To prevent such damage the output voltage should if possible also be limited by setting the output range to the lowest possible value e g 3V 5A 6V 5A or 9V 5A and by setting the Lo Imt and Hi Imt controls for the output channel to current values that do not produce excessive voltages The TEC voltage can also be limited u
322. to 5A of current It also has eight isolated TTL I O lines on a 25 pin connector that s compatible with the pinout of the standard PC parallel port The TTL lines can be used as inputs or outputs but all eight must have the same direction The relays are hosted on a single 12 pin pluggable terminal block The four relays are labeled A through D and each relay has three connections labeled NC normally open COM common and NO normally open The relay is in its normal or deactivated state when the PTC is turned off when its outputs are not enabled or when the relay is set to 0 In this state the NC pin is connected to the COM pin and the NO pin is unconnected When the relay is set to 1 and the outputs are enabled the relay is activated the NO pin is connected to the COM pin and the NC pin is unconnected The relays appear on the PTC10 display as a single 4 bit integer value between 0 and 15 If no relays are activated the value is 0 Each relay if activated adds the following to the displayed value Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction I9 Relay Value A B 2 C 4 D 8 Therefore if the relay channel reads 2 only relay B is activated If the channel reads 6 relays B and C are activated Conversely setting the relay channel to 6 activates relays B and C and deactivates the other relays To set an individual relay from
323. to trace 2 two times this constant is added to trace 3 three times this constant is added to trace 4 and so on Colors the colors used in the graph can be defined in this section Each color is a set of three numbers between 0 and 255 for red green and blue brightness Enter 255 255 255 without the quotes for white and 0 0 0 for black Show tick marks some data files can include tick marks to mark events If the show tick marks box is checked the tick marks are shown as small spikes in the graph Antialias if checked the plot is drawn with antialiased lines This improves the appearance of the graph but also significantly increases the amount of time that it takes to draw the graph PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 132 Process menu SRS Axis linewidth the width of the box surrounding the plot in pixels Grid linewidth the width of the plot gridlines in pixels Plot linewidth the width of the plot traces in pixels Values other than 1 may significantly increase the amount of tie that it takes to draw the graph Show statistics Shows information such as the average minimum and maximum values for all data within the graph s X range Only information for the buffer plotted in black is shown Linear regression The linear regression feature can be used to determine how much one temperature sensor is miscalibrated compared to another You are asked to choose an X
324. to undo all changes since the last time the graph was updated and close the window PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 131 SRS Automatically scale X if checked the graph is automatically scaled to show the full time span of the data X minimum if Automatically scale X is checked this box indicates the time at the left hand edge of the graph any values entered here by the user are ignored If Automatically scale X is not checked the time entered here determines the time at the left hand edge of the graph X maximum if Automatically scale X is checked this box indicates the time at the right hand edge of the graph any values entered here by the user are ignored If Automatically scale X is not checked the time entered here determines the time at the right hand edge of the graph Automatically scale Y if checked the graph is automatically scaled to show the full vertical span of the data The graph is automatically rescaled as necessary whenever the data is modified Y minimum if Automatically scale Y is checked this box indicates the lower limit of the graph any values entered here by the user are ignored If Automatically scale Y is not checked the value entered here determines the lower limit of the graph Y maximum if Automatically scale Y is checked this box indicates the upper limit of the graph any values entered here by the user are ignored If Automatically scale Y is not
325. tor network SMT Leadless RN312 4 00909 463 470X4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN330 4 00909 463 470X4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN332 4 00909 463 470X4D Resistor network SMT Leadless RN341 4 00908 463 270X4D Resistor network SMT Leadless U 101 3 01497 360 ATMEGA162 16AI Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg u 102 3 01498 360 74ABT16245CMTD Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg u 201 3 01469 360 MAX6250BCSA Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg u 202 3 01499 360 DAC8534IPW Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 203 3 01838 360 MC33079D Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 204 3 01365 360 DG411DY Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 205 3 01838 360 MC33079D Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 206 3 01369 360 DG409DY Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg u 209 3 01500 360 LTC2440CGN Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 302 3 00743 360 74HC138D Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 331 3 00749 360 74HC541 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 340 3 00787 360 74H C595 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 350 3 00814 360 78M05 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 360 3 01175 360 78M15 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg U 370 3 01176 360 79M15 Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Z0 0 00472 018 1 329631 2 Jam Nut Z0 7 01734 720 PTC ANL IO BRKT Fabricated Part Zi 0 00306 026 4 40X3 16PP Screw Black All Types Z2 0 00306 026 4 40X3 16PP Screw Black All Types PTC520 digital I
326. tput card and PTC440 TEC driver are prone to overheating if the fan speed is manually set to a value that is too low especially if the card is operated at a high voltage range and heater resistance is low If the PCB temperature of one of these cards exceeds 60 C its output is automatically shut off Set the output to zero to re enable it for example by pressing the Output Enable key which will disable all the PTC s outputs or by pressing the Channel Off button Besides the main system fan the PTC10 also has an internal fan that periodically turns on to keep the main power supply cool This fan is unaffected by any user accessible setting Asso PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 39 Using PID feedback How stable is the PTCIO s feedback control The stability of the PTC10 s feedback is usually limited not by the PTC10 itself but by all the things outside the PTC10 the sample that s being heated the heater and the environment The key factor is how rapidly the sample can be heated or cooled relative to how rapidly the temperature changes due to environmental factors such as ambient temperature variations Some of our customers have reported achieving 1 mK stability although it s often necessary to optimize the mechanical design of the system before this goal can be reached To ensure that the sample can be heated or cooled rapidly the heater must have adequate power it must be in good thermal contact with the sam
327. trol temperatures with millikelvin resolution Its features include Modular design The PTC10 can accept up to four I O cards each of which can read up to four temperature sensors and or drive one heater The instrument can be customized by selecting the I O cards best suited to your application The PTC10 also comes standard with four 10V I O channels that can be used with external amplifiers to read signals and drive heaters Reads up to l6 temperature sensors Temperature input cards are available for reading thermocouples RTDs thermistors and diodes For optimal signal to noise ratio each temperature input channel has its own 24 bit ADC Drives up to 6 heaters Three kinds of heater driver cards are available for driving resistive heaters and thermoelectric devices Depending on the model of driver card used two or three heaters can be directly driven at full power In addition the unpowered voltage I O channels included as standard equipment can be used to drive heaters with the help of an external amplifier Graphical touchscreen display The PTC10 can display temperature measurements and heater output on graphs or numeric displays Any combination of channels can be displayed and four different channel combinations can be saved and recalled Touchscreen operation makes the instrument versatile and easy to use Logs data to USB memory devices Up to 10 data points second channel can be logged to standard USB memory sticks and hard
328. try Hardware Wire 22 UL1007 PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Z0 0 01245 052 8 1 2 BLUE Z0 1 01054 179 4POS VERT SING Z0 1 01216 172 PTC AC OUTPUT Z0 7 01737 720 PTC BRKT PTC430 50W DC output card C11 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C112 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C 113 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C12 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C122 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C 123 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C 124 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C20 5 00389 552 1500P C202 5 00389 552 1500P C 203 5 00606 578 1U 100V C 204 5 00389 552 1500P C211 5 00607 553 10U 50V SMT C212 5 00607 553 10U 50V SMT C213 5 00607 553 10U 50V SMT C214 5 00608 553 100U 100V SMT C215 5 00608 553 100U 100V SMT C216 5 00605 578 82UF 25V C 230 5 00519 569 33U T35 C231 5 00513 569 1U 16V A CASE C232 5 00629 568 1000P X 4 C 233 5 00299 568 JU C 234 5 00299 568 1U C 235 5 00299 568 JU C 236 5 00299 568 1U C 240 5 00299 568 JdU C 243 5 00299 568 JdU C 244 5 00299 568 1U C 245 5 00627 578 0 1U X4 C 250 5 00299 568 1U C251 5 00319 569 10U T35 C252 5 00299 568 JdU C 253 5 00319 569 10U T35 C 254 5 00299 568 1U C255 5 00298 568 01U C 261 5 00299 568 JdU C 270 5 00299 568 1U C271 5 00798 568 2 2U C272 5 00525 578 1U C 273 5 00513 569 1U 16V A CASE C274 5 00654 500 O1UF X 4 C275 5 00525 578 1U C 276 5 00525 578 1U C277 5 00299 568 JU C281 5 00299 568 JdU C 290 5 00299 568 1U C 300 5 00299 568 JU C 310 5 00299 568 JU C311 5 00522 569 47
329. try using your computer s IP address but change the last digit 3 Enter a Subnet mask If you re using a direct connection this must be the same as the subnet mask on your computer 4 Open a DOS window on your computer If necessary install the Windows telnet client by typing pkgmgr iu TelnetClient In the DOS window type telnet 0 0 0 0 but replace 0 0 0 0 with the Ethernet address you just entered 5 Type popup hello and press Enter note that the first time you type a command the characters aren t echoed back You should see a popup window on the PTC10 s screen 6 Type Description and press Enter The PTC10 should return an instrument description string If your PC application doesn t support telnet various serial port redirectors are available that map a telnet connection to a COM port We have successfully tested the following on Windows XP Serial Port Redirector FabulaTech www fabulatech com Set the Protocol to Raw Data and flow control to None disable all other options TCP Com TAL Technologies www taltech com select Create Virtual COM port make sure flow control is set to None select the Connector COM1 COMO etc and click the Activate button Windows XP computers introduce a 150 ms delay after receiving the first character of each message from the PTC limiting the speed of the Ethernet connection Windows Vista and Linux computers do not have this issue Communication assembly an
330. uching the output button brings up a list of output channels from this list select the channel to be shut off If a channel is already selected touching it again de selects the channel and no channel will be shut off when the alarm triggers Relay If a digital I O card is installed in slot 6 the alarm can switch one of its four relays on It s possible to assign more than one alarm to a given relay in which case the relay will turn on if any one of the alarms is triggered Min The lowest permissible value of the input The alarm is triggered if the input or the rate of change of the input becomes lower than this value Max The highest permissible value of the input The alarm is triggered if the input or the rate of change of the input exceeds this value Lag Prevents noise or glitches from inadvertently triggering the alarm The alarm will not be triggered until the input has continuously exceeded the min or max setting for this number of seconds The lag applies when the alarm is being switched and when it is being switched off Channel screen Cal column This menu is only available for input channels Type The Calibration Type control affects how raw sensor readings are converted to temperature measurements This control does not affect how the sensor is read The Type option appears on temperature input channels and on channels for which custom calibration tables have been loaded It does not by default appear on the
331. uit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Thru hole Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Crystal Oscillator Wire 24 UL1007 Strip 1 4x1 4 Tin Wire 22 UL1007 Wire 22 UL1007 Screw Slotted Nut Hex Heat Sinks Connector Female SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Capacitor Chip SMT1206 50V 5 NPO SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes Cap Tantalum SMT all case sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes SMT Ceramic Cap all sizes Cap Ceramic 50V SMT 1206 X7R LED Subminiature LED T1 Package LED T1 Package LED
332. up alternately on the front and back of the card mn Install the new I O card Put the back of the card in place first then press firmly down on the front of the card Ensure that the top of the card is level with the tops of all the other cards ON Re install the two back panel screws and re attach the top cover The card can be damaged if the screws are not installed 7 Turn the PTC10 on The new card should automatically appear on the Select screen and remote commands for the new card should automatically become available PTC320 thermistor diode RTD card SRS The PTC320 is a single channel multi range input card that can read a variety of temperature sensors It can read resistances between 1 Q and 2 5 MQ and can also read diode temperature sensors Standard calibration curves are included for the following sensors The Range column indicates the range of the standard calibration curve outside this range no reading appears for the sensor It may be possible to obtain a larger range by uploading a custom calibration curve PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction pel Manufacturer Merced i Si410 1 0 450 Scientific Instruments Si430 0 400 Si440 1 0 500 DT 470 CY7 1 4475 Diode LakeShore Omega DT 670 CY670 4 500 700 1 5475 Cryo Con 800 1 4 385 S900 1 5 500 RX 102A 0 050 4
333. ure Controller Parts List 179 U210 3 00581 AD822 U230 3 01443 AQW225NA U240 3 01685 LT1991IMS U250 3 01685 LT1991IMS Uu260 3 01451 ADR421AR U280 3 01978 LT1368CS8 PBF Uu290 3 01938 LTC2445CUHF u291 3 01469 MAX6250BCSA U300 3 00741 74HC04 u310 3 01939 LM22678TJ ADJ U320 3 00956 MAX4602CWE U330 3 008 14 78M05 U340 3 01977 LM317MABDTG U360 3 01717 MAX6629MUT Uu400 3 01451 ADR421AR U410 3 00643 DG211BDY ROHS U420 3 01370 OPA277UA U430 3 01683 OPA333AIDBVT Uu440 3 01683 OPA333AIDBVT Uu500 3 00663 74HCO08 U540 3 00787 74HC595 U570 3 01979 79M05CDT RK Z1 0 00150 4 40X1 4PF Z10 0 01094 MAXO02 Z11 0 01094 MAX02 Z12 0 01094 MAX02 Z13 0 01095 HF300P 001 AC Z14 7 02095 PTC440 FLANGE Z2 0 00150 4 40X1 4PF Z3 0 00246 8 X 1 16 ZA 0 00246 8 X 1 16 Z5 0 00306 4 40X3 16PP Z6 0 00306 4 40X3 16PP Z1 0 01092 78060 Z8 0 01094 MAX02 Z9 0 01094 MAX02 PTC510 analog I O card C 101 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C 102 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C 103 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C 105 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C 106 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C 107 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C 108 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C 201 5 00470 569 2 2U T16 C202 5 00525 578 1U C 203 5 00470 569 2 2U T16 C 204 5 00299 568 1U C 205 5 00471 569 10U T16 C 206 5 00527 568 47U C 207 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C 208 5 00601 578 0 1UF 16V X7R C 209 5 00527 568 47U C210 5 00527 568 47U C211 5 00527 568
334. uring the resulting voltage drop A four wire RTD has two wires to carry the current and two to measure the voltage Negligible current flows through the voltage measuring wires ensuring that the resistance of the wires doesn t affect the measured voltage RTDs usually have the European temperature coefficient of 0 00385 Q Q C IEC751 standard The American coefficient of 0 00392 0 Q C is less common even in America The PTC321 RTD reader reads up to four 100 ohm platinum RTDs with a 1 mA excitation current The current through the RTD can be reversed with each reading to null out parasitic thermocouple voltages The PTC321 has a range of 10 400 Q allowing it to read 100 Q European type platinum RTDs in the temperature range 215 to 850 C RTDs with other base resistances can also be used but over a smaller temperature range The PTC321 is calibrated at ambient temperatures of 25 and 35 C An on board temperature sensor continuously interpolates between these two calibrations to account for thermal drift of the board s electronic components Since the PTC10 enclosure is usually elevated 2 to 3 degrees above ambient temperature the accuracy of the PTC321 may be reduced if the ambient temperature rises above about 32 C To further improve measurement stability the PTC321 can control the main enclosure fan to keep the card at a constant temperature see the Channel PCB button A narrow flange is available for the PTC321 With
335. ush Button NO Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Circuit Surface Mount Pkg Crystal Oscillator Crystal SMT Crystal Crystal Screw Black All Types Fabricated Part PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 157 PTC221 backplane Cic A oq a M e C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 D1 11 21 31 41 42 43 44 51 60 02 do 0c PWN 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 41 42 44 45 46 51 52 53 54 55 56 61 D 211 D 221 D 222 D 223 D 224 D 225 D 226 D 227 D 228 D 231 D 232 D 233 D 234 D 235 D 236 D 241 D 251 J 100 J 101 J 102 J 103 J 104 SRS 5 00
336. ut folder Output format The converted data can be saved as a text file an HTML file or a binary file In either case the output is a table with a timestamp column plus one column per channel and one line per sampling period Text files can be saved with a tab comma or space between the entries on each line HTML files are useful because they are easily viewed and are also easily imported into many application programs however this format should only be used for short datasets less than a thousand points because HTML browsers are very slow when displaying large tables Within an HTML table the first cell of each record see Log File Structure above is highlighted in yellow indicating that either 1 the logging rate was changed 2 the sensor was disconnected for at least 100 log points and then reconnected or 3 logging was stopped and restarted If the Binary output format is selected the output files are written in the PTC log format the same format as the input files Use this format if you d like to open resampled files in FileGrapher One output file is produced for each input file and the output files have the same names as the input files Use the Output file field to specify the directory in which the output files should be saved since they have the same names the output files must be saved in a different directory than the input files The Timestamp setting is ignored when binary output files are produced Time
337. vent the macro from starting 102 Empty instruction The instruction consisted of two quotes or parentheses in a row with no text in between 113 Invalid instruction The instruction was not recognized 109 Multiple argument error Two or more arguments were expected and the arguments provided did not conform to the types of arguments expected 121 Numeric argument error A numeric value was expected but a non numeric argument or no argument was provided 158 List argument error The argument must be chosen from a list of possible values but the argument provided is not in the list 180 Too many macros The maximum number 10 of macros is already running including the startup macro macros received from all I O ports and macros started from the Program screen At least one macro must finish before any new macros can be started 185 Excessive recursion A macro may call another macro which can call another macro and so on but only 6 levels of recursion are allowed This error is always generated if a macro calls itself 186 Assembled macro exceeds 1024 lines When a macro is assembled all of its subroutine calls are expanded into their component instructions thus the assembled macro only contains native instructions The assembled macro cannot be longer than 1024 lines 200 299 runtime errors Produced after the macro starts running After a runtime error occurs the macro continues to run PTCIO Progra
338. was turned off are not restarted When a macro is sent to the PTC over an I O port at least one instruction is executed before any other macros received from the same port begin to run Therefore if each message sent to an I O port contains only one instruction the instructions always run sequentially in the order that they were sent If some messages contain two or more instructions the PTC may execute them concurrently and replies may not be received in the expected order An instruction s parent macro is the macro that contains the instruction If more than one instance of a saved macro is running the term parent macro refers only to one specific instance While it is running each macro is automatically assigned a name The name can be used by the kill instruction to stop the macro and also appears as a tab on the Program screen It is possible to have two or more macros with the same name running If the macro was started by a remote command that was 32 or fewer characters long the macro name is the same as the remote command If the command was more than 32 characters long the PTC10 assigns the name Program XY where XY is a two digit number If the macro was started from the Program screen the contents of the Input field become the macro name unless the Input field contains more than 32 characters the macro is assigned the name Program XY where XY is a two digit number If the macro was started by pressing a m
339. ween two excitation currents If for example the sensor resistance is between 1 and 2 kQ the PTC440 can select either 1 mA or 100 uA excitation and if possible it keeps the excitation at its previous value Slew Only appears on the Out channel of TEC driver cards Sets the maximum positive and negative rate of change of the TEC driver output The rate must be between 0 and 1000 amps per second and the default value is 100 amps per second which corresponds to an unlimited slew rate at 10 samples second Each time the TEC current is set either by a PID feedback loop or with the Channel value control it ramps to the new value at this slew rate Rapid changes in the TEC current can create electromagnetic interference EMI in the temperature sensor and any other sensors near the TEC The resulting spikes in the temperature reading can cause feedback oscillations or noisy temperature readings For the slew rate setting to be effective the A D rate set with the System Other A D rate control should less than or equal to 100 ms The slew rate is implemented with a software algorithm that runs at each A D conversion and the TEC driver output has a 13 Hz lowpass filter If the A D rate is set for example to 1000 ms the algorithm only changes the TEC output current once each second and the output current therefore changes in discrete steps each of which may exceed the desired slew rate PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Opera
340. when the system is first turned on at the beginning of the day i e the heater is cold and its temperature stable After the step response finishes the feedback mode changes to manual and the heater ramps up to the setpoint Once the temperature is stabilized at the setpoint relay tuning can be used to produce more accurate PID parameters When relay tuning is complete the PID mode changes to manual Errors Attempting to set the PID mode when no PID input channel is selected produces a run time locked parameter error lt channel gt PID Ramp lt ramp rate gt Ramp rate Determines the setpoint ramp rate in degrees per second If the ramp rate is nonzero whenever the feedback setpoint is changed the feedback will gradually ramp the temperature to the new setpoint If the ramp rate is set to zero setpoint ramping is disabled and the PTC changes the temperature at the fastest possible rate Errors Attempting to set the ramp rate when no PID input channel is selected produces a run time locked parameter error lt channel gt PID RampT lt float gt Ramp temperature The ramp temperature is an internally generated setpoint for the PID feedback loop it is the temperature that the PTC10 is trying to maintain at the present moment If the feedback is not running the ramp temperature always equals the sensor temperature since the PTC10 has no control over the sensor temperature when the feedback is not running When the feedbac
341. y available for output channels It cancels any active autotuning process turns PID feedback off and sets the channel s output to zero or the channel s lower limit see the lt channel gt Low Imt instruction whichever is higher lt channel gt PCB max temp in C gt PTC320 PTC321 PTC330 I O cards only Maximum PCB temperature If the temperature of the card exceeds this value and System Other Fan is set to Auto the PTC10 increases the fan speed to cool the card down The PCB temperature is always expressed in C regardless of the System Display Units setting lt channel gt Plot I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The Plot screen can display up to eight graphs each of which can contain up to eight traces The Plot command indicates which of these the channel should appear in when Custom plot order is selected Plot 1 is the topmost graph If no channels are assigned to a plot that plot will not appear PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 110 SRS lt channel gt Points integer Controls the maximum number of ADC readings used to calculate the average and standard deviation Note that this refers to the number of ADC readings not the number of log points Each time the number of points is changed the accumulated statistics are cleared Errors if the number of points is not between 2 and 6000 inclusive a run time parameter out of bounds error occurs Channel Polarity 0 I Digital
342. y cycle should go to 25 Before the feedback can be used the PID gain factors will need to be set by using the automatic tuning feature on channel V1 If tuning is successful the feedback should now operate normally If more than one feedback loop is required set up channels V2 and or V3 as described for channel V1 and add these lines after the d 1 statement if V2 gt t d 2 if V3 gt t d 4 Ases PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 125 SRS The macro can automatically run every time the PTC10 is turned on just send the command define Startup replacing the with the macro contents PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 127 SRS PC applications SRS offers a package of PC applications for displaying PTC10 logfiles and converting them to ASCII The package can be downloaded free of charge from the SRS website at www thinksrs com click on Downloads gt Software Once unzipped the applications can be run by double clicking the exe icons or dragging PTC log files to the exe icons It is not necessary to run an installation program PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 128 PTCFileConverter SRS PTCFileConverter is a Windows utility that converts one or more binary PTC log files into a single text file that can be imported by popular application software It can also downsample log files to make large f
343. y more than 0 25A the microcontroller requests that a ground fault popup window be displayed on the PTC s front panel A multiplexed 16 bit ADC U280 monitors the heater current the voltage across the heater and the return current The ADC has a range of 0 4V The heater current is monitored by measuring the voltage across the sense resistor which is 0 2V when no current is flowing and 4 0V when the maximum current for the selected range is flowing The dither current circuit is either fully on or fully off The on off state is controlled by one of the microcontroller s PWM outputs PTC431 100W DC output card SRS The PTC431 outputs 2 A of current with a compliance voltage of up to 50V 24V to 50V 2A boost regulator a variable voltage power supply The output is labeled t 50V but in fact is always a few volts greater than the voltage across the heater with a minimum of 24V and a maximum of 55V Regulator U210 adjusts the power supply output in order to keep the voltage at its feedback pin FB pin 3 equal to 1 26 V The feedback pin voltage is produced by a voltage divider between the power supply output and op amp U220A When the voltage across the heater OUT is 55V op amp U220A outputs OV when OUT is 24V U220A outputs 1 23V Diode D221 protects the feedback pin from an over voltage condition during start up R214 sinks current when the op amp output is near its lower rail Constant current heater driver the card has three
344. y stored log data data on USB drives is not affected Returns all plots to autoscaled X and Y with a 1 minute X range and changes the plot location of all channels to 1 Ifa TRG remote command was previously received re enables automatic A D conversions Hides internal monitor channels extras Ports Closes all I O ports and re opens them USB and Telnet connections are lost The port settings baud rate IP address etc remain unchanged Port settings Resets all I O port settings to their factory defaults Channels Resets the settings on the Channel menu for all channels to their factory defaults Also sets the A D rate to 100 ms Log Resets the default log rate to 1 second sets the log rate for each channel to the default and enables automatic logging to USB If a USB storage device is attached erases log files in the root directory and begins logging to USB All resets all of the above items PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 80 Firmware updates The PTC10 s firmware can be updated by copying a new firmware file onto a USB stick plugging the USB stick into the PTC10 and issuing a remote command Besides the CPU firmware each I O card has its own firmware that can be upgraded When the firmware is updated a few of your settings may revert to their default values if for example the meaning of the setting has changed in the new firmware In general though firmware updates do not aff
345. ys a single graph in a 200 x 375 pixel window Medium plot size Restores the default single graph in a 294 x 486 pixel window Large plot size Displays a single graph in a 600 x 1000 pixel window Add small header Adds a 50 pixel tall graph with no X axis labels above the current graph Add large header Adds a 100 pixel tall graph with no X axis labels above the current graph Remove headers Removes all graphs except for the bottom graph PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 136 Command line and macro instructions Ases PTCIO Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 137 Instruction add buffer 1 buffer2 addGraph b 350 addx buffer 0 0 alignAIl annotation annotation annotationPosition position antialias on off autoscale XY on off axisDivisions 4 4 break Pos Neg sourceBuffer resultBase cp n buffer buffer2 clearMark clearMarks clearPlot copy sourceBuffer destinationBuffer crop sourceBuffer destinationBuffer directory directoryName div buffer 1 buffer2 diva buffer divx buffer 1 0 drawMarks fontSize 10 hideMarks level buffer linewidth pga load buffer fileName lowpass buffer 1 0 markLevel buffer 1 0 1 0 median buffer moveMark 0 0 mpy buffer buffer2 mpyx buffer 0 0 norm buffer ASRS Description add two buffers buffer buffer buffer2 add a new gr

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

L`adrénaline sans stress!  LiNC-NET - Parent Directory  ALADIN User's Manual  LAN-SW05P/TAPA 08P/TAPA取扱説明書  Manual - Astronics Test Systems  Samson AirLine Micro AL2 Wireless Camera System Manual  Samsung MAGIC S24A650D User Manual    V E C T R O N S Y S T E MS A G  HP Cloud OS for Moonshot Administrator's Guide  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file